JP2019150091A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To increase game interest by enabling a performance by a movable accessory to be started immediately after power restoration.SOLUTION: A game machine includes a movable accessory, start storage means, and performance control means. The start storage means, when power failure occurs in a state including a start memory in which the display result of a variation display game is a special result, holds the start memory. The performance control means, when power failure occurs in a state including a start memory in which the display result of a variation display game is a special result, operates the movable accessory in a first operation after recovery from the power failure, operates the movable accessory in the variation display game executed after the first operation, operates the movable accessory in a third operation in a special game state executed after the second operation, and operates the same movable accessory in any of the first operation, the second operation, or the third operation.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 97

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state that gives a player a game value when a display result of a variable display game that displays variably displayed identification information is a special result.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a gaming machine including a movable accessory that can execute an effect related to a game (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2009-297368 A

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is room for improving the interest of the game by enabling the production by the movable accessory to start immediately after the power failure is restored.

  An object of the present invention is to improve the interest of a game by enabling an effect by a movable object to be started immediately after a power failure is restored.

  In a typical embodiment of the present invention, in a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state that gives a player a game value when a display result of a variable display game that changes identification information becomes a special result, Movable starter, start storage means capable of storing start memory that is the right to execute the variable display game based on establishment of start conditions, control of the movable accessory, and start memory display corresponding to the start memory And display control means capable of executing the control, and the start memory means includes a start memory in which the display result of the variable display game becomes a special result in the stored start memory. When a power outage occurs in the state, the start memory which becomes the special result is held, and the effect control means displays the display result of the variable display game as the special result in the start memory stored by the start memory means. In the variable display game that is executed after the first operation, when the power failure occurs in a state where the start memory is included, the movable accessory is operated in the first operation after the recovery from the power failure. , Operating the movable accessory in a second action, and operating the movable accessory in a third action in the special gaming state executed after the second action, the first action, The same movable accessory is operated in either the second operation or the third operation.

  According to one embodiment of the present invention, after a power failure is restored, an effect by a movable accessory can be started immediately, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure which shows the structure of a batch display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the presentation control system of a gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of a main process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of a main process. It is a figure which shows the structure of RAM of the microcomputer for games of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an output process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a winning opening switch / state monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a game state check process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a probability setting value change process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a probability setting value confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure start port switch common process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure pending | holding information determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 1 fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a small hit determination process. It is a figure which illustrates the big hit probability and the small hit probability of a special figure fluctuation display game with respect to each setting (each set value). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a figure which illustrates the big hit symbol distribution (big hit breakdown) of a special figure change display game with respect to each setting. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure change process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a symbol fluctuation | variation control process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a usual game process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a usual figure normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of an external information edit process. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the batch display apparatus in the middle of a probability setting change (the 1). It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the batch display apparatus in the middle of a probability setting change (the 2). It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the batch display apparatus in the middle of a probability setting change (the 3). It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the batch display apparatus in the middle of a probability setting change (the 4). It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the batch display apparatus in the middle of probability setting change (the 5). It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the batch display apparatus in the middle of a probability setting change (the 6). It is a figure which shows the other structural example of a package display apparatus. It is a figure which shows another structure of a package display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a received command check process. It is a flowchart which shows a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows single-shot system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows prefetch symbol type command processing. It is a flowchart which shows prefetch fluctuation system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows a symbol type command process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation type command process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation production setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit system command process. It is a figure which shows a mode that the detachable parts which concern on 2nd Embodiment are attached to the gaming machine. It is a figure showing roughly the example of composition of the game board and parts concerning a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows another example of the game board and parts which concern on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the parallel serial conversion part of the identification board | substrate which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the 1st modification of the identification board | substrate (especially parallel serial conversion part) which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the 2nd modification of the identification board | substrate (especially parallel serial conversion part) which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the 3rd modification of the identification board | substrate which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the main process of the production | presentation control apparatus which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the parts collation process which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the reference table which matches a model designation | designated command and model identification information in 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the transition state at the time of power activation (power restoration) of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the probability setting value change process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process at the time of the setting value reception which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the segment LED edit process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of the setting change which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the display apparatus at the time of the setting change which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the 1st modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of the setting change which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the 2nd modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of the setting change which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode at the time of the setting change of the state display apparatus which concerns on the 2nd modification of 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the 3rd modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of the setting change which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the 4th modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of the setting change which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of the setting confirmation which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the display apparatus at the time of the setting confirmation which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of the setting confirmation which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of the display screen of the display apparatus at the time of the setting confirmation which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the address of the input port in the game control apparatus which concerns on 4th Embodiment, and the signal input into each input port. It is a front view of the game board concerning a 5th embodiment. The figure which shows the relationship (FIG. 75 (A)) with the number of holding | maintenance and the generation | occurrence | production probability of a setting suggestion effect which concerns on 5th Embodiment (FIG. 75 (A)), and the relationship (FIG. 75 (B)) of a holding number, a setting value, and the lighting probability of red lighting. It is. The relationship between error priority and error code bits according to the sixth embodiment (FIG. 76 (A)), and error code (binary) and error code (hexadecimal) notation (FIG. 76 (B)). FIG. This is a display example of error codes and error contents according to the sixth embodiment, and when there are two errors (left: binary notation, right: hexadecimal notation) (FIG. 77 (A)), one error is eliminated. In this case (FIG. 77 (B)), the case where all errors are resolved (FIG. 77 (C)) is shown. It is an example which switches the display of the error content which concerns on 6th Embodiment, Comprising: The example which displays a panel radio wave error as an initial state (FIG. 78 (A)), The example which operates an operation part once and displays a frame radio wave error (FIG. 78 (B)) and an example (FIG. 78 (C)) of further displaying the switch abnormality error by operating the operation unit once. It is a figure which shows the example by which the detachable part which concerns on 7th Embodiment was attached to the gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the example which displays the alerting information which concerns on 7th Embodiment on the display apparatus which is displaying the decoration special symbol of a special figure fluctuation display game. It is a figure which shows the example which changes the display mode of the alerting | reporting information which concerns on 7th Embodiment according to operation | movement of a movable body. It is a part collation process which concerns on 7th Embodiment, and is a figure which shows the example in the case of prohibiting the drive of a frame decoration apparatus. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the identification board | substrate of the parts which concern on 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the reference table (FIG. 84 (A)) which matches the model designation | designated command and model identification information which concern on 7th Embodiment, and the reference table (FIG. 84 (B)) which shows the classification | category of a nonconforming model. It is a part collation process which concerns on 7th Embodiment, and is a figure which shows the example in the case of changing a drive mode by classifying parts. It is a front view of the game board with which the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment is provided. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the light-guide plate control process which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the movable body control process which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is a front view of a game board when the light guide plate concerning an 8th embodiment carries out initial operation. It is a front view of a game board when an internal combination and an external combination concerning an eighth embodiment perform initial operation. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of the initial operation control processing concerning an 8th embodiment. It is a front view of a game board when performing the variable display game concerning an 8th embodiment. It is a front view of a game board when a reach effect is performed when performing the variable display game concerning an 8th embodiment. It is a front view of a game board when a reach production is performed in a change display game, when performing initial operation control processing concerning an 8th embodiment. It is the modification of the front view of a game board when the reach | play effect is performed by the variable display game, while performing the initial motion control process which concerns on 8th Embodiment. It is the 2nd modification of the front view of a game board when a reach production is performed in a change display game, while performing initial operation control processing concerning an 8th embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the timing of the display mode of the change display game before and after power failure recovery concerning a 9th embodiment. In 10th Embodiment, it is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of a display apparatus when identification information is displayed by each display mode. In 10th Embodiment, it is the screen transition figure which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in time series, and the screen transition of the whole game after the display result of a variable display game turns into a special result aspect until a special game is started It is an example. It is a figure which shows the structure aspect and variation aspect of the decoration special symbol displayed on the display screen of a display apparatus regarding 11th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of the structural aspect of a decoration special symbol displayed on the display screen of a display apparatus, and a fluctuation aspect regarding 11th Embodiment. In 11th Embodiment, it is a table referred in order to set the structure aspect and variation aspect of a decoration special symbol. In 11th Embodiment, it is a modification of the table referred in order to set the structure aspect and variation aspect of a decoration special symbol. It is the screen transition diagram (first half) which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in time series about the 11th embodiment. It is the screen transition diagram (latter half) which showed the display screen of the display apparatus in time series about 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the main process which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the hitting notification process which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the single system command processing which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process at the time of the striking direction reception which concerns on 12th Embodiment. It is the screen transition diagram (the 1) which illustrates the display screen of a display device in time series about a 12th embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram (the 2) which illustrates the display screen of a display in time series about a 12th embodiment. It is the screen transition diagram (the 3) which illustrates the display screen of a display apparatus in time series regarding 12th Embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the form of the image of a right-handed instruction | indication display regarding 13th Embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates the color change inside a right-handed instruction | indication display regarding 13th Embodiment. It is another figure which illustrates the color change inside a right-handed instruction | indication display regarding 13th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example arrange | positioned so that a color may change spatially gradually according to a hue ring in a right-handed instruction | indication display regarding 13th Embodiment. FIG. 38 is a screen transition diagram illustrating movement of a right-handed instruction display on the display screen of the display device with respect to the thirteenth embodiment. It is a figure which illustrates addition of the effect image with respect to a right-handed instruction | indication display regarding 13th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the presence or absence of each parameter which prescribes | regulates and characterizes the production | presentation aspect of alerting | reporting effect regarding 13th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows another example of the presence or absence of each parameter which prescribes | regulates and characterizes the production | presentation aspect of alerting | reporting effect regarding 13th Embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram which shows the modification of the production | presentation aspect of the alerting | reporting effect by the right-handed instruction | indication display regarding 13th Embodiment. It is a screen transition diagram which shows the production | presentation aspect of the alerting | reporting effect by the left-handed instruction display regarding 13th Embodiment.

[First Embodiment]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Note that front, rear, left, and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to directions viewed from the player who is playing the game.

[Overall view of gaming machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine.

  The gaming machine 10 includes an opening / closing frame attached to a frame 11 fixed to the island facility so as to be freely opened and closed through a hinge. The open / close frame includes a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

  A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is disposed on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game viewing area in which a game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 is visible.

  The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed by opening only the glass frame 15. Further, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 7) and the like disposed on the back side of the game board 30. Can do.

  Various frame constituent members are disposed on the edge portion of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14.

  In the upper center and the left side of the glass frame 15, decoration devices 18a and 18b capable of producing a light emission according to the gaming state are arranged. The decoration devices 18a and 18b house lighting members such as LEDs inside, and perform a light emission effect according to the gaming state. The illumination members disposed inside these decoration devices 18a and 18b constitute a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

  Upper speakers 19a are respectively disposed in the upper right corner portion and the upper left corner portion of the glass frame 15. Apart from these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided at the lower part of the gaming machine 10. The lower speaker 19 b is disposed in the lower left corner portion of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner portion of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, and the like.

  On the right side of the glass frame 15, a projecting effect unit 13 that extends in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and projects toward the front (player side) is disposed. The protrusion effect unit 13 is an effect device that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the progress of the game. The illumination member disposed inside the projecting effect unit 13 also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

  An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower portion of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape whose upper surface is open. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to a ball launcher (not shown) one by one.

  The upper plate unit further includes an effect operation device that receives an input operation from the player, a ball lending operation device that receives an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the game state. .

  The effect operation device is an operation device in which the touch panel 25b is incorporated in the effect button 25, and is provided in the upper center of the upper plate unit so that the player can easily operate.

  When the player operates the effect operation device, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in a special figure variation display game or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode), or to execute a notice effect in advance for notifying the result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory. It should be noted that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when the variable display game is simply used, in this specification, the special figure variable display game is indicated.

  Further, the effect pattern may be changed not only while the variable display game is being executed, but also when the player operates the effect operation device during non-execution.

  Note that the gaming state when the variable display game is executed includes a plurality of gaming states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. In addition, the special gaming state is, for example, a state where a specific game state is a short-time state or a state where a probability of a special result (for example, big hit) is high (probability change state, probability change state), big hit state (special game state) ), A small hit gaming state (small hit state).

  Here, the probability variation state (specific game state) is one that continues until the next big hit (loop type), one that continues until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed (number-of-times type, ST), and There are things that continue until a predetermined probability falling lottery is won (falling lottery type).

  In addition, whether or not to generate a probable change state is not determined by the big hit symbol random number, it is possible to always generate a probable change state when a big hit occurs, or provide a winning device equipped with a specific area, etc. The probability variation state may be generated when a game ball passes through the area.

  The ball lending operation device is an operation device that is operated when a player borrows a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate unit. The ball lending operation device includes a ball lending button 27, a return button 28, and a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when borrowing a game ball, and the return button 28 is used when discharging a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. It is a button operated by the player. The balance display unit 26 is a display area in which a balance such as a prepaid card is displayed.

  The decoration device 22 houses an illumination member such as an LED and performs a light emission effect or the like according to the gaming state, and is provided at the front portion of the upper plate unit. The illumination member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

  An operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball launcher (not shown) and a game ball can be stored below the glass frame 15 including the above-described upper plate unit and the like, and below the front frame 12. A lower plate 23 is provided.

  The operation handle 24 is disposed at the lower right portion of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19b on the right side. When the player rotates the operation handle 24, the ball launcher launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the game area 32 of the game board 30. The firing speed of the game ball launched from the ball launcher is set so as to increase as the amount of rotation of the operation handle 24 increases. In other words, the ball launching device can change the launching force (speed) at which the game ball is launched into the game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and can play the game in various launching modes having different firing forces. Can fire a ball. The firing mode includes left-handed (normal hit) in which the game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 32 and right-handed in which the game ball flows down on the right side of the game area 32.

  The lower plate 23 is disposed below the upper plate unit at a predetermined interval with respect to the upper plate unit. The lower plate 23 includes a ball punching hole 23a that penetrates the bottom surface of the lower plate 23 in the vertical direction, and an opening / closing operation unit 23b for opening and closing the ball punching hole 23a. When the player operates the opening / closing operation portion 23b to open the ball hole 23a, the game ball stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball hole 23a.

[Game board]
Next, the gaming board 30 of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 2A. FIG. 2A is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the gaming machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 2A, the game board 30 includes a plate-like game board main body 30a serving as a mounting base for various members. The game board main body 30a is made of wooden or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front surface of the game board main body 30a. The gaming machine 10 is configured to play a game by firing a game ball from a ball launching device in a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, and the like are arranged as members for changing the flow direction of the game ball. The shot game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

  At the approximate center of the game area 32, a center case (front structure) 40 that forms a window portion serving as a display area of the variable display game is attached. A display device 41 is arranged behind the window formed in the center case 40 as an effect display device (variable display device) that variably displays (variably displays) a plurality of identification information. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that display contents can be viewed from the front side of the game board 30 through the window portion of the center case 40. Note that the display device 41 is not limited to the one provided with a liquid crystal display, and may be provided with a display such as an EL or a CRT.

  The display screen (display unit) of the display device 41 is provided with a plurality of variable display areas, and identification information (special symbols) and characters that produce a variable display game are displayed in each variable display area. In addition, an image based on the progress of the game (a jackpot display, a fanfare display, an ending display, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

  The center case 40 has an inflow port 40a to the warp passage 40e for guiding the game balls flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage on which the game balls that have passed through the warp passage 40e can roll. Part 40b. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is disposed above the start winning opening 36 and the normal variation winning device 37, the game balls that roll on the stage portion 40b enter the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37. It is easier to win.

  An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided on the upper and right sides of the center case 40, respectively. The top effect unit 40c and the side effect unit 40d constitute part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

  In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal symbol start gate (ordinary start gate) 34 is provided. A gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the general diagram start gate 34 is provided inside the general diagram start gate 34. When the game ball that has been driven into the game area 32 passes through the usual figure start gate 34, the usual figure variation display game is executed.

  A general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40, and a general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right gaming area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of game balls in the general winning opening 35 is detected by winning opening switches (SW) 35 a to 35 n (see FIG. 3) provided in the general winning opening 35.

  The game area 32 below the center case 40 is provided with a start winning opening (first start winning area) 36 for giving a start condition of the special figure variation display game, and a second start winning opening (second A normal variation winning device 37 having a starting winning area) is provided. The normal variation winning device 37 includes a movable member (movable piece) 37b that is converted into a state in which a game ball easily flows by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted to the near side. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball is prevented from winning the normal variation winning device 37. When the game ball wins the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, a special figure changing display game is executed as an auxiliary game.

  The movable member 37b is a so-called velo-type ordinary electric accessory, and is rotated via a general-purpose solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the normal-variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode. And the game ball changes to an open state in which the game ball tends to flow into the normal variation winning device 37 (a winning easy state advantageous to the player).

  The movable member 37b is controlled by a game control device 100 described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of an easy-to-win state by shortening the variation time of the normal variation display game or setting the probability of hitting the general variation display game to be higher than usual. By making the generation time of the easy winning state longer than the easy winning state generated in the above, a short time state (general power support state) is generated as the above-mentioned specific gaming state. Even in the probability variation state (excluding the latent probability variation state), the time-short state (the ordinary power support state) occurs repeatedly.

  In the game area 32 on the lower right side of the normal variable prize winning device 37, an attacker type that opens the big prize opening by rotating the upper end side to the front side by the big prize opening solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 3). A special variable winning device 39 having an open / close door 39c is provided. The special variable winning device 39 converts the state where the special winning opening is closed (blocking state unfavorable for the player) from the closed state (special game state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure changing display game, A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player by facilitating the flow of the game ball into the mouth. Note that a count switch 39a (see FIG. 3) is provided in the special winning opening as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening. In addition, one or a plurality of large winning opening LEDs 39d (full color LEDs) for illuminating the large winning opening are arranged in the large winning opening of the special variable winning apparatus 39 or in the vicinity of the large winning opening (around the large winning opening). .

  When a game ball wins a large winning opening of the general winning opening 35, the start winning opening 36, the normal variable winning apparatus 37, and the special variable winning apparatus 39, the payout control apparatus 200 (see FIG. 3) selects the type of winning opening. The number of prize balls corresponding to the number is discharged from the payout device to the upper plate 21. In addition, the game area 32 below the normal variation winning device 37 is provided with an out port 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a winning port or the like.

  In addition, a special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game, special figure 2 fluctuation display game) and a common figure fluctuation display game are executed outside the game area 32 and in the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a. A collective display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 that display information such as the current gaming state (see FIG. 2B).

  FIG. 2B is a diagram illustrating a configuration of the collective display device 50. The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (special figure 1 indicator, lamp D1) and a second special figure fluctuation for a variable display game configured by a 7-segment type indicator (LED lamp) or the like. Display unit 52 (special figure 2 indicator, lamp D2), fluctuation display part 53 for ordinary figure fluctuation display game (general figure indicator, lamps D8, D10, D18), and start (hold) of each fluctuation display game It has a memory display section for notification of the number of memory (special figure 1 hold display 54, special figure 2 hold display 55, general figure hold display 56). The special figure 1 hold indicator 54 is composed of lamps D11 and D12. The special figure 2 hold indicator 55 includes lamps D13 and D14. The general-purpose hold indicator 56 includes lamps D15 and D16.

  In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a first gaming state display unit 57 (first gaming state indicator, lamp) for notifying whether the player is right-handed (when right-handed) or left-handed (normally-timed). D7), the second gaming state display unit 58 (second gaming state indicator, lamp D17) that lights up when the short-time state occurs and notifies the occurrence of the short-time state, and the probability state of the big hit when the gaming machine 10 is turned on has a high probability 3rd game state display part 59 (3rd game state indicator, probability state display part, lamp D9) which displays that it is in a state, the number of rounds at the time of big hit (the number of times of opening and closing of special variable winning device 39) is displayed A round display section 60 (lamps D3-D6) is provided.

  In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the variable display game is executed by variable display in which identification information (for example, the central segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (flashing). Note that the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are not limited to such a segment type display unit, and may be configured by an assembly of a plurality of LEDs, or when performing variable display. In addition, all LEDs provided as an indicator are all turned on and off (simultaneously blinking of all LEDs), cycled on (turns on and off from any one LED in a predetermined order every predetermined time), or a plurality of It may be performed by turning on / off (flashing) or circulating lighting with a predetermined number of LEDs. Also on the normal display 53, the variation display game is executed by variation display (flashing) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. Further, the general-purpose display 53 can be appropriately configured in the same manner as the special-figure 1 display 51 and the special-figure 2 display 52.

  The lamp display device 80 includes lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) that perform variable display (flashing) that repeats turning on and off as symbols (fourth special symbol described later), and starting each special diagram variable display game. (Pending) It has a lamp display unit 3-6 (LED) for notifying the number of memories. The lamp display device 80 is controlled by an effect control device 300 (described later).

  The lamp display units 1 and 2 blink at a predetermined blinking cycle (for example, 200 msec (milliseconds)) as a variable display. While the game control device 100 measures the change time of the change display in the special display 1 display 51, the special display 2 display 52, and the general display display 53 of the collective display device 50, the lamp of the lamp display device 80 The variation time of the display units 1 and 2 is measured by the effect control device 300 (described later).

  The lamp display units 3 and 4 (the special figure 1 hold LED 1 and the special figure 1 hold LED 2) display the special figure 1 hold number (the first start memory number) by a combination of the light-off state, the lighting state, and the blinking state. Similarly, the lamp display units 5 and 6 (special figure 2 hold LED1, special figure 2 hold LED2) display the special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) by a combination of the off state, the lit state, and the blinking state. To do. The lamp display unit 3-6 terminates the display of the number of holds due to the occurrence of a big hit. However, in the case other than during the big win state (including the case where the reach described later is generated in the display device 41), the display of the number of holds is displayed. Do.

  Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, the details of the general map variation display game and the special map variation display game will be described.

  In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by launching a game ball from a ball launcher (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, etc. arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the normal start gate 34, the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, wins the normal variation winning device 37 or the special variation winning device 39, or flows into the outlet 30 b provided at the bottom of the gaming area 32 and is discharged from the gaming area 32. Then, when a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 39, the number of winning balls corresponding to the type of the winning winning port is passed through the payout device. It is discharged to the upper plate 21.

  The normal start gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed the normal start gate 34. When the game ball passes through the normal start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the normal variation display game is executed based on the determination result of the random number value for hit determination extracted at this time.

  A state in which the normal map variable display game cannot be started, for example, when the normal map variable display game has already been executed and the normal map variable display game has not ended, or the result of the normal map variable display game is normal When the variable winning device 37 has been converted to the open state, when the game ball passes the normal start gate 34, if the normal start memory number is less than the upper limit number, the stored number is added (+1).

  In the normal map start memory, a random number value for hit determination for determining the hit error of the normal map fluctuation display game is stored, and when this hit determination random number value coincides with the determination value, the normal map change display is performed. A specific result mode (specific result) is derived by winning the game.

  The universal map display game is executed by a universal map display 53 provided in the collective display device 50. The general-purpose indicator 53 is composed of LEDs indicating normal identification information (general-purpose) in the lit state and indicating a shift in the unlit state, and the normal identification information varies by blinking this LED. Display is performed, and after a predetermined fluctuation display time has elapsed, the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED.

  When the common figure random number value extracted when passing through the common figure start gate 34 is a winning value, the normal symbol displayed on the universal figure display unit 53 stops in a hit state and enters a hit state. At this time, when the general-purpose solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) is driven, the movable member 37b is converted to an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game ball to the normal variation winning device 37 is converted. Winning is allowed.

  The winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 and the winning to the normal variation winning apparatus 37 are detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the start opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). A game ball won at the start winning opening 36 is detected as a start winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game and is stored as a predetermined upper limit number, and a game ball won at the normal variable prize winning device 37 is shown in FIG. It is detected as the start winning ball of the variable display game, and stored up to a predetermined upper limit.

  When detecting the start winning ball of the special figure variation display game, the big hit random number value, the big hit symbol random number value, each fluctuation pattern random number value and the like are extracted. These random numbers are stored in the special figure holding storage area (a part of the RAM) of the game control apparatus 100 as a special figure start winning memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of eight times). The number stored in the special figure start winning memory is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display 54 and the special figure 2 hold display 55 for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50 and also on the display screen of the display device 41. Is displayed.

  The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning at the start winning opening 36 or the first start memory. In addition, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variable display game on the special figure 2 display 52 based on the winning to the normal variation winning apparatus 37 or the second start memory.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation display game (first special figure fluctuation display game) and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) are identified in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 (see FIG. This is performed by suspending and displaying a predetermined result form after variably displaying special symbols and special symbols). In addition, the display device 41 executes a decorative special figure fluctuation display game for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) corresponding to each special figure fluctuation display game.

  In the decoration special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the decoration special symbol (identification information) composed of the numbers and the like described above is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), and middle (third special symbol). ) Is started in this order, scrolling display is started, symbols changing after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped, and the result of the special figure changing display game is displayed. In addition, the display device 41 displays various effects such as the appearance of characters in order to improve interest. In addition, in the special display variation display game, as the other special display design (identification information), the lamp display units 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 80 display the fourth special design by repeating turning on and off (flashing). fluctuate. The fluctuation display of the lamp display units 1 and 2 stops after a predetermined time from the start when the light is off and “lights off” and when it is a big hit or a small hit, it is “lit”.

  When a game ball is won at the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable prize winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random value at the time of winning detection is a big hit value), as a result of the special figure variation display game A specific result mode (special result mode) is derived from the display symbol, and a big hit state (special game state) is obtained. Corresponding to this, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as “7, 7, 7” are arranged).

  At this time, the special variable winning device 39 is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) by energizing the large winning port solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 3). That is, the big prize opening provided in the special variable prize winning device 39 opens widely for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls wins, during which the player is given a privilege that he can acquire many game balls. The

  When the game ball is won at the first start winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random number value at the time of winning detection is the small hit value), the special figure variable display game As a result of this, a specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived from the display symbol, and a small hit state is obtained. Corresponding to this, the display mode of the display device 41 is the small hit result mode. In this embodiment, a big hit random number value is also used for the small hit determination, but the small hit value (small hit determination value) is different from the big hit value (big hit determination value).

  At this time, in the special variation winning device 39, the special winning opening is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined short period of time by energizing the large winning solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3). Note that the total opening time of the big prize opening is shorter in the small hit state (small hit game state) than in the big hit state (special game state), so the game that the player can acquire in the small hit state than in the big hit state The value (number of acquired balls) is low. In both the small hit state and the big hit state, the big winning opening is in an open state, but the big hit state may be referred to as a first special game state, and the small hit state may be referred to as a second special game state.

  Here, the difference between the big hit and the small hit will be described.

  The big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device, and the small hit is a specific result without the operation of the condition device. The condition device is activated when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the conditional device is activated, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special electric accessory is generated. This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 39 is set. That the condition device does not operate means that the specific flag is not set as in the case of winning a small lottery. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag that is turned on / off in software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on / off. In addition, the “condition device” is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term having the meaning of

  Specifically, in the case of a big win, the special variable winning device is opened by setting the big hit flag, whereas in the case of a small hit, the special variable winning device is set by setting the small hit flag. Is released.

  The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be configured as separate displays or the same display, but each special figure variation display game is not executed simultaneously. Is set as follows.

  As for the decorative special figure fluctuation display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game may be executed in different display devices or in different display areas, or the same display. You may make it perform in an apparatus or a display area. In this case, the decorative special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is prevented from being executed simultaneously. The special figure 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game, and there is a start memory of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. When the figure change display game is ready to be executed, the special figure 2 change display game is executed.

  In the following description, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game.

  Further, although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the count switch (39a ) Is a non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that includes a magnetic detection coil and detects a game ball using a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. ing. Further, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 and the front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 etc. A microswitch having a typical contact can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the game control system of the gaming machine 10. The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100 (main board). The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls the game in an integrated manner, and is a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer). A data bus 140 that connects between the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130; a CPU 110 having the input unit 111; an input unit 120 having an input port; an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver; Etc.

  The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates a clock for a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a reference for a random number generation circuit. And an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 so as to be operable. Is done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 including an ACDC converter that generates a DC32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V and DC5V from a DC32V voltage, and the like. , A backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the RAM inside the game microcomputer 111 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal that notify the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of the power failure. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal.

  In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, the main control device 100. You may comprise so that it may provide on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be exchanged when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the embodiment. By providing, it can remove from the object of replacement | exchange and can aim at cost reduction.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17V, for example, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

  In addition, the game control device 100 (main board) is turned on by a rotation operation of the operator or the like, and a setting key switch 93 for changing a setting value related to the game condition (game) can be changed according to the operation of the operator. And a setting value change switch 102 capable of changing the setting value relating to the gaming conditions. In this embodiment, the setting value related to the game condition (game) is the probability setting value of the big hit probability, but other game conditions (such as the small hit probability and the probability variation entry rate) other than the big hit probability also depend on the probability setting value. It can be changed. The setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 constitute setting changing means (setting changing device 42) capable of changing the setting (setting value) relating to the game conditions. In this embodiment, the touch switch signal of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 is used as a confirmation signal for confirming the set value. However, an operable confirmation button switch (operation means, operation unit) is used. It may be provided in the game control device 100 and a signal from the confirm button switch may be used as a confirm signal for confirming the set value.

  The setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 are provided on the game control device 100 inside the gaming machine 10 so that they can be operated (positions that cannot be accessed) unless the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened. Is done. That is, a general player cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102. In this embodiment, the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 are provided so as to be assembled on the game control device 100, but the front frame 12 (main body frame) such as on the power supply board of the power supply device 400 is opened. Otherwise, it may be provided at a position where it cannot be accessed.

  When the gaming machine 10 is turned on, if the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the operator operates the setting value change switch 102 (setting value change button). Accordingly, settings (setting values) relating to gaming conditions such as the probability of jackpot and the probability variation entry rate can be changed. That is, when the power is turned on, the state in which the front frame 12 is opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on is a setting variable state in which the setting (setting value) can be changed. In a normal procedure, when the operator opens the front frame 12 and rotates the setting key switch 93 to turn it on to turn on the power, a setting variable state corresponding to a state in which the setting is being changed is entered. The setting variable state may be notified by sound from a speaker. When the power is turned on, the state in which the glass frame 15 is opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on may be set as a variable setting state, or both the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are opened and the setting key switch 93 is turned on. The state may be set variable.

  In the present embodiment, the setting values related to the game conditions are defined in six stages, and the setting value 1 (setting 1), the setting value 2 (setting 2), the setting value 3 (setting 3), the setting value 4 (setting 4), There are setting value 5 (setting 5) and setting value 6 (setting 6). Setting value 1 is the most disadvantageous setting for the player, and setting value 6 is the most advantageous setting for the player. The setting values 1 and 2 are low settings, the setting values 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and the setting values 5 and 6 are high settings.

  In the setting value change processing, every time the operator operates the setting value change switch 102 (setting value change button), the setting value (setting) is set as setting value 1 → setting value 2 → setting value 3 → setting value 4 → setting. Change and select value 5 → setting value 6 → setting value 1 → setting value 2 →. Instead of operating the setting value changing button, the setting value may be changed by rotating the setting key switch 93 to a predetermined position. The set value is not limited to six levels. Then, the selected setting values 1 to 6 are displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 or the like which is a 7-segment display. Note that the probability setting value display device 143 may change the display directly in conjunction with the operation of the setting value change switch 102 via an electric circuit. As will be described later, the selected setting values 1 to 6 are displayed on the first special figure fluctuation display section 51 and / or the second special figure fluctuation display section 52 for the fluctuation display game of the collective display device 50. Also good.

  When the touch switch signal is input to the game control device 100 by touching the operation handle 24 by the operator, the selected (changed) setting value (that is, setting) is confirmed and the probability setting value in the RWM (storage means). The setting value changing process is completed. Regardless of the touch switch signal, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off after the setting value is changed, or when a predetermined time elapses after the setting variable state, the game control device 100 determines and stores the setting value (that is, setting). It is also possible to configure.

  On the other hand, after the gaming machine 10 is turned on, when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened and the setting key switch 93 is rotated to change from the off state to the on state, the setting value confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) is entered. In the set value confirmation mode, the set value displayed on the probability set value display device 143 can be confirmed. The set values 1 to 6 selected may be displayed on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 and / or the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52 for the fluctuation display game of the collective display device 50 for confirmation. . The set value confirmation mode (setting confirmation state) may be notified by sound from a speaker.

  Note that the set value change switch 102 (set value change button) can also be used as a RAM initialization switch (RAM clear switch), and is initialized when the initialization switch is in an ON state upon power-on (power recovery). A switch signal is generated, and based on this, processing for forcibly initializing information stored in the RAM 111c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b, and a RAM (random access memory) 111c that can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111b stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number determination values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111c stores a work area for the CPU 111a and various signals and random number values during game control. Used as As the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

  In addition, the ROM 111b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the contents of the effects, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory. The variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern table selected when the result is lost, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include a table for determining the second half fluctuation pattern that is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (such as the second half fluctuation group table and the second half fluctuation pattern selection table), and the fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining a first-half variation pattern as a pattern (first-half variation group table, first-half variation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the special result mode is entered, the game is already derived at the stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed. This means a display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device's variable display control progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. For example, a state where so-called full-rotation reach is performed in a variable display region while maintaining a state in which special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to reach a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode.

  Thus, for example, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on a display device corresponding to a special figure fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the display of the result mode is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, the condition that becomes the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display in all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas (for example, the same identification information It is also possible to set the reach state (except for the special result mode) to the reach state and display the remaining one variable display area in a variable manner from the reach state.

  The reach state includes a plurality of reach productions, and there is a possibility that a special result mode (a big hit mode) is derived (differing expected value). As a system of reach production, normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. Note that the expectation level (expected value) of the jackpot is such that no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, the reach state is included in a variable display mode at least when a special result mode is derived in a special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of date). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state that is likely to be a big hit compared to the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and the display device, thereby playing the game machine. 10 overall control is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the jackpot of the special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining the jackpot symbol, and a jackpot for determining the jackpot symbol. A random number generation circuit for generating a random number, a fluctuation pattern random number for determining a fluctuation pattern in a special figure fluctuation display game (including execution time of a fluctuation display game in a fluctuation display without various reach and reach) And a clock generator that generates a clock for giving a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) to the CPU 111a and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ing.

  Further, the CPU 111a obtains any one variation pattern table from among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111a determines the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current gaming state, and the starting memory number. Based on the above, one of the plurality of variation pattern tables is selected and acquired. Here, when executing the special figure fluctuation display game, the CPU 111a serves as fluctuation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to thereby win a prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 controls the payout unit 91 to drive the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the loan request signal from the card unit 600 to pay out the loaned money.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (panel radio wave sensor) that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a gate switch 34a of the general start gate 34, and a start port 1 in the first start winning port 36. Connected to the switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a in the second start winning port 37, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switch 39a of the special variable winning device 39, the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level Is provided with an interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 that receives a negative logic signal such as 7V and converts it to a 0V-5V positive logic signal.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, detection signals from the gate switch 34a, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 39a are input to the third input port 124. .

  Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

  Also, the second input port 123 has a detection signal from the fraud detection magnetic sensor switch 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 and a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10. A signal is input from the front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) provided on the switch 63, the front frame 12 (main body frame), or the like. Note that a vibration sensor switch that detects vibration may be provided in the gaming machine so that the detection signal is input to the second input port 123.

  The second input port 123 (input port 3) receives the setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch signal from the setting value change switch 102, and uses the data bus 140 for the gaming microcomputer. 111.

  Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to a test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Furthermore, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36 a and the start port 2 switch 37 a among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for normal IC operation. It has become.

  The data held by the third input port 124 is read by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124 by the gaming microcomputer 111. be able to. The same applies to the second input port 123 and the first input port 122 described later.

  Also, the input unit 120 indicates a frame radio wave fraud signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shot ball cut switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow. An overflow switch signal, a touch switch signal based on an input of a touch switch provided on the operation handle 24, and an out-ball detection switch signal from the out-ball detection switch are fetched and supplied to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. An input port 122 is provided. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full). The frame radio wave illegal signal is a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame). Is the payout busy signal in a state in which the payout control device 200 can accept a command? It is a signal indicating whether or not. In the present embodiment, the out-ball detection switch (not shown) detects all game balls that have been launched into the game area and have finished the game. The out ball detection switch (not shown) may detect only the game ball passing through the out port 30b.

  Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like. The Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once inputted to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test board. It is configured as follows.

  Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. Data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system, but each data of the input unit 120 is input immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control apparatus 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control apparatus 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 via a relay board 70 for data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating the probability status of jackpot. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (a mass-produced / sold product) installed in the game store. A detection signal output from the proximity I / F 121, such as a start port switch, that is not required to be processed is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62 that cannot be supplied to the test fire testing device as they are are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. An error signal indicating that the state is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70.

  The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies the signal to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. Yes. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

  In addition, the output unit 130 receives opening / closing data of a solenoid (general power solenoid) 37c that is connected to the data bus 140 and opens the normal variation winning device 37 and a solenoid (large winning port solenoid) 39b that opens the special variation winning device 39. A second output port 134 for output is provided.

  In addition, the output unit 130 includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON / OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal 71. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a sixth output port 141 (probability setting value display output port) for outputting information of the setting value (probability setting value) to the probability setting value display device 143. In the present embodiment, the probability setting value display device 143 is a 7-segment display (LED lamp), but information on the setting value (probability setting value) is sent from the sixth output port 141 to the driver (LED driver). Via the probability setting value display device 143.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives a switching data signal of the power solenoid 37c and the big prize solenoid 39b output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid driving signal 138a. The second driver 138b for outputting the ON / OFF drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and the current of the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136 A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for the lead-in digit line, and a fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal 71 Is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Also, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive method is achieved by flowing a current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and drawing the current through the segment line from the cathode terminal by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so that the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 250. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 250 through serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using a serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives serial data (control data, lighting pattern data, character code (character code), etc.) output from the second output port 134, and a driver 150 that drives the status display device 152. Is provided. In the present embodiment, the status display device 152 includes a plurality (four) of 7-segment type (8-segment type including a point portion) display (LED lamp), and the driver 150 is an LED driver. It is not limited to.

  The status display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board), but may be provided in another location. For example, the status display device 152 is a 4-digit 7-segment display (8-segment display including a dot portion), and can display an accessory ratio, a payout rate, and the number of discharged balls. Note that the status display device 152 is not limited to the one that directly displays the ratio of the bonuses, the yield rate, and the number of discharged balls, but may be the one that indirectly displays the number of discharged balls, the yield rate, and the percentage of bonuses. Good. That is, the state display device 152 only needs to be able to display information related to the accessory ratio, the payout rate, and the number of discharged balls.

  Here, the number of discharged balls is the number of game balls discharged from the game area 32 (also referred to as the number of out balls), and the number of game balls that have passed through the winning opening (the number of winning games) and the game that has passed through the out opening 30b. This is the sum of the number of spheres. The number of discharged balls is basically the same as the number of shot balls, which is the number of game balls shot from the ball launcher to the game area 32. The number of discharged balls can be obtained by counting (counting) a signal from the out-ball detection switch. In the present embodiment, the prize winning opening includes a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), an ordinary variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2), and A special variable winning device 39 (large winning opening) is included. The number of discharged balls is displayed as a countdown, (100−number of discharged balls) is displayed, and only 100 (predetermined number) are counted. The number of discharged balls may be counted up from “00” to “99”.

  The payout rate is a ratio (ratio) of the total number of prize balls to the number of discharged balls (or the number of shot balls), and is calculated by (number of acquired balls / number of discharged balls) × 100 (%). That is, the payout rate is the number of acquired balls per 100 discharged balls (the total number of prize balls).

  In the present embodiment, the payout rate is easily obtained from the number of acquired balls until the number of discharged balls reaches 0 to 100 each time the number of discharged balls reaches 100. That is, the number of discharged balls is only counted up to 100 (predetermined number). In addition, every time the number of discharged balls reaches 100 (predetermined number), the payout rate is updated to the latest output rate until the number of discharged balls changes from 1 to 100. As a result, if the acquired number of balls (the total number of winning balls) is displayed as it is on the status display device 152, the payout rate is displayed.

  For example, the bonus rate is a big hit state out of the total number of winning balls (total number of winning balls) obtained by winning a winning opening during a predetermined period (for example, from turning on the gaming machine 10 to the present). Is the ratio (%) (= so-called consecutive character ratio) of the number of winning balls (the number of balls acquired by each role) obtained by winning the winning prize. The bonus ratio may be the ratio of the number of winning balls (in the big hit state and in the small hit state) obtained by winning the big winning opening out of the total number of winning balls (= the big winning opening ratio). Or, the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning in the big prize opening and the normal variable prize winning device 37 (second starting prize opening) (= the so-called bonus rate (total bonus rate) )).

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub board) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram of an effect control system of the gaming machine 10.

  The effect control device 300 is for displaying video on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 and the main control microcomputer 311, similarly to the game microcomputer 111. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 serving as a graphic processor for performing image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling output of sound in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speaker 19.

  The main control microcomputer 311 holds a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing a program executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and retains stored contents even when power is not supplied in the event of a power failure A possible FeRAM 323 is connected to an RTC (real time clock) 338 that serves as a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.). A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

  A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the presentation, instructs the VDP 312 about the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce the sound, turns on the decoration lamp, motors And control of solenoid drive control and production time management.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. The VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 and lighting of the decoration lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive commands and data from the interrupt control signals INT0 to n and the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT and the like are also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 storing sound data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives an upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and a lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12, and is generated by the sound source LSI 314. The sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An effect control command signal (effect command) includes a decoration special figure hold number command, a decoration special figure command, a change command, a stop information command, and the like transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 to the effect control apparatus 300 via the command I / F 331. As received. Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. Yes.

  The effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15. Frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 and the like) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) and board effects provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). There is provided a board effect movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls the device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). The panel decoration device 46 may include the lamp display device 80 described above.

  These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided on the glass frame 15 may be provided.

  Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25 a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25 b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and a motor in the board effect device 44. A function for detecting the on / off state of the production effect switch 47 (production motor switch) for detecting the initial position and the like, and a detection signal input to the main control microcomputer 311, or a volume adjustment switch provided in the production control device 300 A switch input circuit 336 that detects the state of 335 and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V, display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, and DC5V as the power supply voltage for command I / F 331, a voltage of DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers is generated. Is configured to do.

  Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC − for generating DC 3.3 V or DC 1.2 V based on DC 5 V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device into a reset state. In addition, VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), tone generator LSI 314, amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving speakers, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling lamps, motors, and the like in a form output from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. In addition, a cooling FAN 45 that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven in a state in which the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

  Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. The CPU 111a of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random number value for hit determination of the normal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided to the normal figure start gate 34, and the ROM 111b. Is compared with the determination value stored in the table, and a hit / decision of the normal variation display game is determined.

  Then, the universal symbol display game is displayed on the universal symbol display device, after the identification symbol is varied and displayed for a predetermined time, and then stopped. When the result of the general-purpose variable display game is a win, a special result mode is displayed on the general-purpose display, and the general-purpose solenoid 37c is operated to move the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) Control to open as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal map change display game is out of control, control is performed to display the result form of the shift on the general map display.

  Further, a start winning (starting memory) is stored based on an input of a detection signal of a game ball from a starting port 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning port 36, and the big hit determination of the special figure 1 variable display game is based on the start memory. The random number value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is missed.

  Further, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37, and based on the start memory, the random value for determining the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game Is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is missed.

  Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including a determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52, a special figure variation display game for stopping and displaying is displayed. In other words, the game control unit 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the start winning area (the first start winning opening 36, the normal variable winning apparatus 37). Make.

  In addition, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays a decoration special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the production state setting, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the process of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. That is, the production control device 300 serves as production control means for controlling production related to a game (such as a variable display game).

  Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays a special result state on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 and generates a special gaming state when the result of the special figure variation display game is a win. Let In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111a performs control for allowing the game ball to flow into the special winning opening by, for example, opening the open / close door 39c of the special variable winning apparatus 39 by the special winning opening solenoid 39b. .

  Then, either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the grand prize opening or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the big prize opening. Opening the grand prize opening until such a condition is achieved is defined as one round (R), and this is repeated (repeated) for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 times, 11 times, or 2 times) (cycle game) I do. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening / closing control means for performing control for opening / closing the special winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result form of the deviation.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state (probability variation state) is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state. Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result aspect of either the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game Both are in a high probability state.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a short-time state (specific game state) as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the short-time state, the normal fluctuation display game and the normal variation winning device 37 are controlled to be in the short-time operation state, and the normal variation winning device 37 per unit time is compared to the case where the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal operation state. Since the opening time of the vehicle is controlled so as to be substantially increased, the power transmission is supported. Even in a high probability state (normal probability variation state) excluding the latent probability variation state, the ordinary power support is executed in a time-short state overlappingly.

  For example, in the short-time state, it is possible to perform time-reduced variation in which the execution time of the above-described usual map variation display game (ordinary diagram variation time) is set to a second variation display time shorter than the normal first variation display time (for example, 10,000 msec is 1000 msec). In the short time state, the execution time of the special figure change display game (special figure change time) is also shortened from the normal time, and the time reduction fluctuation of the special figure change display game is executed.

  Further, in the short-time state, it is possible to control so that the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map change display game is a second stop time (for example, 704 msec) shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec). It is.

  Also, in the short time state, when the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal variation display game being won, the first release time (for example, 100 msec) in which the release time (normal power release time) is the normal state. It is possible to control so that the second opening time is longer (for example, 1352 msec).

  Further, in the short-time state, the number of times of opening the normal variation winning device 37 (the number of times of normal power release) is greater than the number of times of opening the first time (for example, 2 times) with respect to the result of one hit of the normal-variation display game. It is possible to set the number of second releases (for example, 4 times). In the short time state, it is possible to set the probability of being a hit result of the normal-variable display game (normal probability) to a higher probability than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operation state.

  In the short-time state, the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state by changing any one or more of the normal time fluctuation time, the normal time stop time, the number of normal power releases, the normal power release time, and the normal figure probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. Thereby, in the short time state, winning in the normal variation winning device 37 is easier than in the normal gaming state, and the number of executions of the special figure variation display game per unit time can be increased as compared with the normal gaming state. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-short states that are different from each other. In addition, the movable member 37b may be set not to be opened in the normal operation state (the normal probability is 0). Moreover, when it is a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of the gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. Control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes main processing shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 9 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main process will be described. 5A and 5B are flowcharts showing a procedure of main processing by the game control apparatus 100. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In the flowchart of the process executed by the game control apparatus 100, the step code (number) is represented as “A ***”.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, when starting the main process, the game control apparatus 100 first executes a process for prohibiting interruption (A1001). Furthermore, a stack pointer setting process is executed for setting a stack pointer that is the start address of an area in which the value of a register or the like is saved when an interrupt occurs (A1002).

  Subsequently, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

  Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (A1005). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited. Thereafter, the game control device 100 reads the state of the input port 3 (second input port 123) (A1006). Thereby, signals from the setting key switch 93, the setting value change switch 102, the glass frame open detection switch 63, and the front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) can be read.

  Furthermore, the game control device 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). By setting a predetermined initial value in the power supply delay timer, a program of slave control means (for example, payout control apparatus 200 or effect control apparatus 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from game control apparatus 100 serving as main control means A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) is set for waiting until the computer starts normally. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 is first started up and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) is started up. Can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. A standby means for setting the standby time is provided.

  The power supply delay timer is measured using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to validity determination) that is not a target for RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). Thereby, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

  The second input port 123 (input port 3) receives a setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and a setting value change switch signal from the setting value change switch 102, and wait time By reading the state of the second input port 123 before starting the operation, it is possible to reliably detect the operation of the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102. That is, if the state of the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 is read after the waiting time has elapsed, the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 are operated after the waiting time has elapsed, or the power is turned on. It is necessary to continue to operate the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 until the standby time elapses. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, the operation can be detected immediately after the power is turned on without performing such a troublesome operation. And a situation in which the operation of the set value change switch 102 is not accepted.

  When the power supply delay timer is set (A1007), the game control apparatus 100 performs the time measurement of the standby time and the process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (A1008 to A1012).

  When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first sets the number of times (for example, twice) that the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus (for example, two times). A1008), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (A1009).

  When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1009 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 determines whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in the process of step A1008. Determine (A1010). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is “N”), the process returns to the process of determining whether or not the power failure monitoring signal in step A1009 is on.

  In addition, when the game control device 100 determines that the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the gaming machine Wait until the power is turned off. In this way, it is possible to prevent a power outage from being erroneously detected due to noise, etc. by determining that a power outage has occurred when the power outage monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, and appropriately deal with problems at power-on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of power-on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shut-off are retained, so backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control burden can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (result of A1009 is “N”), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the game control device 100 updates the power-on delay timer by −1 (A1011), It is determined whether or not the timer value is 0 (A1012). If the value of the timer is not 0 (the result of A1012 is “N”), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal in step A1008.

  In addition, when the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1012 is “Y”), that is, when the standby time has ended, the game control apparatus 100 reads out and writes RWM (read / write) such as RAM or EEPROM. (Memory) access is permitted (A1013), and off-data is output to all output ports (set to no output) (A1014).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) (A1015). ). Further, the driver 150 for driving the status display device 152 is initialized (A1016).

  Here, the game control device 100 writes a command including control data corresponding to the contents of the initial setting in the transmission buffer of the second output port 134 (serial communication circuit) and transmits the command to the driver 150. For example, the game control device 100 sets the duty ratio in the initial setting. The duty ratio corresponds to the brightness of each LED of the status display device 152. The control data corresponding to the duty ratio is used in the duty setting unit of the driver 150 (LED driver). In order to make each LED dark with power saving, the duty ratio of the driver 150 may be made smaller than usual. Next, the game control device 100 sets the number of used digits of the state display device 152 in the initial setting. In this embodiment, the number of used digits is four. The control data corresponding to the number of used digits is used in the digit number setting unit of the driver 150 (LED driver).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data (A1017). If it is normal (the result of A1017 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data (A1018).

  Furthermore, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1018 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 calculates a checksum of a predetermined area (for example, a game control work area) in the RWM. A calculation process is executed (A1019), and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum matches the checksum when the power is turned off (A1020). If the checksums match (the result of A1020 is “Y”), the RAM 111c is normal and the RAM clear head address 2 is set (A1021).

  FIG. 5C is a diagram illustrating a configuration of the RAM 111c of the gaming microcomputer 111. As shown in FIG. 5C, the RAM clear head address 2 is set so as to exclude the probability setting value area from the RAM area to be cleared. With the RAM clear head address 2, the RAM area to be cleared becomes the clear area # 2 in FIG. 5C. The clear area # 2 includes a random number area, a control information area, and a game control stack area. The random number region includes an initial value random number region for storing various initial value random numbers and a variation pattern random number region for storing variation pattern random numbers. The control information area is an area from the power outage inspection area 1 to the checksum area, and includes a power outage inspection area 1, a power outage inspection area 2, a checksum area, and the like. Note that the random number area may be excluded from the clear area # 2. The clear area # 2 includes a state display work area for storing information to be displayed on the state display device 152 such as an accessory ratio, and a state display stack area for processing information to be displayed on the state display device 152. I can't.

  In FIG. 5C, an unused area may be provided between the game control work area including the probability setting value area, the random number area, and the control information area and the game control stack area. Further, an unused area may be provided between the status display work area and the status display stack area. In addition, the stack area for status display may be arranged at the end of the address of the RAM 111c, and the unused area at the end of FIG. 5C (the lowermost part in FIG. 5C) may be eliminated.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the probability setting is being changed (in the setting variable state or in the setting changing state) (A1022). When the probability setting is being changed (the result of A1022 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 executes the processing during the change of the probability setting in steps A1036 to A1041. When the probability setting value changing flag (A1038) is set, it can be determined that the probability setting is being changed.

  When the probability setting is not being changed (the result of A1022 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the front frame 12 (main body frame) is in an open state (A1023). When a signal from the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) is input, it can be determined that the front frame 12 (main body frame) is in an open state. In step A1023, it may be determined whether the glass frame 15 is in an open state instead of the front frame 12, or it is determined whether both the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 are in an open state. Also good. In addition, when the signal from the glass frame open detection switch 63 is input, it can be determined that the glass frame 15 is in the open state.

  When the front frame 12 (main body frame) is in the open state (the result of A1023 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A1024). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1024 is “Y”), since the setting (setting value) can be changed, the RAM is initialized in the setting variable state in steps A1036 to A1041. Processing (RAM clear processing) and processing during setting change are executed.

  The game control device 100 determines that the front frame 12 (main body frame) is not in the open state (in the closed state) (the result of A1023 is “N”), or when the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1024 is "N"), it is determined whether or not the set value change switch 102 is on (A1025). When the set value change switch 102 is not turned on (the result of A1025 is “N”), the normal power-on processing (when power is restored) in steps A1031-A1035 is executed.

  On the other hand, when the setting value change switch 102 is on (the result of A1025 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 executes the RAM initialization (RAM clear) process of steps A1042 to A1045. Here, since the set value change switch 102 is operated (pressed) and turned on when the power is turned on in the OFF state of the set key switch 93, the set value change switch 102 is turned on by the RAM initialization switch ( It is used as a RAM clear switch. Note that there is no actual situation where the set value change switch 102 is turned on when the front frame 12 is closed (the result of A1023 is “N”). The set value change switch 102 that can also function as an initialization switch has an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 is stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Provides an initialization means for initializing data.

  In addition, when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1017 is “N” or the result of A1018 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 does not match the checksums (The result of A1020 is “N”), an abnormality of the RAM 111c has occurred, and the process proceeds to a process for dealing with the RAM abnormality after step A1026. First, the RAM clear head address 1 is set (A1026). As shown in FIG. 5C, since the RAM clear start address 1 is the start address of the game control work area, the probability setting value area is also included in the RAM area to be cleared. With the RAM clear head address 1, the RAM area to be cleared is set to the clear area # 1 in FIG. 5C. The clear area # 1 includes a game control work area (consisting of a probability setting value area, a random number area, and a control information area), and a game control stack area. The clear area # 1 does not include a status display work area for storing information to be displayed on the status display device 152 and a status display stack area for processing information to be displayed on the status display device 152.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the front frame 12 (main body frame) is in an open state (A1027). When the signal from the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main body frame opening detection switch) is input, it can be determined that the front frame 12 is in the open state.

  When the front frame 12 is in the open state (the result of A1027 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A1028). When the setting key switch 93 is ON (the result of A1028 is “Y”), the RAM initialization process (step A1036-A1041) in the setting variable state (step A1036-A1041) because the setting value can be changed. RAM clear processing) and setting change processing are executed. In this case, the RAM area to be cleared in the RAM initialization process is the clear area # 1 in FIG. 5C. Therefore, the RAM abnormality can be solved.

  The game control apparatus 100 determines that the front frame 12 (main body frame) is not in the open state (in the closed state) (the result of A1027 is “N”), or when the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A1028 is "N"), a setting change instruction command for prompting the player to change the setting is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1029). Upon receiving the setting change instruction command, the effect control apparatus 300 displays on the display device 41 a setting change instruction display that prompts the player to change the setting. With the setting change instruction display, the setting key switch 93 is turned on when the player tries to change the setting (the result of A1028 is “Y”), and the RAM abnormality is eliminated by the RAM clear processing (A1036) at the time of setting change. it can.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (A1030), and waits until the power of the gaming machine is cut off.

  Next, the processing at the time of normal power-on (when power is restored) in steps A1031-A1035 will be described.

  First, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of power failure recovery in the area to be initialized (A1031). The area to be initialized is the clear area # 2 (random number area, control information area, game control stack area) in FIG. 5C. Here, the control information area includes a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. Undefined state. After that, the game control device 100 checks an area for storing the game state in the RWM and determines whether or not the game state is a high probability state (A1032).

  Here, when the gaming state is not a high probability state (the result of A 1032 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 skips the processing of step A 1033 and step A 1034 and proceeds to the processing of step A 1035. On the other hand, when the gaming state is a high probability state (the result of A 1032 is “Y”), the ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (A 1033), and a high probability notification LED provided in the collective display device 50, for example. The on (lighting) data of (third game state display unit 59, error indicator) is saved in the segment area (A1034). Then, a power failure recovery command corresponding to a process number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game process described later is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1035), and step A1046 Transition to processing.

  Next, the RAM initialization process (RAM clear process) in the setting variable state in steps A1036 to A1041 and the process during the setting change will be described.

  First, the game control device 100 clears the RAM area to be cleared to 0 (A1036). The RAM area to be cleared is the clear area # 2 in FIG. 5C because the RAM clear head address 2 is set when the RAM 111c is normal (the result of A1020 is “Y”). When the RAM 111c is abnormal (result of A1020 is “N”), the RAM clear head address 1 is set, so that the clear area # 1 in FIG. 5C is obtained. That is, the probability setting value area is not cleared when the RAM is normal, but the probability setting value area is also cleared when the RAM is abnormal.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1037). At this time, it is assumed that the front frame 12 is in an open state, the initial value of a security signal control timer (described later) for outputting a security signal is saved, and the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened. So that it can be output to an external device (such as a hall computer). When the probability setting value area is cleared when the RAM is abnormal, a default value (for example, setting value 1) may be saved in the probability setting value area as an initial value.

  Then, the game control device 100 sets a probability setting value changing flag indicating that the setting can be changed (that is, the setting is being changed) (A1038). Subsequently, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area as initial data when the probability setting value is changed (A1039), the value of the probability setting value area is loaded, and the probability setting value The initial data at the time of change is saved in the work probability setting value area (A1040). Subsequently, a command for changing the probability setting indicating that the setting is variable (probability setting is being changed) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1041), and the process proceeds to step A1046. The effect control device 300 can recognize that it is in a setting variable state (during probability setting change) by the command during the probability setting change.

  Next, RAM initialization (RAM clear) processing by the RAM initialization switch (RAM clear switch, setting value change switch 102) in steps A1042-A1045 will be described.

  The game control device 100 first sets the RAM clear head address 2 (A1042), and clears the RAM area to be cleared to 0 (A1043). Since the clear head address 2 is set, the RAM area RAM to be cleared is the clear area # 2 in FIG. 5C. For this reason, the probability setting value area is not cleared in the RAM initialization (RAM clear) process by operating the RAM initialization switch (setting value change switch 102).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1044). Here, the area to be initialized is, for example, an area relating to setting of a customer waiting demonstration area and a production mode. Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1045), and the process proceeds to step A1046.

  Note that the power failure recovery command transmitted in the process of step A1035 and the RAM initialization command transmitted in the process of step A1045 include a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine, and the suspension of special figures 1 and 2 A decoration special figure 1 holding number command indicating a number and a decoration special figure 2 holding number command, and a probability information command indicating a probability state are included. Also, depending on the state when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, if the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed when the power is turned off, the recovery screen command is used. If the customer is waiting when the power is turned off, the customer waiting demo command is used. , A power-on command indicating that the power is turned on is included. Furthermore, an effect mode information command indicating the state of the effect mode depending on the model, an effect count information command, and a high probability count information command indicating the number of remaining games in the high probability state are included. The RAM initialization command includes a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). Receiving the RAM initialization command (RAM clear command), for example, the effect control device 300 displays a customer waiting demonstration on the display device 41, and initializes the RAM with the sound of the LED of the panel decoration device 46 and the speaker and the speaker (RAM). Clear) for 30 seconds.

  Further, the command at the time of power failure recovery and the command at the time of RAM initialization include a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) indicating setting value information which is information of a setting value (probability setting value) of the gaming machine 10. It is. The game control device 100 only needs to transmit the set value information command to the effect control device 300 once when the power is restored (turned on). Thereafter, the effect control device 300 refers to the set value information stored by itself. Production control can be performed.

  After the processing of steps A1035, A1041, and A1045, the game control apparatus 100 includes a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator). It starts up (A1046). The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating the random number supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After executing the CTC activation process of step A1046, the game control apparatus 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1047). Specifically, the CPU 111a performs setting of a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set.

  Bit transposition pattern is a method of permutation when the extracted random bit arrangement (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) is replaced in a predetermined order and stored as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that defines

  In the present embodiment, by replacing the bits of the random numbers according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random numbers can be broken and the confidentiality of the random numbers can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may arbitrarily set it.

  After that, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on, and corresponding various initial value random numbers (random numbers that determine the big hit symbol (big hit symbol) Random number 1, Big hit symbol random number 2), Random number to determine small hit symbol (small hit symbol random number), Random number to determine base symbol hit (per random number), Random number to determine base symbol hit symbol (per symbol random number) Etc.) is saved in a predetermined area of the RWM (A1048), and an interrupt is permitted (A1049). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in the present embodiment is configured such that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on, and this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (A1050). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the hit random number are configured to be generated using random numbers generated in a random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock with a speed equal to or higher than the CPU operating clock. The big hit symbol random number and the hit random number have the same period as the timer interrupt processing that is the processing unit of the program. Is a “low-speed counter” that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) for timer interrupt processing).

  In the big hit symbol random number and the hit symbol random number, a so-called “initial value changing method” is adopted in which each initial value random number (generated by software) is used to change the start value every time the random number goes around. Each random number may be updated by a counter by +1 or 1, or may be updated by a random method in which all values within a range appear without overlapping until one round is completed. That is, the big hit random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number is a random number that is updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number update process of step A1050, the game control device 100 sets the number of times of checking by reading the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus (A1051), and monitoring the power failure. It is determined whether or not the signal is on (A1052). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (the result of A1052 is “N”), the process returns to the initial value random number update process of step A1050. That is, when no power failure has occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (A1050) (A1049), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed and the timer interrupt is initialized. It is possible to prevent the interruption process from being pressed by waiting in the value random number update process. During the setting change (during the setting variable state), it is not necessary to execute the processes of steps A1046, A1047, A1048, and A1050 related to the initial value random number update.

  Note that the initial value random number update process of step A1050 includes a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. When such a method is adopted, both of the initial value random number update processes are performed. In order to avoid the execution of the update process, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update and release the interrupt. On the other hand, if the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed as in the present embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. This has the advantage that the main process is simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1052 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in the process of step A1051. Determination is made (A1053). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (the result of A1053 is “N”), the process returns to step A1052 to determine whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on.

  Further, the game control device 100 interrupts once when the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks (the result of A1053 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred. Is prohibited (A1054), and off data is output to all output ports (A1055).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the power failure inspection area check data 1 in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1056), and saves the power failure inspection area check data 2 in the power failure inspection area 2 (A1057). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum when the RWM is turned off is executed (A1058), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1059). Finally, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1060), and the system waits until the gaming machine is powered off.

  In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure inspection area and the checksum at the time of power shutoff is calculated to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shut down is properly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

  From the above, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) for overall control of the game, and the slave control means (payout control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control apparatus) for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

  The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received over a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

  Also, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the RAM 111c capable of storing data, an initialization operation unit (initialization switch) operable from the outside, and the operation of the initialization operation unit. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111c, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.

  In addition, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111c after the standby time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

  When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates the register bank 1 as a register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM head address in a predetermined register (A1302). Switching from register bank 0 used in the main process to register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt process is equivalent to saving the register used in the main process. When timer interrupt processing is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 executes input processing for inputting from various sensors and switches, capturing signals, that is, reading the state of each input port (A1303). Further, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 39b) is executed (A1304). If a firing prohibition signal is output in the processing of step A1005 in the main processing, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to a permitted state. .

  Next, the game control device 100 executes random number update processing 1 (A1305) and random number update processing 2 (A1306). The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number that are the targets of the initial value random number update process. The random number update process 2 is a process for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. Note that the random number update process 1 and the random number update process 2 do not have to be executed when the probability setting is being changed (in the setting variable state). After that, it is monitored whether there is a normal signal input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 39a, and error monitoring (such as the front frame and the like). A winning opening switch / status monitoring process is executed (such as whether the glass frame is opened) (A1307).

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a probability setting value changing process for changing the probability setting value (A1308). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the probability setting is being changed (in the setting variable state) (A1309). Whether or not the probability setting is being changed can be determined by the probability setting value changing flag (A1038). Next, it is determined whether the probability setting is being confirmed (in the setting confirmation state) (A1310). When a probability setting value confirmation mode flag to be described later is set, it can be determined that the probability setting confirmation is being performed.

  The game control device 100 performs payout command transmission processing for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer to the payout control device 200 in various processing when the probability setting is not changed or the probability setting is not confirmed (result of A1310 is “N”). Execute (A1311). Further, a special figure game process for performing a process related to the special figure variable display game is executed (A1312), and then a general figure game process for performing a process related to the normal figure variable display game is executed (A1313). The game control device 100 sends a payout command because there is no need when the probability setting is being changed (the result of A1309 is “Y”) or when the probability setting is being confirmed (the result of A1310 is “Y”). The process (A1311), special figure game process (A1312), and ordinary figure game process (A1313) are not executed, and the process proceeds to step A1314.

  Next, the game control device 100 is provided in the gaming machine 10 and executes a segment LED editing process for driving a segment LED that displays special information variation game and various information related to the game to display desired contents. (A1314).

  Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 executes a magnet fraud monitoring process that checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether there is any abnormality (A1315). For example, in the magnet fraud monitoring process, the magnet fraud occurrence flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area when there is an abnormality. Furthermore, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (panel radio wave fraud monitoring process) for checking whether there is any abnormality by checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board is executed (A1316). For example, in the radio wave fraud monitoring process, the board radio wave fraud flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area when there is an abnormality.

  After that, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process for setting a signal to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1317). Then, a status display edit output process for editing and outputting the output data to the status display device 152 is executed (A1318). In the state display edit output process, as the output data to the state display device 152, a bonus rate, a payout rate, a discharge ball number, and the like may be calculated. In the status display edit output process, if the checksum of the status display work area is calculated at power-on (power recovery) and does not match the checksum at power-off, the status display work area and status display The stack area may be cleared. Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is terminated. Note that, when the timer interrupt process returns, the interrupt disabled state and the register bank specification are automatically restored, but depending on the CPU used, the interrupt is permitted after the external information editing process. Or a process of returning the register bank designation to the register bank 0 may be performed.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (A1304) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the output process.

  First, the game control device 100 outputs (resets) off-data to a port 135 (see FIG. 3) that outputs segment data of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1601). Next, the data to be output to the solenoid output port 134 that outputs the data of the special winning opening solenoid 39b is synthesized and output (A1602).

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 updates the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1603). Further, the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (A1604). Then, the acquired data and external information data are combined (A1605), and the combined data is output to the fourth output port 136 for digit output / external information output (A1606). Thereafter, the segment line output data is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the digit counter value (A1607), and the loaded data is output to the third output port 135 for segment output (A1608).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 loads and synthesizes the data to be output to the external information terminal 71 (A1609), and further synthesizes the synthesized data and the output data for permission to fire (A1610), and finally synthesizes them. Data is output to the fifth output port 137 for outputting external information / firing permission signal (A1611).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets off output data for the probability setting value display (A1612). The off output data is output data (blank data for turning off the light) during a period when the probability setting value display is not performed. Then, it is determined whether a probability setting value display permission flag that permits display of the probability setting value is set (A1613). The probability setting value display permission flag is set in a probability setting value changing process described later.

  When the probability setting value display permission flag is set (the result of A1613 is “Y”), the game control device 100 loads the probability setting value display data from the probability setting value display data area (A1614) and loads the probability setting value display permission flag. The probability set value display data is output to the probability set value display output port (sixth output port 141) (A1615). When the probability setting value display permission flag is not set (the result of A1613 is “N”), the probability setting value display data is not loaded, and the off-output data is output as the probability setting value display output port (sixth output port 141). (A1615). Accordingly, when the probability setting value display permission flag is set, the probability setting value display device 143 displays the probability setting value, and when the probability setting value display permission flag is not set, the probability setting value display device 143 is displayed. Goes off (blank display).

  Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (A1616). Thereafter, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (A1617).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 loads and synthesizes data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test fire test apparatus, and the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. The synthesized data is output (A1618). Furthermore, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( A1619). Then, the data output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (A1620), the output process is terminated.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 loads the test signal output data of the probability setting value (A1621). Here, the display data itself of the probability set value display device 143 (7-segment display), that is, the probability set value display data in the probability set value display data area is output as the test signal output data related to the probability set value. Note that the test signal output data may be numerical data (1 to 6) representing a set value, or output data in another form. Then, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A1622). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1622 is “Y”), the loaded data and the setting key switch on information are combined (A1623), and the combined data is output to the test signal output port 6 (A1624). ). On the other hand, when the setting key switch 93 is OFF (the result of A1622 is “N”), the test signal output data of the probability setting value is output to the test signal output port 6 as it is (A1624).

[Prize mouth switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a winning mouth switch / status monitoring process. The winning opening switch / status monitoring process is executed in step A1307 in the timer interrupt process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether or not the probability setting is being changed (in the setting variable state) (A2001). When the probability setting is not being changed (the result of A2001 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the probability setting is being confirmed (in the setting confirmation state) (A2002). When the probability setting confirmation is not in progress (the result of A2001 is “N”), the monitoring process from step A2003 to A2010 is executed as usual. On the other hand, when the probability setting is being changed (the result of A2001 is “Y”) or when the probability setting is being confirmed (the result of A2002 is “Y”), the glass frame 15 may be released. Since there is a possibility that a game ball can be put in any winning opening by hand, and there is no point in performing the monitoring process, the monitoring process from step A2003 to A2010 is not executed, and the process proceeds to the process of step A2011. To do.

  When the probability control is not being changed (the result of A2001 is “N”), the game control device 100 receives a prize corresponding to one of the big prize opening switches 39a (two) in the big prize opening (special variable prize winning device 39). The mouth monitoring table 1 is prepared (A2003). Then, an illegal & winning monitoring process is performed to monitor whether there is an illegal winning in the big winning opening even though the big winning opening is not open (A2004).

  After that, the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other of the large winning opening switches 39a (two) in the large winning opening (special variable winning apparatus 39) (A2005). Then, an illegal & prize winning monitoring process for monitoring an illegal prize and detecting a normal prize is executed (A2006).

  Then, the game control device 100 prepares a winning port monitoring table corresponding to the start port 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37 (A2007). Then, an illegal & winning prize monitoring process for monitoring an illegal winning prize and detecting a normal winning prize is executed (A2008). Next, a winning opening monitoring table for winning opening switches that do not require fraud monitoring is prepared (A2009). The winning opening switches that do not require fraud monitoring are the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the winning opening switch (SW) 35a of the general winning opening 35.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a winning number counter updating process for updating the winning number (A2010). Then, the state scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals to be monitored is to be monitored this time is updated (A2011). The status scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2012). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is executed (A2013). Details of the gaming machine state check process will be described later.

  By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 1, when the state scan counter value is 0, the state based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output by the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like (switch abnormality) 1 error) monitoring is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state (shoot ball break error) based on the chute ball break switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 2, monitoring of the state based on the overflow switch signal (overflow error) is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, the state based on the dispensing abnormality status signal (dispensing abnormality error) Monitoring is set.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2014). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is executed (A2015).

  By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, when the state scan counter value is 0, the state (glass frame open error) is monitored based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch. When the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state (main body frame open error, front frame open error) based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 2, monitoring of the state based on the frame radio wave improper signal (frame radio wave fraud) is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 3, monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is set. Is set.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the state scan counter is 0 (A2016). If the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (the result of A2016 is “N”), the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is terminated. In this case, there is no state monitoring target in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 referred to next.

  In addition, when the value of the error scan counter is 0 (the result of A2016 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 (A2017), and an error has occurred. A game machine state check process for determining the state of the machine is executed (A2018).

  By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, when the state scan counter value is 0, a state based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to occurrence of disconnection of the connector of the switch (switch abnormality) 2 error) monitoring is set. The gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is not defined when the state scan counter is 1 to 3.

  After that, the game control device 100 executes a payout busy signal check process for setting a busy signal status (a payout busy signal flag) based on a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control (A2019). ), The winning prize switch / status monitoring process is terminated.

  Note that the processing from steps A2017 to A2019 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is 0, so that it is executed at a rate of once every four timer interrupts. . That is, when the timer interruption is performed every 4 ms, the processing from A2017 to A2019 is performed every 16 ms.

  In the fraud and winning monitoring process (A2008), the number of winnings and the number of winning balls (total of the number of winning balls) related to the big winning mouth (special variable winning device 39) and the normal variable winning device 37 are counted and stored. In addition, information on the number of winning prizes and the number of balls acquired for each role may be set as an effect command. In the winning number counter updating process (A2010), the number of winnings and the number of winning balls by combination (total of the number of winning balls) related to the start winning opening 36 and the general winning opening 35 are counted and stored. Information on the number of acquired balls may be set as an effect command. Further, in the prize opening switch / status monitoring process (FIG. 8), the number of out balls (the number of discharged balls) is counted and stored by the out ball detection switch, and further, the information on the number of out balls is a production command (out ball number command). May be set as The payout rate is a ratio (ratio) of the total number of winning balls (the number of acquired balls by all functions) to the number of discharged balls. For example, the ratio of the prizes is the percentage (%) of the number of prize balls (number of balls earned for each kind of prize) obtained by winning the grand prize opening among all the prize balls is there. In the status display edit output process (A1318), as the output data to the status display device 152, an accessory ratio, a payout rate, a number of discharged balls, and the like may be calculated.

[Game machine status check processing]
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gaming machine state check process. The gaming machine state check process is executed in steps A2013, A2015, and A2018 in the prize opening switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG.

  The game control apparatus 100 first acquires a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter (A2201). The state scan counter is set to a value in the range of 0 to 3 corresponding to the gaming state. The relationship between the state monitoring table and the state scan counter is the same as described in the prize opening switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the check target signal is on (A2202). When the signal to be checked is not on (result of A2202 is “N”), that is, when the signal to be checked is off, a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (A2203), and the target state off command is acquired. And prepare (A2204). Further, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2205). The state off flag indicates a normal state with respect to an error signal, and indicates a non-touch state with respect to a touch switch signal.

  On the other hand, when the check target signal is on (result of A2202 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 prepares a state on flag as a state flag (A2206), acquires the target state on command, and prepares (A2207). Further, the target state on-monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2208). The state on flag indicates an abnormal or illegal state for an error signal, and indicates a touched state for a touch switch signal.

  When the process of step A2205 or step A2208 ends, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target signal control area matches the state of the acquired signal (A2209). If they match (the result of A2209 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2212. If they do not match (the result of A2209 is “N”), the acquired signal state is saved in the target signal control area (A2210), and the target state monitoring timer is cleared (A2211).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 updates the target state monitoring timer by +1 (A2212). Further, it is determined whether or not the updated value of the state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (A2213). If the updated state monitoring timer value is less than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A2213 is “N”), the gaming machine state check process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the updated state monitoring timer value is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A2213 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the state monitoring timer by −1, and the timer comparison value− The value is kept at 1 (A2214). Further, it is determined whether or not the prepared status flag matches the value of the target status flag area (A2215). If they match (the result of A2215 is “Y”), the gaming machine state check process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (the result of A2215 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 saves the prepared state flag in the target state flag area. (A2216). Finally, an effect command setting process for setting an effect command is executed (A2217), and the gaming machine state check process ends. The effect command here is either a state off command or a state on command. If the state on command is an error command, the effect control device 300 is caused to start error notification. In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Probability setting value change processing]
Next, details of the probability setting value change process (A1308) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability setting value changing process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability setting value is being changed (in the setting variable state) (A2401). When the probability setting value is not being changed (the result of A2401 is “N”), a probability setting value confirmation process for confirming the probability setting value is executed (A2402).

  When the probability setting value is being changed (the result of A2401 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 updates −1 if the probability setting value extinction timer is not 0 (A2403), and the probability setting value extinction timer is 0. It is determined whether or not (A2404). If the probability set value turn-off timer is 0 (the result of A2404 is “Y”), the probability set value display permission flag is set (A2405), and the process proceeds to step A2406. If the probability set value turn-off timer is not 0 (the result of A2404 is “N”), nothing is done and the process proceeds to step A2406.

  Then, in step A2406, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting value has been changed (A2406). The probability setting value has been changed when a probability setting value changed flag described later is set. When the probability setting value has been changed (the result of A2406 is “Y”), the setting change end processing of steps A2416 to A2421 is executed.

  When the probability setting value has not been changed (the result of A2406 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether there is an input from the setting value change switch 102 (A2407). When there is no input from the setting value change switch 102 (result of A2407 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A2411.

  When there is an input from the set value change switch 102 (the result of A2407 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the value in the work probability set value area by 1 in the range of 0 to 5 (A2408). Thus, each time the set value change switch 102 is operated, the value in the work probability set value area increases by one. When the set value change switch 102 is operated after the value of the work probability setting value area becomes 5, the value of the work probability setting value area may return to 0. Values 0 to 5 in the work probability setting value area correspond to six stages of probability setting values 1 to 6. The probability setting value is not limited to six levels.

  Then, the game control device 100 saves the probability setting value display data corresponding to the work probability setting value in the probability setting value display data area (A2409). Next, an initial value (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the probability setting value extinction timer area (A2410). This initial value corresponds to a turn-off period (blank period) in which the probability setting value display device 143 is turned off (blank display).

  In this way, when the probability setting value extinction timer is 0, the probability setting value display permission flag is set to set the probability setting value display data as a probability setting value (working probability setting value) whose setting is being changed. When displayed on the set value display device 143 and the probability set value turn-off timer is not 0, the probability set value display device 143 is turned off. Even if the setting is only one stage (when the setting value is only 1) since the setting value change switch 102 (setting value change button) is operated by the probability setting value turn-off timer, the light is turned off for a predetermined turn-off period. The probability setting value display device 143 can visually recognize that the setting value change switch 102 has been operated.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not there is an input of a touch switch signal from a touch switch provided on the operation handle 24 (A2411). When there is no input of the touch switch signal (the result of A2411 is “N”), the probability setting value changing process is terminated. When a touch switch signal is input (the result of A2411 is “Y”), the value in the work probability setting value area is loaded and saved in the probability setting value area (A2412). The touch switch signal is a confirmation signal for confirming the set value. Then, values 0 to 5 corresponding to the confirmed probability setting values are stored in the probability setting value area.

  It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the probability setting value is determined and stored in the probability setting value area when the setting key switch 93 is turned off or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the setting variable state has been entered. Further, an operable confirmation button switch (operation means, operation unit) may be newly provided in the game control apparatus 100, and a signal from the confirmation button switch may be used as a confirmation signal for confirming the set value. . That is, instead of operating the touch switch, the operation of the newly provided confirm button switch may be set as the confirm operation.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value in the probability setting value display data area (A2413). Thereby, the confirmed probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143. Then, a probability setting value changed flag indicating that the probability setting value has been changed is set (A2414), and a command for changing the probability setting value indicating that the probability setting value has been changed is sent to the effect control device 300 (effect control). (A2415), and the probability setting value changing process is terminated.

  In the setting change end processing from step A2416 to A2421, the game control device 100 first determines whether or not the setting key switch 93 is OFF (A2416). When the setting key switch 93 is in the ON state (the result of A2416 is “N”), the probability setting value changing process is terminated. When the setting key switch 93 is off (the result of A2416 is “Y”), the RAM clear head address 3 is set (A2417), and the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (A2418). The RAM area to be cleared here is the clear area # 3 in FIG. 5C. The clear area # 3 includes a control information area (area from the power failure inspection area 1 to the checksum area) and a game control stack area, and the probability setting value area and the random number area are excluded. The clear area # 3 is obtained by removing the random number area from the clear area # 2, and the random number updated during the setting change is not wasted. Clearing the RAM area to be cleared to 0 clears information and flags used for setting changes, such as information on the work probability setting value area, probability setting value changing flag, and probability setting value changed flag. The

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A2419). Since the setting change has been completed, the initial value of the security signal control timer (described later) for outputting the security signal is saved, and the external device (hall) is notified that the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened. Output to a computer). Thereafter, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (A2420). Thereby, the probability setting value at the end of the setting change is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 and maintained.

  Next, the game control device 100 transmits a probability setting change end command indicating that the probability setting change has ended to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A2421), and returns to the main process (FIG. 5B). The process proceeds to step A1049. The commands transmitted here are the above-mentioned model designation command, decoration special figure 1 hold number command, decoration special figure 2 hold number command, probability information command, setting value information command (probability setting value information command), and probability setting change end. Command (may be a RAM initialization command). Depending on the model, an effect mode information command, an effect count information command, and a high probability count information command are transmitted. Upon receiving the probability setting change end command, the effect control device 300 displays, for example, a customer waiting demo on the display device 41, and notifies the RAM initialization (RAM clear) with the sound of the LED of the panel decoration device 46 and the speaker and the speaker. Perform for 30 seconds.

[Probability setting value confirmation processing]
Next, details of the probability setting value confirmation process (A2402) in the above-described probability setting value changing process will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the probability setting value confirmation process.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is in a probability setting value confirmation mode (a state in which a setting value confirmation is possible) in which a probability setting value can be confirmed (A2501). When a later-described probability setting value confirmation mode flag is set, it can be determined that the probability setting value confirmation mode is in effect. When the probability setting value confirmation mode is in effect (the result of A2501 is “Y”), the processing after step A2509 is executed.

  When the game control device 100 is not in the probability setting value confirmation mode (the result of A2501 is “N”), the game control device 100 clears the probability setting value display permission flag (A2502). Then, it is determined whether or not a game is in progress (A2503). For example, it can be determined that a game is in progress when the variable display game is being executed or in a big hit state. When the game is in progress (the result of A2503 is “Y”), the probability setting value confirmation process is terminated so as to make it impossible to confirm the probability setting value. When the game is not in progress (the result of A2503 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A2504). When the setting key switch 93 is OFF (the result of A2504 is “N”), the probability setting value confirmation process is terminated.

  When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A2504 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 sets the probability setting value confirmation mode flag (A2505). As a result, when the probability setting value is not being changed (in the setting variable state) (the result of A2401 is “N”), if the setting key switch 93 is turned on, the probability setting value confirmation mode in which the probability setting value can be confirmed ( The setting value can be checked). Subsequently, a probability setting value display permission flag is set (A2506). Thereby, the probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 143 based on the probability setting value display data loaded from the probability setting value display data area by the output process (FIG. 7).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the initial value in the security signal control timer area so that the security signal can be output (A2507). When the set value is confirmed, a security signal is output, and it can be output to an external device (such as a hall computer) that the front frame 12 has been opened. The command for confirming the probability setting value is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A2508), and the probability setting value confirming process is terminated.

  When the game control apparatus 100 is in the probability setting value confirmation mode (the result of A2501 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the setting key switch 93 is on (A2509). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A2509 is “Y”), the probability setting value confirmation mode continues, and the probability setting value confirmation probability setting value confirmation processing ends.

  When the setting key switch 93 is OFF (the result of A2509 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 clears the probability setting value confirmation mode flag (A2510). Accordingly, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the probability setting value confirmation mode ends. In order to prevent the probability setting value from being displayed on the probability setting value display device 143, the probability setting value display permission flag is cleared (A2511). Subsequently, a probability setting value confirmation end command indicating that the probability setting value confirmation is completed is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A2512).

  In the above, the setting value change switch 102 is configured to be usable as a RAM initialization switch (RAM clear switch). However, a RAM initialization switch may be provided separately from the setting value change switch 102. In this case, when the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch are turned on when the power is turned on (power restoration), the setting variable state (setting change state) is entered, and the setting key switch 93 is turned on and the RAM initialization switch is turned on. If the setting key switch 93 is off and the RAM initialization switch is on, the RAM initialization (RAM clear) can be performed if the setting key switch 93 is off and the RAM initialization switch is on. If the initialization switch is off, it may be configured to be in a normal power-on (power recovery) state. Further, the setting value (setting) may be determined when the setting key switch 93 is turned off from on.

[Special Figure Game Processing]
Next, details of the special game process (A1312) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure game process. In the special figure game process, the input of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

  First, the game control device 100 executes a start port switch monitoring process for monitoring a winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (A2601). In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins the normal variation winning device 37 that forms the start winning port 36 and the second starting winning port, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) are extracted, and special figure fluctuation display based on the winning is made. Prior to the start of the game, a game result preliminary determination is performed in which a game result based on a prize is determined in advance. The details of the start port switch monitoring process will be described later.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a special winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602). In the big winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the count switch 39a provided in the special variable winning device 39 is monitored. Details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process will be described later.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 updates -1 (subtracts 1) (A2603) if the special figure game processing timer is not 0. The special game process timer is timed by the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt process by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to zero. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A2604). If the special figure game process timer is not 0 (the result of A2604 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A2619.

  If the special game process timer is 0 (the result of A2604 is “Y”), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, the game control apparatus 100 corresponds to the special figure game process number. A special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process is set in the register (A2605). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the special figure game sequence branch table (A2606). Subsequently, a subroutine call is made with a special figure game process number, and a game branch process corresponding to the special figure game process number is executed (A2607).

  When the game process number is “0” in step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 monitors the start of fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game, sets the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game, sets the effect, A special figure routine process for setting information necessary for performing the special figure changing process is executed (A2608). Details of the special figure routine processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “1” in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets a special figure stop display time, special information for performing special figure display processing, and the like. The process during the figure change is executed (A2609). Details of the special figure changing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is “2” in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets the fanfare command according to the type of jackpot or sets each jackpot if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a jackpot. A special chart display process is performed for setting the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern, setting information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval process (A2610). For example, in the special figure display processing, if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, set necessary information such as a big hit fanfare command (direction command), a big hit fanfare time, a probability information command (low probability), A process number “3” related to the fanfare / interval process is set and saved in the special game process number area. If the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, set necessary information such as a small hit fanfare command (direction command) and a small hit fanfare time, and set the processing number “7” related to the small hit fanfare middle processing. Save in the special figure game process number area. If the result of the special figure variation display game is not a big hit or a small hit, a process number “0” related to the special figure normal process is set and saved in the special figure game process number area.

  When the game process number is “3” in step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 sets the opening time of the big prize opening, updates the number of times of opening, and processes information necessary for performing the big prize opening opening process. Processing during fanfare / interval for setting and the like is executed (A2611). For example, in the process during fanfare / interval, necessary information such as the round command (direction command) corresponding to the round of the round game to be executed and the opening time of the big prize opening is set, and the process number related to the big prize opening opening process “4” is set and saved in the special figure game process number area.

  When the game process number is “4” in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the big hit round is not the final round, while setting an ending command if the final round is, A process for opening a special winning opening is performed to set information necessary for performing the special winning opening remaining ball process (A2612). For example, in the special winning opening opening process, necessary information such as an interval command and an ending command as an effect command is set, and a processing number “5” related to the winning prize remaining ball processing is set, and a special figure game processing number area To save.

  When the game process number is “5” in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets a time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening if the big hit round is the final round, A big winning opening remaining ball process for setting information necessary for the big hit end process is executed (A2613). For example, in the winning ball remaining ball processing, if it is not the final round, the interval time is saved in the special game processing timer area, and the processing number “3” related to the fanfare / interval processing is set to the special game processing number area. Save. If it is the final round, the ending time is saved in the special figure game process timer area, the process number “6” relating to the big hit end process is set and saved in the special figure game process number area.

  When the game process number is “6” in step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 executes a jackpot end process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure routine process (A2614). For example, in the jackpot end processing, necessary information such as the probability state after the jackpot state ends and the general electric power support state (time reduction state) after the jackpot state end is set, and the probability information command (production) Command), a process number “0” related to the special figure normal process is set and saved in the special figure game process number area. In the probability information command, the probability state after the big hit state (high probability / low probability) and the number of continuous games in the power support state (short time state) after the big hit state end (time shortening variation number, power support number) This information is included.

  When the game process number is “7” in step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 sets the opening time of the big prize opening, updates the number of times of opening, sets the information necessary for performing the small hitting process, etc. Is executed during small hitting fanfare (A2615). For example, in the small hitting fanfare process, necessary information such as the small winning opening time of the big winning opening is set, and a process number “8” related to the small hitting process is set and saved in the special game process number area.

  If the game process number is “8” in step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 executes a small hitting process for setting information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball process (A2616). For example, in the small hit middle processing, necessary information such as the small hit remaining ball processing time is set, and the processing number “9” related to the big winning opening remaining ball processing is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

  When the game process number is “9” in step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 executes a small hit remaining ball process for setting information necessary for performing the small hit end process (A2617). For example, in the small hit remaining ball process, necessary information such as the small hit ending time is set, a process number “10” related to the special figure small hit end process is set, and saved in the special figure 1 game process number area.

  When the game process number is “10” in step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 executes a small hit end process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure routine process (A2618).

  When the process based on the special figure game process number is completed, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling fluctuations of the special figure 1 display 51 (A2619), and then displays the special figure 1 display. The symbol fluctuation control process according to 51 is executed (A2620). And after preparing the special figure 2 fluctuation | variation control table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (A2621), the symbol fluctuation | variation control process which concerns on the special figure 2 indicator 52 is performed (A2622). Details of the symbol variation control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (A2601) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process.

  First, the game control device 100 prepares a winning monitoring table for the starting winning port 36 (starting port 1) (A2701), executes a hard random number acquisition process (A2702), and determines whether or not there is a winning at the starting winning port 36. Is determined (A2703). If there is no winning at the start winning opening 36 (the result of A2703 is “N”), the processing after step A2709 is executed. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the start winning opening 36 (the result of A2703 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the special drawing time is short (in the normal power support state) (A2704).

  When it is determined that the game control device 100 is not in the special drawing time reduction (in the normal power support state) (the result of A2704 is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the processing after step A2707. On the other hand, if it is in the special drawing time (in the normal power support state) (the result of A2704 is “Y”), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A2705), and an effect command setting process is executed ( A2706).

  That is, in the normal power support state (short-time state), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared and an effect command setting process is executed regardless of the probability state (high probability state / low probability state) of the variable display game. . In the case of the present embodiment, a winning is not made unless the start winning opening 36 is left-handed, and a winning is not made unless the right-handed winning device 37 is right-handed. If the player does not hit right, the game ball does not pass through the normal start gate 34. Therefore, the right-handed is more advantageous than the left-handed in the power-powered support state (short-time state). However, when the start winning opening 36 is won during the power-powered support state (that is, in the power-powered support state) Left-handed), a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 performs notification (warning) instructing to make a right-hand shot by the display device 41 or the like.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by the start winning port 36 (start port 1) (A2707), and then executes the special figure start port switch common process (A2708). Then, a winning monitoring table for the second starting winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) is prepared (A2709), a hard random number acquisition process is executed (A2710), and whether or not there is a winning at the second starting winning opening. Determine (A2711). If there is no winning at the second start winning opening (the result of A2711 is “N”), the start opening switch monitoring process is terminated.

  On the other hand, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is in operation when there is a prize at the second start prize opening (the result of A2711 is “Y”). That is, it is determined whether or not the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state in which a game ball can be won (A2712). If the ordinary electric accessory is in operation (the result of A2712 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2714.

  On the other hand, when the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (the result of A2712 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not an ordinary electric power fraud has occurred (A2713). When the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or larger than the number of fraud determinations (for example, 5), it is determined that the normal power fraud is occurring. The normal variation winning device 37 cannot win a game ball in the closed state, and can win a game ball only in the open state. Accordingly, when the game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud occurs, and when there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as an illegal winning number. Then, when the number of illegal winnings counted in this way is equal to or larger than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

  The game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by the second start winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) when the ordinary electric power fraud has not occurred (the result of A2713 is "N") (A2714) Then, the special figure start port switch common process is executed (A2715), and the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. In addition, when it is determined in A2713 that the power transmission fraud has occurred (the result of A2713 is “Y”), the start port switch monitoring process is also terminated. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, details of the special-purpose start port switch common process (A2708, A2715) in the start port switch monitoring process will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure start port switch common process. The special figure start port switch common process is a process performed in common for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

  The game control device 100 first outputs the information regarding the number of winnings to the monitored start port switch among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a to the management device outside the gaming machine 10. The starting port signal output count is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (A2903). If the number of outputs does not overflow (the result of A2903 is “N”), the updated value is saved in the start signal output number area of the RWM (A2904), and the process proceeds to step A2905. On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (the result of A2903 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2905. In the present embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the updated value becomes “0” by +1 update, and it is determined that the output count overflows.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of special figure reservations (starting memory number) to be updated corresponding to the monitoring target starting port switch among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit value. Is determined (A2905). If the number of special figure hold to be updated is not less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is “N”), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is “Y”), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (the number of special figure reservations or the number of special figure 2 reservations) is updated by one (A2906), and saves the target start opening winning flag (A2907).

  Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored and the number of reserved special figures (A2908), and stores the big hit random number prepared in step A2805 as the big hit random number of the RWM. Save in the area (A2909). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starter switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (A2910), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is a winning to the start winning opening 36 (start opening 1) (A2912). If it is not a prize to the start winning opening 36 (the result of A2912 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A2915. On the other hand, when the winning is to the start winning opening 36 (the result of A2912 is “Y”), a small hit symbol random number is extracted, prepared (A2913), and saved in the RWM small hit symbol random number storage area (A2914). ).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (A2915), and executes special figure hold information determination processing (A2916). Then, a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the start opening switch to be monitored and the special figure hold number is prepared as an effect command (A2917), and an effect command setting process (A2918) is executed to share the special figure start port switch. The process ends.

  Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls to the start winning area of the start winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37, and becomes the right to execute the variable display game. A starting storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as starting storage is provided. In addition, the start storage means (game control device 100) uses, as a first start storage, various random number values extracted based on winning of game balls to the first start winning opening (start winning opening 36) up to a predetermined number. The random number value stored based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) is stored as the second start storage up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (A2916) in the start port common process will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure hold information determination process. The special figure hold information determination process is a pre-reading (preliminary determination) process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 checks the start opening prize flag saved in step A2907 to determine whether or not the start winning opening 36 (start opening 1) is a win (A3001). When it is not a prize to the start winning opening 36 (the result of A3001 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A3004. On the other hand, if the winning is to the start winning opening 36 (the result of A3001 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special drawing time is short (in the normal power support state) (A3002).

  The game control device 100 ends the special figure hold information determination process when it is in the special figure short time (in the normal power support state) (the result of A3002 is “Y”). On the other hand, if the special drawing time is not short (the result of A3002 is “N”), it is determined whether the big hit or the small hit is being made (A3003). When the big hit or the small hit is being made (the result of A3003 is “Y”), the special figure holding information determination processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when the game control device 100 is not in the big hit or the small hit (the result of A3003 is “N”), the big hit determination processing for determining whether the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value or not Is executed (A3004). If the determination result is a big hit (the result of A3005 is “Y”), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starter switch is set (A3006), and the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A2910 is set. The corresponding stop symbol information is acquired (A3007), and the process proceeds to step A3014.

  When the determination result is not a big hit (the result of A3005 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the first start opening (start winning opening 36) is a prize (A3008). When it is not a prize to the start winning opening 36 (the result of A3008 is “N”), the stop symbol information of the outage is set (A3013), and the process proceeds to step A3014.

  When the game control device 100 wins the start winning opening 36 (the result of A3008 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value or not. A hit determination process is executed (A3009). If the determination result is not a small hit (the result of A3010 is “N”), the stop symbol information of the deviation is set (A3013), and the process proceeds to step A3014. On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (the result of A3010 is “Y”), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (A3011), and the stop symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A143 is set. Information is acquired (A3012), and the process proceeds to step A3014.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the target start opening switch and stop symbol information as an effect command (A3014), and executes an effect command setting process (A3015). Next, a special figure information setting process for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern is performed (A3016), and a fluctuation pattern setting process for setting a fluctuation mode of the special figure fluctuation display game is executed (A3017). ).

  After that, the game control device 100 prepares a prefetch variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game as an effect command (A3018). ), An effect command setting process is performed (A3019), and the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. The special figure information setting process in step A3016 and the fluctuation pattern setting process in step A3017 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure ordinary process. In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

  Through the above processing, a prefetch symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory to be prefetched and a prefetch variation pattern command including information on the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. And transmitted to the production control device 300. As a result, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information corresponding to the start memory (whether it is a big hit or the type of the fluctuation pattern) is controlled before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 300 can be notified, and in particular, by changing the decoration special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variable display game. It is possible to notify.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as start memory in the start memory means (game control device 100) before the execution of the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). Etc.) Pre-determination means. Note that the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the start winning time when the start memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Big prize opening switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of the special winning opening switch monitoring process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the value of the special figure game process number is “4”, that is, whether or not the special winning opening is being opened (A3101). When the special winning opening is being opened (the result of A3101 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A3105. If the special winning opening is not being opened (the result of A3101 is “N”), whether the value of the special figure game process number is “5”, that is, whether or not the special winning opening remaining ball is being processed. Determine (A3102).

  The game control device 100 proceeds to the processing of step A3105 when the winning ball remaining ball processing is in progress (the result of A3102 is “Y”). Also, if the winning ball remaining ball processing is not in progress (the result of A3105 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure game processing number is “8”, that is, whether or not the small hitting is being processed. (A3103). If small hitting is being processed (the result of A3104 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A3105. If the small hit process is not in progress (the result of A3103 is “N”), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game process number is “9”, that is, whether the small hit remaining ball process is in progress ( A3104). Since the special figure game process number does not shift to the next until the special figure game process timer becomes 0, the progress of the game can be checked by the special figure game process number.

  When the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (the result of A3104 is “N”), the game control device 100 ends the big winning opening switch monitoring processing. If the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (the result of A3104 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A3105. Then, 0 is set in the winning counter (A3105), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the big winning opening switch 1 (one big winning opening switch 39a) (A3106).

  When there is no input to the big prize opening switch 1 (the result of A3106 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether there is an input to the big prize opening switch 2 (the other big prize opening switch 39a). (A3110). If there is an input to the special winning opening switch 1 (the result of A3106 is “Y”), a special winning prize count command is prepared as an effect command (A3107), and an effect command setting process (A3108) is executed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (A3109), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the big prize opening switch 2 (the other big prize opening switch 39a) (A3110).

  When there is no input to the big prize opening switch 2 (the result of A3110 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the value of the prize counter is 0 (A3114). If there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (the result of A3110 is “Y”), a special winning prize count command is prepared as an effect command (A3111), and an effect command setting process (A3112) is executed. Then, the winning counter is updated by 1 (A3113), and it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter is 0 (A3114).

  When the value of the winning counter is 0 (the result of A3114 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 ends the big winning opening switch monitoring process. If the value of the winning counter is not 0 (the result of A3114 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the big winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed (A3115). When the winning ball remaining ball processing is in progress (result of A3115 is “Y”), the winning winning port switch monitoring process is ended, and when the winning ball remaining ball processing is not in progress (result of A3115 is “N”), small It is determined whether or not the hit remaining ball is being processed (A3116).

  When the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (the result of A3116 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 ends the big winning opening switch monitoring process, and when the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (the result of A3116 is “ N "), the value of the winning counter (1 or 2) is added to the number of winning prizes (A3117), and the number of winning prizes is the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round. For example," 9 " ) It is determined whether or not the above has been reached (A3118).

  The game control apparatus 100 ends the big prize opening switch monitoring process when the big prize mouth count number is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (the result of A3118 is “N”). Also, when the number of winning prizes exceeds the upper limit (the result of A3118 is “Y”), the number of winning prizes is kept at the upper limit (A3119), and the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0. (A3120), it is determined whether small hitting is being processed (A3121).

  When the game control device 100 is not processing the small hits (the result of A3121 is “N”), the game winning device switch monitoring process is terminated and the small hits are being processed (the result of A3121 is “Y”). Then, the value of the end of the small hit release operation is saved in the big winning opening control pointer area (A3122), and the big winning opening switch monitoring process is finished. This closes the grand prize opening and ends one round.

[Special figure routine processing]
Next, details of the special figure routine process (A2608) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure normal processing.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) is 0 (A3201). When the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (the result of A3201 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 hold number (first start memory number) is 0 (A3205). If the special figure 1 hold number is 0 (the result of A3205 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demo has started (A3209), and if the customer waiting demo has not started (A3209). If the result is "N"), a customer waiting demo flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area to indicate that the customer waiting demo state is in effect (A3210) (A3210).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares the customer waiting demo command as an effect command (A3211), performs an effect command setting process (A3212), and sets “0” related to the special figure normal process as the process number ( A3213). On the other hand, if the customer waiting demonstration has already started in step A3209 (the result of A3209 is “Y”), “0” related to the special figure routine process is set as the process number (A3213). Thereafter, the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (A3214), and the variation symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (A3215). Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A3216), and the special figure routine processing is terminated.

  Thus, the customer waiting demo command is transmitted when the special figure 1 hold number (first start memory number) and the special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) are 0, and the customer wait demo command is received. The produced effect control device 300 performs a setting for displaying the customer waiting demonstration on the display device 41 or the like. Note that the game control device 100 may be configured to transmit a customer waiting demo command only when the touch switch signal from the touch switch of the operation handle 24 becomes an off signal.

  In addition, when the special figure 2 hold number is not 0 (the result of A3201 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 executes a special figure 2 change start process (A3202), and the decoration special corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is executed. A figure hold number command (decoration special figure 2 hold number command) is prepared as an effect command (A3203), an effect command setting process is executed (A3204), and the special figure ordinary process is terminated.

  In addition, when the special figure 1 hold number is not 0 (the result of A3205 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 executes a special figure 1 change start process (A3206), and displays the special figure 1 hold number corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number. A figure hold number command (decoration special figure 1 hold number command) is prepared as an effect command (A3207), an effect command setting process is executed (A3208), and the special figure ordinary process is terminated.

  In this way, by checking the special figure 2 hold number before the special figure 1 hold number check, if the special figure 2 hold number is not 0, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) is executed. The Rukoto. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed in preference to the special figure 1 variable display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start memory means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory is displayed as the variable display based on the first start memory. Priority control means for executing with priority over the game.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3206) in the special figure ordinary process will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game.

  The game control device 100 saves a special figure 1 variation flag indicating the type of special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) in the variation symbol discrimination flag area (A3401). Subsequently, a big hit flag 1 setting process for setting shift information and big hit information to the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit is executed (A3402). Details of the big hit flag 1 setting process will be described later.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 executes a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) (A3403). Details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process will be described later. Further, the game control device 100 executes special figure information setting processing for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern (A3404).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set (A3405). ). After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game (A3406).

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a change start information setting process for setting change start information of the special figure 1 change display game (A3407), and ends the special figure 1 change start process. In the variation start information setting process, a variation time value corresponding to the variation pattern (variation pattern number) is acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area. For the special figure 1 variation display game, variation commands (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern numbers are prepared as production commands, and production command setting processing is performed.

  Then, the game control device 100 sets “1” related to the special figure changing process as the process number (A3408), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3409).

  Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demo flag area (A3410), and saves a signal related to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 1 in the test signal output data area (A3411). Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (A3412), and the initial value (for example, the blinking cycle timer of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blink control timer area. 100 ms) is set (A3413). Subsequently, an initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (A3414), and the special figure 1 variation start process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) in the special figure ordinary process will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. Is what you do.

  The game control apparatus 100 first saves a special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (A3501). Subsequently, a big hit flag 2 setting process for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit is executed (A3502).

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) (A3503). Further, special figure information setting processing for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern, is executed (A3504). Subsequently, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, is prepared (A3505).

  After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game (A3506). Then, the fluctuation start information setting process for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed (A3507). In the variation start information setting process, a variation time value corresponding to the variation pattern (variation pattern number) is acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then, regarding the special figure 2 variation display game, variation commands (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern numbers are prepared as production commands, and production command setting processing is performed.

  Next, the game control device 100 first sets “1” related to the special figure changing process as the process number (A3508), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3509).

  Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demo flag area (A3510), and saves a signal related to the fluctuation start in FIG. 2 in the test signal output data area (A3511). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (A3512), and the initial value (for example, the blinking cycle timer of the special figure 2 display 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blink control timer area. 100 ms) is set (A3513). Subsequently, an initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation symbol number area (A3414), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 1 setting process.

  First, the game control device 100 saves the shift information in the small hit flag area (A3601), and saves the shift information in the big hit flag 1 area (A3602). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1), prepared (A3603), and the special figure big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to zero. (A3604). Note that for the number of holdings 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process for determining whether the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value or not is executed (A3605).

  When the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3605) is a big hit (the result of A3606 is “Y”), the game control device 100 overwrites the big hit information in the area of the big hit flag 1 in which the loss information is saved in step A3602. Save (A3607) and end the big hit flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3605) is not a big hit (the result of A3606 is “N”), whether the prepared big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value or not is a big hit A small hit determination process is executed to determine whether or not (A3608).

When the determination result of the small hit determination process (A3608) is a small hit (the result of A3609 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 displays the small hit information in the small hit flag area where the loss information is saved in step A3601. Overwriting and saving (A3610), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the small hit determination process (A3608) is not a small hit (the result of A3609 is “N”), the big hit flag 1 is set while the information is lost in both the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. End the process. As described above, in this embodiment, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is any one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “out of game”.
[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process. In this process, the same process as that in the big hit flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 20 is performed on the second start-up memory.

  The game control device 100 first saves the shift information in the big hit flag 2 area (A3701). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1), prepared (A3702), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to zero. (A3703). Note that for the number of reservations 1 is an area for storing information (random number or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process for determining whether the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value or not is executed (A3704).

  When the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3704) is a big hit (the result of A3705 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 overwrites the big hit information in the area of the big hit flag 2 in which the loss information is saved in step A3701. Save (A3706) and end the big hit flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3704) is not a big hit (the result of A3705 is “N”), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is either “big hit” or “out of game”.

[Big hit judgment processing]
Next, details of the big hit determination process (A3605, A3704) in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot determination process. The jackpot determination process is a process common to the jackpot determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3004 of the special figure hold information determination process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets a table (upper limit determination value table) of upper limit determination values corresponding to the probability setting values (A3801). The upper limit determination value table determines an upper limit determination value according to the probability setting value for each of the high probability state and the low probability state. Then, a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value is set (A3802), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A3803). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value It is determined that it is a big hit.

  When the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A3803 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets a determination result other than the jackpot (A3808) and ends the jackpot determination process. To do.

  In addition, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A3803 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the jackpot occurrence probability is in a high probability state (probability variation state). (A3804). If it is in a high probability state (the result of A3804 is “Y”), an upper limit determination value with a high probability is set corresponding to the probability setting value using the upper limit determination value table (A3805). On the other hand, when the state is not a high probability state (the result of A3804 is “N”), an upper limit determination value with a low probability is set corresponding to the probability setting value using the upper limit determination value table (A3806).

  When the upper limit determination value of the jackpot random number value is set, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the target jackpot random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value (A3807). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3807 is “Y”), the judgment result is set to a deviation (other than the big hit) (A3808). On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A3807 is “N”), the jackpot is set as the determination result (A3809). When the determination result is set, the big hit determination process is terminated.

[Small hit judgment processing]
Next, details of the small hit determination process (A3608) in the big hit flag 1 setting process will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit determination process. The small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3009 of the special figure hold information determination process.

  The game control device 100 first sets a small hit upper limit determination value corresponding to the probability setting value (A3901). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the big hit random number of the target (Special Figure 1) is less than the lower limit determination value (A3902). Note that “small hit” means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the small hit judgment lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit judgment upper limit that is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. When it is less than or equal to the determination value, it is determined to be a small hit.

  Naturally, the range of the small hit determination value (between the small hit lower limit determination value and the small hit upper limit determination value) is set to the aforementioned big hit determination in order to avoid the result of the same special figure fluctuation display game being a small hit and a big hit. The range of values (between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value) does not overlap. In this embodiment, the small hit random number is not provided independently, and the big hit random number is used for the determination of the small hit. However, a configuration in which an original small hit random number is provided is also possible.

  When the value of the big hit random number of the target (see Fig. 1) is less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A3902 is "Y"), the game control device 100 sets a deviation as the judgment result (A3904), The determination process ends.

  In addition, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (the result of A3902 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines that the big hit random number value of the target (special figure 1) is the small hit upper limit determination value. It is determined whether it is larger (A3903). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (the result of A3903 is “Y”), a deviation is set as the determination result (A3904). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (the result of A3903 is “N”), the big hit is set as the determination result (A3905). When the determination result is set, the small hit determination process ends.

[Big hit probability, Small hit probability]
24A, 24B and 24C show the big hit probability and the small hit probability of the special figure variable display game determined as a result of the above big hit determination process (FIG. 22) and the small hit determination process (FIG. 23). It is a table illustrated with respect to each setting (each setting value).

  The example of FIG. 24A shows a case where the big hit probability and the small hit probability are different for each setting (each set value). The big hit probability (low probability and high probability) and the small hit probability become higher as the set value becomes larger (higher setting), and the larger the set value, the easier the big hit occurs, which is advantageous to the player. The jackpot probability is obtained by dividing the difference between the upper limit judgment value and the lower limit judgment value in FIG. 22 by the range of the jackpot random number value. The jackpot probability can be changed according to the set value by changing the lower limit judgment value or the range of the jackpot random number in accordance with the set value in addition to the upper limit judgment value. In another example, only one of the jackpot probability at the low probability and the jackpot probability at the high probability may be configured to increase as the set value increases. By changing the big hit probability and the small hit probability according to the setting (setting value), the player enjoys estimating the setting (setting value) from the big hit probability and the small hit probability, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In the example of FIG. 24B, the big hit probability and the small hit probability of the settings 1, 2, 3 (setting values 1, 2, 3) and the settings 4, 5, 6 (setting values 4, 5, 6) are the same. Is set. In the settings 1 to 3 or the settings 4 to 6, the big hit probability and the small hit probability increase as the set value becomes larger (higher setting). In the example of FIG. 24 (B), it is more difficult for the player to estimate the setting (setting value) from the big hit probability and the small hit probability than in the case of FIG. 24 (A), and the player can be prevented from getting bored.

  In the example of FIG. 24C, regardless of the setting (set value), the big hit probability (low probability and high probability) and the small hit probability are the same. In this case, the player estimates the setting (setting value) from other setting determining elements.

  Other setting determination factors include probability change rush rate (described later), number of continuation of public power support after jackpot end (described later), number of continuation of probability change state in ST machine, number of jackpot rounds (round number upper limit value), special There are fluctuation patterns (fluctuation time values) of the figure fluctuation display game, various times (stop display time, fanfare time, etc.) set in the special figure game processing. If the probability that the predetermined contents of these setting determination elements are selected differs for each setting value, the player can estimate the setting value from these setting determination elements.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3403) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (A4001). If the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (the result of A4001 is “Y”), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) ) Is loaded with the jackpot symbol random number (A4002). Next, a special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (A4003).

  Subsequently, a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (A4004). By this processing, the type of special result (type of jackpot) is selected.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets a special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table (A4005), acquires a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4006). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special symbol 1 indicator 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (A4007).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 acquires time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number and saves it in the time reduction determination data area (A4008). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence / absence of the normal power support state (short time state) after the end of the big hit state.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (A4009). And the game control apparatus 100 prepares the decoration special figure 1 command corresponding to a stop symbol pattern (A4018).

  The effect mode transition information is information for shifting the effect mode. The effect mode transition information here is set in the case of jackpot (the result of A4001 is “Y”) and used in the jackpot end process. In other words, the presentation mode can be shifted with the big hit as a trigger based on the presentation mode transition information. Also, as described above, the effect mode transition information is set according to the big hit stop symbol pattern (whether it is a probable big hit symbol / normal big hit symbol, etc.), so the big hit ends with the type of big hit symbol (type of big hit) The transition destination of the production mode to be changed later is changed. In addition, since the production mode transition information is set according to the probability state as described above, the transition destination of the production mode is also affected by whether or not the special figure high probability state (probability variation state) is currently being performed.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not big hit (the result of A4001 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the small hit flag is a small hit (A4010), and when the big hit flag is a small hit (result of A4011) Is “Y”), a small hit symbol random number is loaded from the special symbol small bonus symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) (A4011). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (A4012), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (A4013).

  After that, the game control apparatus 100 acquires a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4014), and saves effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4015). The effect mode transition information here is set in the case of a small hit (the result of A4010 is “Y”), and the effect mode can be shifted in response to the small hit. Then, a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (A4018).

  If the small hit flag is not a small hit (the result of A4010 is “N”), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (A4016), and the stop symbol pattern is stopped as a stop symbol pattern. Save in the area (A4017), and prepare a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (A4018). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (A4019), and the effect command setting process is executed (A4020). This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (A4021), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (A4022), and the special figure one little hit The symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (A4023), and the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A3503) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (A4101), and if it is a big hit (the result of A4101 is “Y”), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) ) Is loaded with the jackpot symbol random number (A4102). Next, a special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (A4103). Subsequently, a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (A4104). By this processing, the type of special result (type of jackpot) is selected.

  After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table (A4105), acquires the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4106). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on a special symbol display (here, special symbol 2 indicator 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (A4107).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 acquires time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number and saves it in the time reduction determination data area (A4108). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence / absence of the normal power support state (short time state) after the end of the big hit state.

  After that, the game control device 100 saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (A4109). The effect mode transition information here is set in the case of jackpot (the result of A4101 is “Y”) and is used in the jackpot end process. And the game control apparatus 100 prepares the decoration special figure 2 command corresponding to a stop symbol pattern (A4112).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not big hit (the result of A4101 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of loss in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (A4110), and the loss stop symbol pattern. Is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4111), and a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (A4112). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the special decoration figure command is saved in the special decoration figure command area (A4113), and the effect command setting process is executed (A4114). This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (A4115), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (A4116). The setting process ends.

[Example of special figure big hit symbol distribution]
FIG. 27 is a table illustrating the jackpot symbol distribution (breakdown breakdown) of the special figure variation display game controlled by the special figure game process described above for each setting.

  FIG. 27 illustrates, for each setting, a jackpot symbol table that defines jackpot symbol numbers 1 to 6 (stop symbol numbers) indicating types of jackpots and the distribution ratio thereof. As shown in FIG. 27, the distribution ratio of the jackpot symbol number (type of jackpot, symbols 1 to 6) can be changed according to the setting (set value), and the probability variation entry rate increases as the set value increases. It will be advantageous. The probability variation entry rate is the ratio of the probability variation jackpot symbol with a high probability that the probability state after the jackpot end occupies all symbols. In addition, the number of times of power transmission support after the end of the jackpot is larger as the set value becomes larger in the settings 1 to 3 or the settings 4 to 6 especially for the normal jackpot (the probability state after the end of the jackpot becomes low probability). growing. The number of times of normal power support for the settings 1, 2, 3 (setting values 1, 2, 3) and the settings 4, 5, 6 (setting values 4, 5, 6) is set to the same. Note that the ST machine can be configured to increase the number of times the probability variation state continues as the set value increases.

  Also, in FIG. 27, the number of rounds (round number upper limit value, for example, 2R, 6R, 16R) given per jackpot does not change with respect to the set value, but the round number is increased as the set value is increased. A simple configuration is also possible. In FIG. 27, it is easier to give a larger number of rounds to the big win of the special figure 2 variable display game than the big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game. The player is more advantageous than the one-variable display game.

  Note that, similarly to FIG. 24C, a configuration in which the big hit symbol distribution (big hit breakdown) is the same regardless of the setting (set value).

[Special figure changing process]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (A2609) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure changing process.

  First, the game control device 100 prepares a symbol stop command (a special symbol 1 symbol stop command or a special symbol 2 symbol stop command) corresponding to the symbol being changed as an effect command (A4701), and executes an effect command setting process. (A4702). The changing symbol can be discriminated from the changing symbol discriminating flag (the special symbol 1 fluctuation flag or the special symbol 2 fluctuation flag). Upon receiving the symbol stop command, the effect control device 300 stops the corresponding decoration special figure fluctuation display game (decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game or decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets a display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number indicating the stop symbol pattern (A4703), and saves the set display time in the special-figure game processing timer area (A4704). In the case of the present embodiment, 600 msec is commonly set as the display time when the stop symbol pattern is an off symbol pattern, a big hit symbol pattern, or a small hit symbol pattern.

  Next, the game control device 100 sets a process number “2” related to the special figure display process (A4705), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A4706).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the signal related to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 1 in the test signal output data area (A4707), and further saves the signal related to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 2 in the test signal output data area (A4707). A4708).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a control timer initial value (for example, 256 msec) in a symbol determination frequency signal control timer area used when outputting a symbol determination frequency signal related to the number of executions of the special symbol variable display game to the external information terminal. Is saved (A4709).

  After that, the game control device 100 sets a stop flag related to the variable stop on the special figure 1 display 51 as the special figure 1 variable display game control information on the special figure 1 display 51. (A4710). Further, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52, a stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (A4711). Then, the special figure changing process transition setting process is terminated.

[Design variation control processing]
FIG. 29 shows a symbol variation control process (A2620, A2622) in the above-described special-figure game process, and a symbol variation control process in a later-described general game process. The symbol variation control process includes the variation control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, etc.) and the normal symbol (ordinary symbol) of the variable display game in the variable display unit of the collective display device 50, the special symbol and the normal symbol. This is a process for setting the display data of symbols.

  The game control device 100 first checks whether the variation control flag relating to the control target symbol (for example, any of the first special diagram, the second special diagram, and the normal diagram) is changing (A7501). In the case of this embodiment, on the variation control table prepared in step A2619, step A2621, and step A7614, the lower address of the variation control flag area, the initial value of the blinking control timer, the variation symbol number upper limit determination value, the display table 2 ( A stop address and a display table 1 (variation) address are defined.

  The game control device 100 acquires a symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled (A7503) when the changing flag relating to the symbol to be controlled is changing (the result of A7502 is “Y”). ). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for variation, display table 1) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A2619, step A2621, and step A7614.

  Next, the game control device 100 updates the blinking control timer to be controlled by −1 (A7504), determines whether the updated blinking control timer is 0 (A7505), and the updated blinking control timer is updated. If it is not 0 (the result of A7505 is “N”), display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (A7508). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

  If the flashing control timer after the update is 0 (the result of A7505 is “Y”), the flashing control timer initial value corresponding to the target flashing timer area is saved (A7506), and the variable symbol number of the control target is changed. Is updated by +1 in the corresponding range (A7507), and display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (A7508). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, the game control device 100 acquires a symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled when the changing flag relating to the symbol to be controlled is not changing (the result of A7502 is “N”). (A7509). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for stoppage, display table 2) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A2619, step A2621, and step A7614. Next, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (A7510), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

  The blinking control timer initial value saved in step A7506 is saved as a value defined in the variation control table prepared according to the game to be processed. Here, a value corresponding to 100 msec is defined as the initial value of the blinking control timer. This initial value of the blinking control timer is an interval at which the lighting pattern is updated during the fluctuation time in the collective display device 50.

  Further, the corresponding range in step A7507 is defined by the variation symbol number upper limit determination value defined in the variation control table prepared in accordance with the game to be processed. When the fluctuation symbol number upper limit value is reached by updating the fluctuation symbol number by +1 in step A7507, the fluctuation symbol number is set to 0, and the fluctuation symbol number is set to 0 (fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value-1). ) Is sequentially updated in the range of In steps A7508 and A7511, the display data (lighting pattern) corresponding to the variable symbol number is acquired and displayed, and the lighting pattern is updated (changed) a number of times equal to the variable symbol number upper limit determination value. As a result of this, a round of display is repeated.

  Thus, by defining the flashing control timer initial value and the fluctuation symbol number upper limit value in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed, the interval and display for updating the lighting pattern in the batch display device 50 are completed. The number of updates to be performed can be set for each game.

[Normal game processing]
Next, the details of the usual game process (A1313) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the usual game process. In the usual game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the whole process related to the usual figure change display game is controlled, and the display of the usual figure is set.

  First, the game control device 100 executes a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a (A7601). Details of the gate switch monitoring process will be described later.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a general power prize switch monitoring process for monitoring an input from the start port 2 switch 37a (A7602).

  Next, if the usual game process timer is not 0, the game control apparatus 100 updates -1 (subtracts 1) (A7603). Note that the minimum value of the normal game processing timer is set to zero. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the normal game process timer has become 0 (A7604).

  When the value of the usual game process timer is 0 (the result of A7604 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the game control apparatus 100 sets the ordinary game process number. A general game sequence branch table to be referred to branch to the corresponding process is set in the register (A7605).

  Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the usual game process number based on the set ordinary game sequence branch table (A7606). Then, a subroutine call based on the usual game process number is performed to execute a game branching process corresponding to the usual game process number (A7607).

  When the game process number is “0” in step A7607, the game control apparatus 100 monitors the start of change of the normal map display game, sets the start of change of the base map display game, sets the effect, The usual figure usual process which performs the setting etc. of information required in order to perform the process during a usual figure change is performed (A7608). Details of the routine processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, when the game process number is “1” in step A7607, the game control apparatus 100 executes a process for changing the normal map for setting information necessary for performing the process for displaying the normal map ( A7609). For example, in the process of changing the normal map, in order to shift to the process of displaying the normal map, “2” is set as the game process number and saved in the normal game process number area, and the normal map display time is set to the normal game display time. Save in the processing timer area.

  In addition, when the game process number is “2” in step A7607, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the current state of the time-variable display game is successful or not. The processing for displaying a normal map for setting the opening time, setting of information necessary for performing the processing for the normal map, etc. is executed (A7610). For example, in the process for displaying a normal map, when the result of the normal map change display game is a win, in order to shift to the process for the normal map, the game process number is set to “3” and the normal game process number area On the other hand, if the game is off, “0” is set as the game process number to save in the normal game process number area in order to shift to the normal process.

  In addition, when the game process number is “3” in step A7607, the game control apparatus 100 sets the information necessary to continue the process during the normal drawing or to perform the remaining electric ball process. The middle processing is executed per figure (A7611). For example, in the process during the normal game, after setting for opening the normal variation winning device 37 a predetermined number of times, “4” is set as the game process number in order to shift to the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process. Save in the normal game process number area.

  In addition, when the game process number is “4” in step A7607, the game control apparatus 100 executes the general electric ball remaining ball process for setting information necessary for performing the end process for the normal map (A7612). ). For example, in the baseball remaining ball processing, in order to shift to the baseball end processing, the game processing number is set to “5” and saved in the base game processing number area, and the base ending time is set to the base game. Save in the processing timer area.

  In addition, when the game process number is “5” in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes a normal figure end process for setting information necessary for performing the normal figure normal process (A7608). (A7613). For example, in the normal game end process, “0” is set as the game process number and saved in the normal game process number area in order to shift to the normal process.

  After that, the game control device 100 prepares a normal figure fluctuation control table for controlling fluctuations of the normal symbol by the normal figure indicator 53 (A7614). Thereafter, the symbol variation control process related to the control of the variation of the normal symbol by the ordinary symbol display 53 is executed (A7615), and the ordinary symbol game process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the normal game process timer is not 0 (the result of A7604 is “N”), that is, when the time is not up, the game control apparatus 100 executes the processes after step A7614.

[Gate switch monitoring processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate switch monitoring process. The gate switch monitoring process is executed at step A7601 in the usual game process shown in FIG.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (A7701). If there is an input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the game state is a right-handed game (A7702). The game state to be hit to the right is a big hit state, a small hit state, and a short time state (general power support state). When the game state is a right-handed game (the result of A7702 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A7705. If the game state is not right-handed (the result of A7702 is “N”), a left-handed instruction notification command (left-handed instruction command) is prepared as an effect command (A7703), and an effect command setting process is executed (A7704). Receiving the left-handed instruction notification command, the effect control device 300 performs a notification (warning) for instructing left-handed using the display device 41 or the like.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 obtains the number of reserved drawings and determines whether or not the number of reserved drawings is less than an upper limit value (for example, 4) (A7705). The game control apparatus 100, when the number of pending reservations is less than the upper limit (the result of A7705 is “Y”), updates the number of reserved drawings by +1 (A7706), and corresponds to the updated number of pending orders The address of the random number storage area per hit is calculated (A7707). The winning random number is extracted and saved in the winning random number storage area of the RWM (A7708), the winning symbol random number is extracted and saved in the winning symbol random number storage area (A7709), and the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when there is no input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is “N”), or the game control apparatus 100 determines that the number of reserved drawings is not less than the upper limit value (the result of A7705 is “ N "), the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, the details of the usual figure routine process (A7608) in the usual figure game process will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the routine of routine processing.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of reserved drawings is 0 (A7901). If the number of reserved symbols is not 0 (the result of A7901 is “N”), a random number is loaded from the random number storage area per RWM (for the number of reserved numbers 1), and the random number storage area per RWM A random number random number is loaded from (for holding number 1), and the random number storage area for each normal symbol (for holding number 1) and the symbol random number storing area for each symbol (for holding number 1) are cleared to 0 after loading (A7902). ). Furthermore, whether or not the probability of a hit result in the normal map display game is higher than normal (high probability state), that is, whether or not it is in a short time state (normal power support state) Is determined (A7903). The probability per ordinary figure during the high probability is 250/251, and the probability per ordinary figure during the low probability is 0/251.

  The game control apparatus 100 sets a low probability lower limit determination value (here, 251), which is a lower limit determination value in the normal figure low probability, when the normal probability is not high (the result of A7903 is “N”) (A7904). If the normal probability is high (the result of A7903 is “Y”), the high probability lower limit determination value (here, 1) that is the lower limit determination value in the normal probability is set (A7905), and step A7906 Transition to processing.

  The game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (251 in this case) (A7906). Note that the upper limit judgment value here is common between the high probability of ordinary figures and the low probability of ordinary figures. If the winning random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit determination value (the result of A7906 is “Y”), that is, if it is out of place, the process proceeds to step A7908. If the winning random number is less than the upper limit determination value (the result of A7906 is “N”), it is determined whether the winning random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A7907).

  When the winning random number is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A7907 is “Y”), that is, in the case of a loss, the game control apparatus 100 saves the shift information in the hit flag area (A7908). Further, the stop symbol number is set as the normal symbol stop symbol number (A7909), the off symbol information is saved in the general symbol stop symbol information area (A7910), and the process proceeds to step A7914.

  When the winning random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A7907 is “N”), that is, in the case of winning, the game control device 100 saves the winning flag area and saves the information (A7911). A corresponding hit stop symbol number is set (A7912), hit stop symbol information corresponding to the hit stop symbol number is saved in the normal stop symbol information area (A7913), and the process proceeds to step A7914. There may be several types of hit stop symbols, and there are two in the present embodiment.

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the general symbol stop symbol region (A7914), saves the stop symbol number in the test signal output data region (A7915), and shifts the random number storage region per universal symbol. (A7916) After clearing the vacant area after the shift to 0 (A7917), the number of reserved drawings is updated by -1 (A7918).

  That is, with the execution of the usual figure change display game relating to the oldest number of reserved maps 1, the ranks of the numbers 2 to 4 of the reserved drawings that are on hold after the number 1 of reserved maps are incremented one by one. As a result of this processing, the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area from 2 to 4 is shifted from the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area to 1 for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area. Will be. Then, the value for the usual figure reservation number 4 in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is cleared, and the usual figure reservation number is decremented by one.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 extracts the variation pattern random number 3 (A7919), sets the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3, and saves it in the usual game process timer area (A7920). For example, the variation time is distributed to 500 msec with probability 200/256, 1500 msec with probability 40/256, and 3000 msec with probability 16/256. Then, the process for setting the transition to the normal process is executed (A7921), and the normal process is terminated. For example, in the routine change process transition setting process, “1” is set as the process number for transitioning to the routine change process, and the process number is saved in the routine game process number area. Then, the flashing control timer initial value (for example, 100 msec), which is the initial value of the flashing cycle timer of the normal display, is saved in the normal flashing control timer area, and the initial value (0 in this case) is stored in the general graphic variation symbol number area. Save.

  In addition, when the number of pending drawings is 0 (the result of A7901 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 sets “0” as the processing number for shifting to the usual drawing processing (A7922). The process number is saved in the usual game process number area (A7923). Thereafter, the flag for fraud monitoring period is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (A7924), and the normal processing is terminated.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (A1317) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the procedure of external information editing processing. FIG. 33A shows the first half of the external information editing process, and FIG. 33B shows the second half of the external information editing process. In the external information editing process, based on the monitoring results of the payout command transmission process (A1311), the winning switch / status monitoring process (A1307), the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1315), and the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1316), Processing to create information to be output to an external device such as a collection terminal or a game hall internal management device, or a test firing test device, and set it in an output buffer is performed.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether or not a glass frame opening error is occurring (A9501). If a glass frame opening error is not occurring (the result of A9501 is “N”), it is determined whether or not a body frame opening error (front frame opening error) is occurring (A9502). When the body frame opening error is not occurring (result of A9502 is “N”), the door / frame opening signal OFF data is saved in the external information output data area (A9503), and the security signal OFF data is stored in the external information output data. Save in the area (A9504).

  When the glass frame opening error is occurring (result of A9501 is “Y”), or the body frame opening error is occurring (result of A9502 is “Y”), The ON data of the frame release signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9505), and the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9506).

  After steps A9504 and A9506, the game control apparatus 100 updates −1 if the security signal control timer is not 0 (A9507), and determines whether or not the security signal control timer is 0 (whether the time is up). Judgment is made (A9508). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set to a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by the operation of the initialization switch (setting value change switch 102) or when the setting change ends. (A1044 and A2419 of the main process). The security signal control timer is timed from the initialization of the RAM or the end of the setting change. The initial value of the security signal control timer is set when the setting key switch 93 or the setting value change switch 102 is operated to enter a setting variable state (setting change mode) or a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) ( In the main processing A1037, A2507), during a setting change state in which the probability setting value changing flag is set (in the setting variable state) or in a setting confirmation state in which the probability setting value checking mode flag is set, the security signal is You may make it output continuously. Note that when the probability setting value changed flag is set (A2414), not when the probability setting value changing flag is cleared (A2418), the security signal control timer is set to 0 and the security signal is output. A configuration that terminates is also possible.

  When the security signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A9508 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 saves the security data ON data in the external information output data area (A9509), and proceeds to the process of step A9510. That is, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information.

  When the security signal control timer is 0 (the result of A9508 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not a magnet fraud is occurring (A9510). In addition, when a magnet fraud occurrence flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area, it can be determined that a magnet fraud is occurring. If the magnet fraud is not occurring (the result of A9510 is “N”), it is further determined whether or not the panel radio wave fraud is occurring (A9511). If the board radio fraud flag is saved in the board radio fraud flag area, it can be determined that the board radio fraud is occurring.

  If the board radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A9511 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 further determines whether or not the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (A9512). If the frame radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A9512 is “N”), it is further determined whether or not the ordinary power fraud is occurring (A9513). When the power transmission fraud is not occurring (the result of A9513 is “N”), it is further determined whether or not the big prize winning fraud is occurring (A9514). It should be noted that if the illegal prize occurrence flag regarding the big prize opening is saved in the illegal flag area by the illegal & winning prize monitoring process, it can be determined that the big prize opening fraud is occurring. If the winning prize fraud is not occurring (the result of A9514 is “N”), it is determined whether a switch abnormality error is occurring (A9515).

  When a switch abnormality error such as disconnection of a switch connector (the switch abnormality 1 error described above) is occurring (the result of A9515 is “N”), the gaming control device 100 uses the off data of the gaming machine error state signal as a test signal. Save in the output data area (A9516). If a switch abnormality error is occurring (the result of A9515 is “Y”), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9518).

  On the other hand, in the game control device 100, when the fraud of the magnet is occurring (result of A9510 is “Y”), when the fraud of the board is occurring (result of A9511 is “Y”), the fraud of the frame is generated. Is in the middle (the result of A9512 is “Y”), the power transmission fraud is occurring (the result of A9513 is “Y”), or the prize winning fraud is occurring (the result of A9514 is “ Y "), the security data ON data is saved in the external information output data area (A9517), and the gaming machine error status signal ON data is saved in the test signal output data area (A9518). The security signal is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer) by setting the security signal on data.

  After steps A9516 and A9518, the game control apparatus 100 executes main prize ball signal editing processing for setting information related to the number of prize balls to be paid out (A9519). Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 executes a start port signal editing process for editing the start port winning signal (A9520).

  Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variable display game is not 0 (A9521). Note that the minimum value of the symbol determination number control timer is set to zero.

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the symbol determination number control timer is 0 (A9522). When the value of the symbol determination count control timer is 0 (the result of A9522 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination count signal is output as external information output data. The area is saved (A9523), and the external information editing process is terminated.

  In addition, when the value of the symbol determination count control timer is not 0 (the result of A9522 is “N”), that is, when the time has not expired, the game control device 100 sends the on data of the symbol determination count signal to the external information. The data is saved in the output data area (A9524), and the external information editing process is terminated.

[Display of the batch display device whose settings are being changed]
FIG. 34 shows the display of each display unit of the collective display device 50 during the probability setting change (in the setting variable state in which the setting can be changed), that is, each light emitting unit (LED lamps D1-D18) of the collective display device 50. It is a figure explaining the light emission mode (mode of lighting / extinguishing).

  During the probability setting change, the game control device 100 displays a predetermined display for the special display variation display game of the collective display device 50 regardless of the state of the gaming machine 10 (such as a game state) at the time of power-off before power-on. Are displayed on the display units 51 and 52. For example, even if the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed when the power is turned off before the power is turned on, the game control device 100 displays a predetermined display at once during the probability setting change regardless of the state when the power of the collective display device 50 is turned off. It can be displayed on the display units 51 and 52 of the display device 50. Accordingly, during the probability setting change (setting variable state), the probability setting is being changed by the predetermined display on the display units 51 and 52 for the special figure variable display game that is easily visible from the front of the gaming machine 10, It can be suggested that the gaming machine 10 is in a state where a game (for example, a variable display game) is not possible.

  In FIG. 34A, when the probability setting is being changed (in the setting variable state), the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (7-segment type LED lamp D1) for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game of the collective display device 50 has a predetermined value. The probability setting value (here, 6) is displayed as the display. Thus, during the probability setting change, the game machine 10 cannot play a game (for example, a variable display game) by performing a different display (a display different from normal) on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 when the fluctuation is stopped. It can be clearly shown on the front of the gaming machine 10. It should be noted that the numbers 1 to 6 indicating the probability setting values are not used in the stop display when the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52 are stopped.

  For example, the game control apparatus 100 determines the third output port 135 and the third output port based on the probability setting value display data (A2409) corresponding to the work probability setting value and the probability setting value display data (A2413) corresponding to the probability setting value. The output data may be output to the 4-output port 136, and the work probability setting value and the probability setting value may be lit or blinked on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (LED lamp D1) (output processing A1603- A1608).

  Note that the probability setting value may be lit or blinked on the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52 (7-segment type LED lamp D2) for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game of the collective display device 50. In addition, the probability setting value may be lit or blinked using both the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52.

  Further, even if the person who does not have the authority to change the setting makes it difficult to visually recognize the probability setting value at a location away from the gaming machine 10, the probability setting value may be lit or blinked with a lower brightness than normal. Good.

  In FIG. 34B, during the probability setting change, the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (LED lamp D1) displays a changing information indicating that the probability setting is being changed (in the setting variable state) as a predetermined display. (For example, the letter “P”) is displayed. In this way, during the probability setting change, by performing a different display (a display different from the normal display) on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 when the fluctuation is stopped, it is determined that the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which a game cannot be performed. It can be clearly shown in front of 10. In addition, the same identification information (special symbol) as the information display during change (for example, the letter “P”) is not used in the stop display at the time of the change stop of the first special figure fluctuation display part 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display part 52. Shall.

  For example, when it is determined that the probability setting is being changed (the result of A2401 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 outputs data related to the changing information display on the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136. May be executed (a processing step is added to FIG. 10), and the information being changed may be lit or blinked on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (A1603-A1608 of the output process). Further, for example, when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is in the open state and the setting key switch 93 is on (result of A1024 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the probability setting value changing flag. Occasionally (A1038), output data is output to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136, and a changing information display is lit or blinked on the first special figure fluctuation display section 51 (LED lamp D1). May be.

  The changing information display may be lit or blinked on the second special figure fluctuation display section 52 (7-segment type LED lamp D2) for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game of the collective display device 50. Further, the information display during change may be lit or blinked by using both the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52.

  In FIG. 34C, during the probability setting change, the same display as the stop result (outage result) of the variable display game other than the special result (other than the big hit) is displayed as the predetermined display on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51. . In the present embodiment, the outlier result (outlier symbol) is a display in which the central segment of the first special figure fluctuation display section 51 (7-segment type LED lamp D1) is lit. Thus, during the probability setting change, by performing a predetermined display on the first special figure variation display unit 51, it can be suggested on the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is not executing a game. In addition, the RAM area is cleared to 0 at the end of the setting change (A2418), but the initial result of the data to be displayed on the first special figure variation display unit 51 is displayed by displaying the outlier result (outlier symbol) while the probability setting is changing. The value setting (A2419) may be unnecessary.

  For example, when it is determined that the probability setting is being changed (the result of A2401 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 indicates that the result of the disconnection to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 (displacement symbol). A process for generating output data related to the display is executed (a processing step is added to FIG. 10), and the display of the result of the error may be lit on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (A1603-A1608 of the output process). . Further, for example, when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is in the open state and the setting key switch 93 is on (result of A1024 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the probability setting value changing flag. Occasionally (A1038), output data may be output to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136, and the display of the error result may be lit on the first special figure fluctuation display section 51 (LED lamp D1). .

  It should be noted that the display of the dissociation result may be lit on the second special figure fluctuation display portion 52 (LED lamp D2) for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game of the collective display device 50. Further, the display of the result of the deviation may be lit using both the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52.

  In FIG. 34D, during the probability setting change, a turn-off display is displayed as a predetermined display on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 (LED lamp D1). In this way, during the probability setting change, by performing a different display (a display different from the normal display) on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 when the fluctuation is stopped, it is determined that the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which a game cannot be performed. It can be clearly shown in front of 10. In addition, in the stop display at the time of the change stop of the 1st special figure fluctuation display part 51 and the 2nd special figure fluctuation display part 52, a light extinction display shall not be used.

  For example, the game control device 100 performs the first special function to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 until the probability setting value has been changed after power-on (power restoration) (the result of A2406 is “Y”). The output data for the figure fluctuation display unit 51 may not be generated, and the light-off display may be displayed on the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51.

  It should be noted that the special display 2 variation display section 52 (7-segment type LED lamp D2) for the special map 2 variation display game of the collective display device 50 may be turned off. Further, both the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52 may be displayed in the off state.

  In FIG. 34A to FIG. 34D described above, the LED lamps (for example, LED lamps D3 to D18) other than the display units 51 and 52 (D1 and D2) for the special figure change display game are turned off during the probability setting change. Alternatively, the animation may be displayed by turning it on cyclically.

  In FIG. 34E and FIG. 34F, during the probability setting change, all the display units (that is, all the light emitting units: LED lamps D1-D18) of the collective display device 50 are turned on or blinked to obtain a predetermined display. All lighting display or all blinking display is displayed on the collective display device 50. In this way, during the probability setting change, it is possible to indicate that the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which a game cannot be performed by performing a different display (a display different from normal) on the collective display device 50 when the fluctuation is stopped. It can be specified.

  34F is executed by repeating the all-off display and all-on display of the batch display device 50 at predetermined time intervals.

  For example, when it is determined that the probability setting is being changed (the result of A2401 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 displays all the lights on the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136 or all blinks. The process for generating the output data related to the above may be executed to display all lighting display or all blinking display on the batch display device 50 (A1603-A1608 of output processing). Further, for example, when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is in the open state and the setting key switch 93 is on (result of A1024 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the probability setting value changing flag. Occasionally (A1038), the output data may be output to the third output port 135 and the fourth output port 136, and all lighting display or all blinking display may be displayed on the collective display device 50 (LED lamps D1-D18). .

  FIG. 34G shows another configuration example of the collective display device 50 of FIGS. 34A to 34F. In FIG. 34G, a performance display regarding the performance (spec) of the gaming machine 10 is displayed around the LED lamps D1-D18 of the collective display device 50. Although the performance display is printed, it may be displayed by light emission such as an LED lamp or a liquid crystal display. As performance display, display of a big hit probability at low probability in setting 1 (minimum setting) and setting 6 (maximum setting) 85a "1/300 and 1/200", display of winning ball number 85b "3 & 2 & 10 & 14", round number upper limit A value display 85c "2, 6, 16", a model (formal name) display 85d "CRxxxx", and a display 85e (in this case, "no limit") indicating whether there is a limit on the probability variation big hit are displayed.

  In the display of the number of winning balls 85b, the number of winning balls of the start winning port 36, the normal variation winning device 37, the general winning port 35, and the special variable winning device 39 are sequentially displayed. The limit on the probable big hit means that the number of consecutive probable big hits is limited to the predetermined limit number (one big hit can generate a big hit for the predetermined limit number of times) Become).

  In addition, since the display 85a of the big hit probability at the time of the low probability is displayed only for the setting 1 (minimum setting) and the setting 6 (maximum setting), it can be displayed so as to fit in the empty area around the collective display device 50. It should be noted that the big hit probability display 85a at low probability is displayed only for setting 3 (intermediate setting), or the big hit probability display 85a at low probability is set to 1 (minimum setting) and 6 (highest setting). Only one of them (one of the lowest value 1/300 and the highest value 1/200) may be displayed, or the range of the big hit probability at the time of low probability (1/300 to 1/200) may be displayed.

  Among the big hit probabilities at the low probability, those that cannot be displayed around the LED lamps D1-D18 of the collective display device 50 (big hit probabilities of settings 2, 4, 5, etc.) are collectively shown outside the game area 32. You may display in the empty area of a member different from the display apparatus 50. FIG. In addition, what is displayed on the collective display device 50 may be displayed in duplicate on this separate member. For example, the jackpot probability at the low probability for the settings 2, 4, 5, etc. is displayed on the upper right, lower left and upper left empty areas of the game board of FIG. 2A, the members (guide rails 31) that divide the game area 32, etc. May be. Or you may display the big hit probability at the time of the low probability with respect to setting 2, 4, 5 etc. in the empty area | region (for example, the surface of the general winning opening 35 of the lower left) in a game area. In addition, the display 85e indicating whether or not there is a limit related to the probable big hit is displayed as “with limit” only when there is a limit, and nothing may be displayed when there is no limit. As described above, the items displayed as the performance display around the LED lamps D1-D18 of the collective display device 50 can be appropriately changed. For example, some or all of the items displayed as performance display, such as displaying the upper limit number of rounds at the time of big hits 85c on another area or the display device 41, may be displayed on the collective display device 50 as necessary, It does not have to be displayed.

  Further, the effect control device 300 may display the jackpot probability at the low probability for the settings 2, 4, 5, etc. on the display device 41 during the setting change, during the setting confirmation, and / or during the customer waiting. . The effect control device 300 may store a jackpot probability at a low probability in a memory (program ROM 321 or the like) in advance. In addition, what was displayed on the collective display device 50 may be displayed on the display device 41 in an overlapping manner. The switching of the display of the jackpot probability of each setting may be executed by operating the operation unit such as the effect button 25 or the cross key.

  FIGS. 35 (A) and 35 (B) show a predetermined display on the first special figure fluctuation display section 51 or the second special figure fluctuation display section 52 of the collective display device 50 during the probability setting change (here, the probability setting value 6). In the case of displaying, a configuration in which it is difficult to visually recognize a predetermined display from an oblique direction other than the front of the gaming machine 10 is shown. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a person who is not authorized to change the setting from viewing the predetermined display (particularly the probability setting value) from an oblique direction of the gaming machine 10 during the probability setting change.

  In FIG. 35 (A), two hollow parts 51a and 51b (concave part) are provided in the front of the collective display device 50, and the first special figure variation display part 51 or the second special figure are respectively provided in the hollow parts 51a and 51b. A fluctuation display unit 52 is arranged. In FIG. 35 (B), an annular wall 50 a (convex portion) surrounding the first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52 is provided on the front surface of the collective display device 50. Thereby, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the display of the first special figure fluctuation display part 51 or the second special figure fluctuation display part 52 from an oblique direction.

[Control of production control device]
Below, the control (process) which the production | presentation control apparatus 300 performs with the program for production control is demonstrated.

[Main processing (production control device)]
First, details of the main process executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a procedure of main processing (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. The main process is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (production microcomputer) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. In the flowchart of the process executed by the effect control device 300, the step code (number) is represented as “B ***”.

  When the execution of the main process is started, the effect control device 300 first prohibits interruption (B0001). Next, the CPU 311 and VDP 312 are initialized (B0002, B0003), and an interrupt is permitted (B0004). When the interrupt is permitted, a command reception interrupt process for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100 is enabled.

  Next, the production control device 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 and the like (B0005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

  Subsequently, the effect control device 300 clears WDT (watchdog timer) (B0008). The WDT is activated with the above-described CPU initial setting (B0002), and monitors whether the CPU 311 is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared even after a certain period, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

  Thereafter, the effect control device 300 executes an RTC read process for reading time information from an RTC (real time clock) 338 as a time measuring means (B0009).

  The RTC read process may be configured to read time information from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle (for example, every minute), and it is not necessary to read time information every time the process shifts to Step B0009. Further, the RTC read process may be executed only once when the power to the effect control device 300 is turned on (that is, the power to the gaming machine 10 is turned on) (the position of the RTC read process is changed, for example, step B0003). And B0004). The production control device 300 sets a time timer (clocking means) for measuring time in a timer area in the RAM, and reads the time information from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle or only once from the RTC 338 when the power is turned on. When the information is read, the time timer may be adjusted to match the time of the RTC 338. And the production | presentation control apparatus 300 may replace with RTC338, and may perform various processes using the timer for time. In this way, the number of times of reading the time from the RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on the CPU 311 is reduced.

  In the RTC reading process, when the read time matches any of a plurality of predetermined times (first predetermined time, second predetermined time,...), A predetermined effect may be executed. The player can estimate the set value from this time interval by drawing the time interval of the predetermined time with a probability corresponding to the set value. For example, the selection rate for a long time interval may be drawn in such a way that it becomes smaller as the set value is larger. In addition, the player can estimate the set value from the execution period of the predetermined effect by drawing the execution period for executing the predetermined effect with a probability corresponding to the set value. For example, the selection rate for the long execution period may be drawn in such a way that the selection value increases as the set value increases.

  Next, the effect control device 300 detects an operation signal of the effect button 25 (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b) by the player, or changes the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal. The effect button input process is executed (B0010). Subsequently, hall / player setting mode processing for receiving operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal by the person in charge at the game hall (game shop) or the player is executed (B0011). In the hall / player setting mode process, the player can customize the production according to the production points described later.

  Next, the effect control device 300 executes effect point control processing for adding or clearing effect points (B0012). In the production point control process, the production point is added by performing the production and operation to be added to the production point, and at the end of the game so that the production point can be carried over to the next game, etc. For example, information including information on performance points is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display a QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall / player setting mode process. In addition, the player can estimate the set value from the added value by drawing a value (added value) to be added to the effect point with a probability corresponding to the set value. For example, a lottery may be performed so that the selection rate of a large added value increases as the set value increases.

  Next, the effect control device 300 executes a random number update process for updating a random number such as an effect random number (B0013), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes a corresponding received command check process. (B0014). Details of the received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the effect control device 300 updates various data in accordance with the content displayed on the display device (display means) such as the display device 41, or sets the drawing displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. The effect display editing process is executed (B0015). The drawing data set at this time can update the image of the display device 41 without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete the drawing within a frame period of 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 msec). Then, the drawing command preparation completion setting is executed by completing the drawing preparation to the display frame buffer (B0016).

  Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether it is a frame switching timing (B0017). If it is not the frame switching timing (the result of B0017 is “N”), the process of B0017 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached, and if it is the frame switching timing (the result of B0017 is “Y”), the display to the display device 41 is performed. The screen drawing is instructed (B0018). Since the frame period of the present embodiment is 1/30 second, for example, when a periodic V blank (image update) every 1/60 seconds (1/2 of the frame period) is executed twice, the frame is switched. . The interval may be further increased without updating the image in 1/60 seconds.

  In addition, the production control device 300 executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0019).

  In addition, the effect control device 300 executes a decoration control process for controlling a decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) made of LEDs or the like (B0020). In the decoration control process, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

  Furthermore, the effect control device 300 executes a movable body control process for controlling an effect device (board effect device 44, frame effect device) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B0021). In the movable body control process, for example, an accessory action effect for driving a motor is set.

  Then, the effect control device 300 returns to the process B0008 after completing the process B0021 described above. Thereafter, the processing from B0008 to B0021 is repeated.

[Received command check processing]
Next, details of the received command check process (B0014) in the main process (FIG. 36) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the effect control device 300.

  First, the effect control device 300 loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the command reception number in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether the number of received commands is not 0 (B1102). When the command reception number is 0, that is, when there is no command received from the game control apparatus 100 (result of B1102 is “N”), there is no command to be analyzed, and the received command check process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the command reception number is not 0, that is, if the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 has a command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After subtracting the value by the number of received commands (B1103), the contents of the received command buffer in the RAM are copied to the command area for analysis (B1104). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem even if the number of received commands is subtracted before the contents in the buffer are copied to the command area. Even if a new command is received during copying, the data is not overwritten.

  Then, the production control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 (adds 1 only) in the range of 0 to 31 (B1105). The reception command buffer is configured to store up to 32 received commands. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of command reading indexes 0 to 31. Here, the received commands are read in the index order and copied to the command area for analysis. Note that the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared at the timing when copying to the command area for analysis is completed.

  The effect control device 300 determines whether or not copying of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106). If the copying is not completed (the result of B1106 is “N ]), The process from step B1104 to B1106 is repeated.

  When the effect control device 300 receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100, the contents of the received command are stored in the reception command buffer, and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the reception command buffer, analysis of received commands is performed separately in a command area for analysis. When the contents of the received command are copied to the analysis command area, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, it is possible to prepare for a large amount of command reception by always ensuring a free area without directly analyzing in the reception command buffer.

  Subsequently, when the copying is completed (the result of B1106 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 loads the received command contents in the analysis command area (B1107), and analyzes the received command to analyze the contents. The process is executed (B1108) The details of the received command analysis process will be described later with reference to Fig. 38. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109), and then the process of step B1101 It is determined whether or not the analysis of the command for the number of received commands loaded is completed (B1110). If the analysis is not completed (the result of B1110 is “N”), the processing from step B1107 to B1110 is performed. repeat. When the analysis is completed (the result of B1110 is “Y”), the received command check process is terminated.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the received command check process (FIG. 37) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command analysis process executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control apparatus 300 first separates the received command as the MODE part and the lower byte as the ACTION part (ACT part) (B1201). The command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is composed of a MODE section (MODE command) and an ACTION section (ACTION command), and is normally transmitted continuously from the MODE section indicating the type of command. The Therefore, the upper and lower orders of the received command are configured in the order of the MODE section and the ACTION section.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE portion is in the normal range (B1202). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a value that can be taken by the MODE portion indicating the type of command (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the type). If the MODE portion is in the normal range (the result of B1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION portion is in the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not the value can be taken by the ACTION section indicating the contents of the command (specific production instruction or the like) (value assigned as the command specification indicating the contents). If the ACTION part is in the normal range (the result of B1203 is “Y”), it is further determined whether the ACTION part for the MODE part is a correct combination (B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the type of command specified by the MODE section. If the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is “Y”), command processing corresponding to the command system is executed in the processing after B1205.

  The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE portion is within the range of the variable command (B1205). The variation command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of the decorative special symbol, and includes a variation command (set by variation start information setting processing). If the MODE portion represents a variable command (the result of B1205 is “Y”), the variable command processing is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If the MODE portion does not represent a variable command (result of B1205 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE portion is in the range of the hit command (B1207). The hit command is a command for instructing an operation related to the effect during the hit (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.). For example, a big hit fanfare command (set in the special chart display process), a round command (fanfare / Interval command (set during the big prize opening opening process), ending command (set during the big prize opening opening process), small hit fanfare command, small hit release command (small hit round command), For example, a small hit end screen command (small hit ending command). Etc. If the MODE portion represents a hit command (the result of B1207 is “Y”), the hit command processing is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If the MODE portion does not represent a winning command (result of B1207 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE portion is within the design command range (B1209). The design commands include a decoration special figure 1 command (A4018) and a decoration special figure 2 command (A4112) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. If the MODE section represents a symbol-based command (result of B1209 is “Y”), symbol-based command processing is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  When the MODE unit does not represent the symbol-based command (the result of B1209 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether the MODE unit is within the range of the single-shot command (B1211). If the MODE portion represents a single command (result of B1211 is “Y”), single command processing is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  When the MODE unit does not represent a single command (the result of B1211 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE unit is within the range of the pre-read symbol command (B1213). . The prefetch symbol commands include the aforementioned prefetch stop symbol command (A3014 in FIG. 15). If the MODE portion represents a pre-read symbol system command (result of B1213 is “Y”), the pre-read symbol system command process is executed (B1214), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

  When the MODE portion does not represent the prefetched symbol system command (the result of B1213 is “N”), the effect control apparatus 300 next determines whether or not the MODE portion is within the range of the prefetched variation command (B1215). ). The prefetch variation command includes the above-described prefetch variation pattern command (A3018 in FIG. 15). If the MODE portion represents a prefetch fluctuation command (the result of B1215 is “Y”), the prefetch fluctuation command processing is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the MODE unit does not represent the prefetch fluctuation command (result of B1215 is “N”), the production control device 300 may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only during the test mode). Therefore, the received command analysis process is terminated. Further, when the MODE part is not in the normal range (result of B1202 is “N”), when the ACTION part is not in the normal range (result of B1203 is “N”), or when the ACTION part for the MODE part is not a correct combination ( When the result of B1204 is “N”), the received command analysis processing is terminated.

[Single command processing]
Next, the details of the single command processing (B1212) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a procedure of single-shot command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). If the MODE portion represents a model designation command (the result of B1301 is “Y”), a model setting process for setting the type of gaming machine is executed (B1302), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

  When the MODE unit does not represent the model designation command (result of B1301 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE unit represents the RAM initialization command (B1303). ). If the MODE unit represents a RAM initialization command (the result of B1303 is “Y”), a RAM initialization setting process for informing the RAM initialization is executed (B1304), and the single command processing is performed. finish.

  When the MODE unit does not represent a RAM initialization command (result of B1303 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether the MODE unit represents a command at the time of power failure recovery. (B1305). If the MODE unit represents a command for restoration from a power failure (the result of B1305 is “Y”), a power failure restoration setting process is executed (B1306), and the one-shot system command process is terminated.

  When the MODE unit does not represent a command at the time of power failure recovery (result of B1305 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a customer waiting demo command ( B1307). If the MODE section represents a customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is “Y”), a customer waiting demo setting process is executed (B1308), and the one-shot command processing is terminated.

  In the production control device 300, when the MODE section does not represent the customer waiting demonstration command (the result of B1307 is “N”), the MODE section displays the decoration special figure 1 hold number command (A2917, A3207). It is determined whether or not (B1309). If the MODE portion represents a decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (the result of B1309 is “Y”), the special figure 1 reservation information setting process is executed (B1310), and the one-shot command processing ends.

  When the MODE unit does not represent the decoration special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is “N”), the effect control apparatus 300 then displays the decoration special figure 2 hold number command (A2917, A3203). ) Is determined (B1311). If the MODE portion represents a decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is “Y”), a special figure 2 reservation information setting process is executed (B1312), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

  When the MODE unit does not represent the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE unit represents the probability information command. (B1313). If the MODE part represents a probability information command (the result of B1313 is “Y”), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

  If the MODE portion does not represent the probability information command (the result of B1313 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE portion represents an error / unauthorized command ( B1315). As error / unauthorized commands, for example, fraud occurrence command (set by fraud & winning monitoring process when fraud occurs), fraud release command (set by fraud & win monitoring process when fraud is released), There are a state off command (A2204) and a state on command (A2207). Generation of a signal from the glass frame open detection switch 63 (glass frame open error) or generation of a signal from the front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) as a status ON command (main frame open error, front frame) There is a command indicating (open error). The status off command indicates that no error has occurred.

  If the MODE part represents an error / unauthorized command (the result of B1315 is “Y”), an error / unauthorization setting process is executed to notify or cancel the error or the unauthorized (B1316). End single-shot command processing.

  When the MODE unit does not represent an error / unauthorized command (result of B1315 is “N”), the production control device 300 then performs a command for effect mode switching (processing during special figure display). It is determined whether or not (represented by setting) or the like (B1317). If the MODE portion represents a command for effect mode switching (the result of B1317 is “Y”), the effect mode switching setting processing is executed (B1318), and the single command processing is terminated.

  When the MODE unit does not represent a command for switching the effect mode (result of B1317 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE unit represents an out-ball number command. (B1319). If the MODE portion represents an out-ball number command (result of B1319 is “Y”), the out-ball number reception process is executed (B1320), and the single-shot system command process is terminated.

  When the MODE section does not represent an out-ball number command (the result of B1319 is “N”), the performance control apparatus 300 then counts the MODE section (A3107, A3111 big winning mouth count command). Is determined (B1321). If the MODE portion represents a count command (the result of B1321 is “Y”), the count information setting process is executed (B1322), and the single command processing is terminated.

  When the MODE portion does not represent a count command (the result of B1321 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE portion represents a set value information command (probability set value information command). (B1323). The set value information command is included in the command at the time of power failure recovery in step A1035 of FIG. 5B and the command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1045. In addition, as described above, a set value information command is transmitted from the game control device 100 when the probability setting change ends in accordance with the probability setting change end command of step A2421. If the MODE portion represents a set value information command (the result of B 1323 is “Y”), the process at the time of receiving the set value is executed (B 1324), and the one-shot command process is terminated. In the process for receiving a set value, the set value (probability set value) is stored in a storage unit such as a RAM and necessary processes are executed.

  When the MODE unit does not represent the set value information command (the result of B1323 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a setting change command (B1325). Examples of setting change commands include a setting change instruction command (A1029), a probability setting change command (A1041), a probability setting value change command (A2415), and a probability setting change end command (A2421). If the MODE section represents a setting change command (the result of B1325 is “Y”), the setting change system information setting process is executed (B1326), and the one-shot command process is terminated. In the setting change system information setting process, the contents of the setting change system command are stored, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a setting change instruction command is received, a setting change instruction display that prompts the player to change the setting is displayed on the display device 41 in the setting change system information setting process. Further, when a command for changing the probability setting is received, in the setting change system information setting process, a setting changing display for notifying the player that the setting is being changed is displayed on the display device 41.

  When the MODE unit does not represent a setting change command (result of B1325 is “N”), the effect control apparatus 300 determines whether the MODE unit represents a setting confirmation command (B1327). . For example, a command for confirming the probability setting value (A2508) and a command for confirming the probability setting value (A2512) are examples of the setting confirmation commands. If the MODE portion represents a setting confirmation command (the result of B1327 is “Y”), the setting confirmation information setting processing is executed (B1328), and the single command processing is terminated. In the setting confirmation system information setting process, the contents of the setting confirmation system command are stored, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command for confirming the probability setting value is received, in the setting confirmation system information setting process, a display for confirming setting that informs the player that the setting is being confirmed is displayed on the display device 41.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the MODE portion represents a symbol stop command (B1329). Note that the symbol stop command includes, for example, the symbol stop command shown in FIG. 1 and the symbol stop command shown in FIG. If the MODE portion indicates a symbol stop command (result of B1329 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the command of the MODE portion is a normal command ( B1330).

  When the command of the MODE part is a normal command (the result of B1330 is “Y”), the production control device 300 sets a stop mode of the corresponding special figure (B1331), and after all symbols stop, the game The status flag is set to the normal status (B1332), and the single command processing is terminated. In the process of B1332, as an example, the game state flag is set to the normal state. However, depending on the timing at which this process is executed, the game state flag is a flag of “Fluctuating”, “Big hit”, “Low hit” Is set.

  On the other hand, when the MODE section does not represent a symbol stop command (result of B1329 is “N”), or when the command of the MODE section is not normal (result of B1330 is “N”), the production control device 300 finishes the single command processing.

[Pre-reading design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, details of the pre-read symbol system command process (B1214) in the received command analysis process (FIG. 38) described above will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a procedure of prefetched symbol system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the latest hold information is information on special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 start memory), for example, the decoration special figure hold number command received latest is the decoration special figure 1 hold number. It is determined whether it is a command (B1601). When the latest reserved information is information on special figure 1 hold (the result of B1601 is “Y”), a prefetch symbol type command (prefetch stop symbol command) is displayed in the special figure 1 prefetch symbol command area corresponding to the number of special figure ones on hold. Save (B1602).

  In the production control device 300, when the latest hold information is not the information on the special figure 1 hold (the result of B1601 is “N”), that is, the latest special figure hold number command received is the special figure 2 hold number command. In this case, the pre-read symbol system command (pre-read stop symbol command) is saved in the special figure 2 pre-read symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 holding number (B1603).

  The effect control device 300 sets a prefetch fluctuation command reception waiting flag indicating that it is waiting to receive a prefetch fluctuation command after steps B1602 and B1603 (B1604). This is because the prefetch symbol command and the prefetch variation command are set, so that the game controller 100 transmits the prefetch variation command following the prefetch symbol command. Thereafter, the look-ahead design command processing is terminated.

[Read-ahead variation command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the details of the prefetch fluctuation command processing (B1216) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) described above will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a procedure of prefetch fluctuation command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not it is waiting to receive a prefetch fluctuation command (B1701). When the above-mentioned prefetch fluctuation system command reception waiting flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that the prefetch fluctuation system command is waiting to be received. If it is not waiting to receive the prefetch fluctuation command (the result of B1701 is “N”), the prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated. When waiting for reception of a prefetching variable command (result of B1701 is “Y”), the prefetching variable command reception waiting flag is cleared (B1702).

  Next, the production control device 300 (sub-board) sets a pre-reading variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of reservations of the pattern (Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2) of the latest reservation information (B1703), Corresponding to the MODE part, the sub-in-prefetch variation command MODE part is acquired (B1704). Next, a prefetch variation ACT conversion table is set (B1705), and an in-sub-prefetch variation command ACT portion corresponding to the ACTION portion (ACT portion) of the prefetch variation command is acquired (B1706).

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not both the converted MODE part and ACT part (that is, the sub-in-prefetch variation command MODE part and ACT part) are other than 0 (B1707). If the command is normal (valid), it is converted to a value other than 0. If both the converted MODE part and ACT part are other than 0 (result of B1707 is “Y”), the converted command composed of the converted MODE part and ACT part corresponds to the latest hold information and the number of holds. Is saved in the pre-reading fluctuation command area (special figure 1 pre-reading fluctuation command area or special figure 2 pre-reading fluctuation command area) (B1708). Then, prefetch command consistency check processing is executed (B1709), and it is determined whether or not the combination of the converted MODE part and ACT part is normal (B1710).

  Note that the time of the first half change corresponding to the MODE section changes depending on the number of holds when the hold starts the variable display game. When the hold starts the variable display game, if there is no other hold, the first half of the change will be long, and if a new hold occurs and the number of holds is large, the first half of the change will be short. Therefore, the MODE part of the received prefetch fluctuation command is converted into the sub-internal prefetch fluctuation command MODE part so that the internal command of the effect control apparatus 300 can be handled in the same manner even if the time value of the first half fluctuation changes.

  Further, since the type of reach is not related to the number of holds, the latter half fluctuation corresponding to the sub-in-prefetch fluctuation command ACT part does not depend on the number of holds. However, since there is also a type of reach of the same system, if the production control device 300 is used as it is without converting the ACT part (the value of the second half fluctuation) of the prefetch fluctuation command, the number increases and the check becomes difficult. . For example, there are types of normal reach, such as normal reach minus one stop and normal reach plus one stop. Therefore, by converting the ACT unit indicating the reach of the same system to the same sub-subread pre-reading variation command ACT unit, the number is reduced, and the load of check processing such as pre-read command consistency check processing is reduced.

  Next, the effect control device 300, when at least one of the converted MODE part and the ACT part (that is, the sub-in-prefetch variation command MODE part and the ACT part) is 0 (the result of B1707 is “N”), or If the combination of the converted MODE part and ACT part is not normal (the result of B1710 is “N”), the pre-reading variation command processing is terminated because the converted command is abnormal.

  When the combination of the converted MODE part and ACT part is normal (result of B1710 is “Y”), the production control device 300 loads the pre-read target hold information (the latest hold information) from the pre-reading variation command area. (B1711), prefetch lottery processing relating to the latest pending prefetch effect is executed (B1712). Examples of the pre-reading effects include a continuous notice effect (including a chance eye-reading effect), a prefetch zone effect, and a pending change notice. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the latest pre-reading effect (holding change notice or the like) occurs (B1713). When the latest pending prefetch effect occurs (the result of B1713 is “Y”), point information corresponding to the selected prefetch effect is set (B1714).

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the pre-reading effect that occurs (such as a pending change notice) is an effect that immediately starts (B1715). If the generated prefetch effect is an effect that immediately starts (result of B1715 is “Y”), a display corresponding to the selected prefetch effect is set (B1716). Then, the prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the case where the latest pre-reading effect does not occur (result of B1713 is “N”) or the prefetching effect that is generated is not an effect that immediately starts (result of B1715 is “N”). As it is. The prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated.

[Design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the details of the symbol system command process (B1210) in the received command analysis process (FIG. 38) will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a procedure of symbol system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 sets a special figure type corresponding to the MODE portion of the received symbol-related command (decorative special figure 1 command or decorative special figure 2 command) (B1801). The special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2. Then, a symbol type corresponding to the combination of the MODE portion and the ACTION portion (ACT portion) of the symbol-related command is set and saved in a predetermined area such as a RAM (B1802). Here, in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, since the symbol distribution ratio changes, a symbol type is set using a table for each MODE. In the present embodiment, the symbol type is an outlier symbol, a 2R probability variable big hit symbol (2R-A1, etc.), a 2R normal big hit symbol (2R-A2, etc.), a 6R probability variable big hit symbol (6R-A1) shown in FIG. Etc.), 6R normal big hit symbol (6R-A2 etc.), 16R probability variable big hit symbol (16R-A1 etc.), 16R normal big hit symbol (16R-A2 etc.).

[Variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the details of the variable command process (B1206) in the received command analysis process (FIG. 38) described above will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable command process executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the received variable command (variable command) is unconfirmed (B1901). When the special figure type is unconfirmed (the result of B1901 is “Y”), the variable command processing is terminated. If the special figure type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is “N”), the combination of the received variable command and symbol command is checked (B1902), and whether or not the variable command and symbol type are inconsistent. Is determined (B1903). Here, the term “inconsistency” means that there is a contradiction in performing an effect, for example, when a symbol system command of a big hit symbol is received while a variation command of a deviation is received. If the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (result of B1903 is “Y”), the variation command processing is terminated.

  When the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (result of B1903 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation command (variation command) (B1904), and the effect during the variation A variation effect setting process for setting a certain variation effect is executed (B1905). There are a plurality of effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, special state change is set to the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) (B1906), and if the number of pre-reading effects of the continuous notice effect (the remaining number of continuous notice effects) is not 0, -1 is updated. (B1907).

[Variation production setting processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the details of the variation effect setting processing (B1905) in the above-described variation command processing (FIG. 43) will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the changing effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the variation pattern type is a reachless variation (a variation that does not reach a reach state) (B2001). When the variation pattern type is unreachable variation (result of B2001 is “Y”), the first half notice allocation corresponding to the number of production points, model code, special figure type, production mode, and setting value (probability setting value) A group address table is set (B2002), and the address of the first-order notice allocation group table corresponding to the MODE portion of the variable command (variable command) and the number of reservations of the special figure type is acquired (B2003). In the case of fluctuation without reach, since the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of holds increases, the address of the table corresponding to the number of holds is acquired.

  When the variation pattern type is not a variation without reach (result of B2001 is “N”), that is, when the variation is a reach variation, the production control device 300 has the number of production points, model code, special figure type, production mode, The first half notice allocation group address table corresponding to the symbol type and set value (probability set value) is set (B2004), and the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE part of the fluctuation command (fluctuation command) and the fluctuation pattern type. Is obtained (B2005).

  The production control device 300 performs a lottery for a notice appearing during the first half fluctuation (before reach) after Steps B2003 and B2005 (B2006). Note that the lottery probability of the notice depends on the set value. Subsequently, the latter half notice allocation group address table corresponding to the number of production points, model code, special figure type, production mode, symbol type, and setting value (probability setting value) is set (B2007). The address of the latter half notice group group corresponding to the ACT part is acquired (B2008), and the lottery for the notice appearing during the latter half change (during reach) is performed (B2009). Note that the lottery probability of the notice depends on the set value. Thereafter, the contents of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the MODE part and ACT part of the fluctuation command (fluctuation command) are determined (B2010). Note that the fluctuation time and main reach contents can be found from the fluctuation commands.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the notice lottery result (B2011). After that, for example, stop symbol setting processing for determining a stop symbol of the decorative special symbol variation display game is executed according to the contents of the variation effect such as the reach effect or the notice effect (B2012). Here, the decoration stop symbol is specifically determined, for example, by determining a disjoint eye in the case of the off symbol.

  Next, the effect control device 300 performs display setting for a fluctuating effect such as a reach effect (B2013), and performs display setting for a notice effect (B2014). Subsequently, the display setting of the hold reduction (hold shift) corresponding to the special figure type is performed, and for example, the display in which the hold display corresponding to the decoration special figure that changes this time is set (B2015). Subsequently, a voice number that determines an effect mode (sound output mode) based on the sound of the speaker and a decoration number that determines an effect mode due to light emission of the decoration device are set (B2016). The decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) has a plurality of decorative light emitting units (decorative LEDs, etc.) and emits light in a light emission mode (color of each LED, light emission timing, etc.) determined by a decoration number. .

  Note that it is possible not only to set the voice number and decoration number based on the contents of the effect, but also to set by lottery with a lottery probability corresponding to the set value (probability setting value). In this way, the player can enjoy guessing the set value (probability set value) of the gaming machine 10 from the light emission mode of the decoration device, that is, the light emission mode of the decorative light emitting unit (LED).

  Next, the production control device 300 performs display setting of the decoration special figure fluctuation corresponding to the special figure type (B2017), and the fourth special symbol other than the first to third special symbols which fluctuate on the display device 41. The display setting of the 4th symbol fluctuation regarding (4th symbol, identification information) is done (B2018). The fourth symbol variation is displayed on the lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) of the lamp display device 80 provided in addition to the display device 41.

[Hits command processing]
Next, the details of the hit command processing (B1208) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 38) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hit command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE portion of the received winning command represents a fanfare (B2101). Fanfare effect setting process for setting fanfare effect when the MODE portion of the hit command represents fanfare (the result of B2101 is “Y”), that is, when the hit command is a big hit fanfare command or a small hit fanfare command. Is executed (B2102). The fanfare command includes information on the maximum number of rounds for the current jackpot. Subsequently, “Fanfare” is set in the gaming state flag indicating the current gaming state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10 (B2103), and the hit command processing is terminated. The round number upper limit value can also be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol-related command (decorative symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern).

  When the MODE part of the received winning command does not represent a fanfare (the result of B2101 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the winning command represents a round ( B2104). When the MODE portion represents a round (the result of B2104 is “Y”), that is, when the hit command is a round command or a small hit open command, the effect control device 300 executes the round effect setting process, The game state flag indicating the gaming state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10 is set to round (B2105, B2106), and the hit command processing is terminated.

  If the MODE part of the received winning command does not represent a round (result of B2104 is “N”), the effect control apparatus 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the winning command represents an interval ( B2107). When the MODE portion represents an interval (the result of B2107 is “Y”), that is, when the winning command is an interval command, the effect control device 300 executes the interval effect setting process, and the game of the current gaming machine 10 The interval state is set in the game state flag indicating the state (P machine state) (B2108, B2109), and the hit command processing is terminated. Note that there is no interval command when the big winning opening is opened only once in a small hit, that is, when the small win is one round.

  If the MODE portion of the received winning command does not represent an interval (the result of B2107 is “N”), the effect control apparatus 300 determines whether or not the MODE portion of the winning command represents ending ( B2110). When the MODE portion represents an ending (the result of B2110 is “Y”), that is, when the hit command is an ending command or a small hit end screen command, the effect control device 300 sets the ending effect for setting the ending effect. The setting process is executed, ending is set in the gaming state flag indicating the current gaming state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10 (B2111, B2112), and the hit command processing is terminated.

  If the MODE portion of the received winning command does not represent an ending (result of B2110 is “N”), the production control device 300 ends the winning command processing without executing any processing. To do.

[Operations and effects of the first embodiment]
According to the first embodiment, the gaming machine 10 displays a variable display game that displays the identification information in a variable manner based on the establishment of the start condition (for example, winning in the start winning opening) (for example, the first special figure variable display portion 51). Alternatively, a game control means (game control device 100) that can be displayed on the second special figure fluctuation display section 52) is provided, and a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when the result of stopping the fluctuation display game is a special result. Let The setting change means (for example, the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102) can change the setting related to the game condition (or the setting related to the game) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. The game control means (game control device 100) can shift to a setting variable state in which the setting can be changed when power is supplied to the gaming machine 10, and at the time of power-off before shifting to the setting variable state. Regardless of the state of the gaming machine 10, a predetermined display is displayed on the display unit (FIG. 34).

  Accordingly, in the setting variable state (during setting change), the setting is being changed by the predetermined display on the display unit for the special figure variable display game that is easily visible from the front of the gaming machine 10, and the gaming machine 10 It can be suggested that the state is not possible (for example, a variable display game). Even in the variable setting state, the state of the gaming machine 10 at the time of power-off is maintained, and the normal display at the time of fluctuation stoppage (out-of-order symbol, jackpot symbol), etc. is displayed on the display section for the special figure fluctuation display game. In this case, for example, when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is closed before the setting change is completed, there is a possibility that a game can be mistakenly recognized.

  According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) can display a variable display game for displaying the identification information in a variable manner on the light emitting unit (for example, the LED lamps D1 and D2) based on the establishment of the start condition. . The gaming machine 10 includes the light emitting unit and a display device (collective display device 50) including another light emitting unit different from the light emitting unit. The game control means may blink all the light emitting units of the display device in the setting variable state in which the setting can be changed (FIG. 34F).

  Therefore, in a setting variable state (during setting change), it is possible to clearly indicate in the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which a game cannot be performed by performing a display different from normal on the display device (collective display device 50). .

  According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) displays information indicating that it is in the setting variable state in the setting variable state (during setting change) (for example, the first special figure variation display). May be displayed on the part 51 or the second special figure fluctuation display part 52) (FIG. 34B).

  Accordingly, in the setting variable state (during setting change), it is possible to clearly indicate on the front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which a game is not possible by performing a display different from normal on the display unit for the variable display game.

  According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) is configured to display the display units (for example, the first special figure fluctuation display part 51 and the second special figure fluctuation display part 52) in the setting variable state (during setting change). ) May be turned off (FIG. 34D).

  Accordingly, in a setting variable state (during setting change), the gaming machine 10 is in a state in which a game cannot be performed by performing a display different from the normal display on the display unit for the variable display game (a display different from when the variable display game is stopped). It can be clearly shown on the front of the gaming machine 10.

  According to the first embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) displays the same display as the stop result (outcome result) of the variable display game other than the special result (other than the big hit result) in the setting variable state (for example, the display unit). The first special figure fluctuation display unit 51 or the second special figure fluctuation display unit 52) may be displayed (FIG. 34C).

  Therefore, in the setting variable state (during setting change), it is possible to suggest in front of the gaming machine 10 that the gaming machine 10 is not executing a game by performing a predetermined display on the display unit for the variable display game. By displaying the stop result (outgoing result) of the variable display game other than the special result (other than the jackpot result) while the setting is being changed, the initial value at the end of the setting change is displayed for the data displayed on the display unit for the variable display game. No value setting is required.

[Second Embodiment]
A second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 55. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first embodiment. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those in the first embodiment, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate.

  In the second embodiment, when the part identification information (first identification information) of the detachable part (part, member) 510 and the model identification information (second identification information) corresponding to the model of the gaming machine 10 are inconsistent. Informing that there is an inconsistency error.

[Game machine parts]
FIG. 46 shows a state in which the detachable part 510 is attached to the gaming machine 10. The part 510 is assigned electrically readable part identification information. For example, the part 510 may be a plate-like member on which model information (model logo or the like) of the gaming machine 10 to be attached is displayed, or may be a movable accessory constituting the frame effect device or the board effect device 44. The decoration member which has LED of the frame decoration apparatus 18 or the board decoration apparatus 46 may be sufficient. The part 510 can be attached to the gaming machine 10 in the amusement hall for reasons such as being in the way of being brought into the amusement hall (amusement store), and there is a possibility that inexperienced personnel may attach it to the wrong model.

  As shown in FIG. 46A, for example, no problem occurs when the part 510A for the model A is attached to the model A of the gaming machine 10. However, for example, as shown in FIG. 46B, a problem occurs when the part 510B for the model B is attached to the model A of the gaming machine 10, so that the effect control device 300 is connected to the speakers 19a and 19b and the display device. An error is notified via 41.

  FIG. 47 is a schematic configuration diagram schematically showing a configuration example of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment. When the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the gaming control device 100 transmits a model designation command indicating the model (type) of the gaming machine 10 to the effect control device 300 (A1035, A1045). The effect control device 300 selects and sets the model identification information corresponding to the received model designation command (B1301) from the reference table (FIG. 55 described later). In addition, the effect control device 300 compares the part identification information read from the part 510 with the set model identification information. Furthermore, when the part identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) do not match, the effect control device 300 notifies that there is a mismatch as an error.

  The part 510 has an identification substrate 513 that holds part identification information. In the identification substrate 513, the part identification information is set by one or a plurality of wirings 519 (electric wires) to which a predetermined voltage is applied. In FIG. 46, the wiring 519 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage via a pull-up resistor, but a pull-up resistor may not be provided. Note that the power (voltage) to the part 510 is supplied from, for example, the effect control device 300 or the power supply device 400 when the part 510 is attached.

  In FIG. 47, a plurality of wirings 519 (a plurality of electric wires) are respectively connected to predetermined terminals among a plurality (eight) terminals (ports) in the parallel-serial conversion unit 516. In this way, a predetermined terminal to which a predetermined voltage is input is a bit having a value “1”, and a terminal to which a predetermined voltage is not input (the wiring 519 is not connected) is a bit having a value “0”, for example “01111100 "Can be transmitted via the parallel-serial conversion unit 516.

That is, the identification substrate 513 is assigned part identification information as parallel data by a plurality of wirings 519. Then, the parallel-serial conversion unit 516 converts the input part identification information (parallel data) into serial data, and transmits the serial data to the effect control device 300 by serial communication (here, I ² C).

  FIG. 48 shows another example of the identification substrate 513. In FIG. 48, the part identification information is set by the dip switch 521. Each of the plurality of wirings 519 is set to a predetermined voltage or ground voltage by the dip switch 521, and each bit (“1” or “1” or “8”) of parts identification information is connected to a plurality (eight) terminals (ports) in the parallel-serial conversion unit 516. "0") information is input. In the example of FIG. 48, the terminal connected to the wiring 519 in which the dip switch 521 is turned on is the ground voltage (bit of value “0”), and is connected to the wiring 519 in which the dip switch 521 is turned off. Terminal becomes a predetermined voltage (bit of value “1”).

[Parallel serial converter]
FIG. 49 shows a configuration of the parallel-serial conversion unit 516 when the parallel-serial conversion unit 516 is a normal parallel-serial conversion IC.

The parallel-serial conversion unit 516 has a configuration of a normal parallel-serial conversion IC including a plurality of D-type flip-flops 516a (D-FF). The parallel-serial conversion unit 516 converts parallel data (for example, “01111100”) as part identification information input from the terminals 0 to 7 (ports 0 to 7) into serial data, and performs serial communication (here, I ² C). Communication) via the connection line SDA (data line). The effect control device 300 has a master IC 300a in I ² C communication, and inputs clock signals for a plurality of D-type flip-flops 516a to the parallel-serial conversion unit 516 via a connection line SCL (timing signal line).

  The plurality of D-type flip-flops 516a (D-FF) constitute a shift register in which each bit data of parallel data moves from right to left in synchronization with a clock signal. The bit data of each D-type flip-flop 516a at a certain clock timing moves to the adjacent D-type flip-flop 516a at the next clock timing. Each bit data of the parallel data is taken into a plurality of D-type flip-flops 516a at a certain clock timing, and sequentially output as serial data from the leftmost D-type flip-flop 516a. That is, the output of serial data is completed in 8 clocks after the parallel data is taken.

[First Modification of Identification Substrate]
FIG. 50 shows a first modification of the identification substrate 513 of the part 510. In the first modification, the parallel-serial conversion unit 516 of the identification board 513 is not an ordinary parallel-serial conversion IC but an input I ² CI / O expander 815 (slave IC). The input I ² CI / O expander 815 inputs the part identification information input from the ports 0 to 7 to the master IC 300a of the effect control device 300 as data.

The I ² CI / O expander 815 (slave IC) is connected to the transistor 830 connected to the connection line SDA, the filter 831 connected to the connection line SDA, the driver 832 connected to the connection line SDA, and the connection line SCL. A filter 833, a bus controller 834, and a reset signal generation circuit 839. Further, a bus monitoring WDT (watchdog timer) 840 for determining whether or not the connection line SDA is occupied by another I ² CI / O expander 815, and the I ² CI / O expander 815 itself are connected. A self-occupied WDT 841 is provided for determining whether or not the line SDA is occupied.

The connection line SDA is a connection line for exchanging data signals between the master IC 300a of the effect control device 300 and the I ² CI / O expander 815 (slave IC), and functions as a data line. The connection line SCL is a connection line for inputting and outputting a clock signal used for data communication through the connection line SDA, and functions as a timing signal line.

  The filter 831 is connected to the connection line SDA, removes noise from data (such as a response signal and address data here) input from the connection line SDA, and outputs the data from which the noise has been removed to the bus controller 834.

  The driver 832 applies a voltage at which the transistor 830 can operate to the transistor 830 when outputting data (part identification information or the like in this case) from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a.

  The transistor 830 uses a field effect transistor (FET) to reduce power consumption, the gate of the transistor 830 is connected to the driver 832, and the drain is a connection line SDA to which a predetermined voltage is applied by the pull-up resistor R. And the source is grounded.

  When the driver 832 outputs data (part identification information or the like) from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a, the transistor 830 can operate at the gate of the transistor 830 in order to pass a current between the drain and the source of the transistor 830. Apply the value voltage. Then, the driver 832 outputs data from the connection line SDA by repeatedly changing the voltage of the connection line SDA from HIGH to LOW.

  The filter 833 is connected to the connection line SCL, removes noise from the data input from the connection line SCL, and outputs the data from which the noise has been removed to the bus controller 834.

In ^addition, the I 2 CI / O expander 815, is set a unique address by the address setting terminals A0~A3 provided in the ^I 2 CI / O expander 815 is input to the bus controller 834. Further, an address for resetting the I ² CI / O expander 815 is also set in advance.

The unique address (8 bits) of the I ² CI / O expander 815 is composed of a fixed address part consisting of upper 3 bits and a variable address part consisting of lower 5 bits. The fixed address portion has a predetermined value (for example, “110”) set in advance and cannot be changed by the I ² CI / O expander 815.

The variable address portion includes a 4-bit I ² CI / O expander address corresponding to the pattern set at the terminals A0 to A3 of the I ² CI / O expander 815, and a write request whether the data is a read request. And 1-bit R / W identification data indicating whether or not. In the I ² CI / O expander 815 for input, “1” is normally registered in the R / W identification data in response to the read request.

The bus controller 834 determines whether or not the address of the data input from the connection line SDA matches the unique address set in the I ² CI / O expander 815. Data (part identification information) is output from the SDA to the master IC 300a. A predetermined voltage is obtained by connecting a plurality of wirings 519 to predetermined ports (five in this case) among eight ports 0 to 7 (terminals 0 to 7) in the I ² CI / O expander 815. Is applied. Therefore, 8-bit part identification information (for example, “01111100”) is input to the bus controller 834 as parallel data via the eight ports 0 to 7. A predetermined port to which a predetermined voltage is input corresponds to a bit having a value “1”, and other terminals (the wiring 519 is not connected) correspond to a bit having a value “0”.

In addition, the bus controller 834 determines whether or not the address of the data input from the connection line SDA matches the reset address set in the I ² CI / O expander 815. The data is fetched as initialization instruction data (initialization command RES), and the I ² CI / O expander 815 is initialized.

  Further, after the number of changes in the signal level of the connection line SCL from LOW to HIGH reaches eight times, and the bus controller 834 outputs the eighth bit data (part identification information), the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from HIGH. When changing to LOW, the master IC 300a outputs a response signal from the connection line SDA to the bus controller 834. Furthermore, when it is confirmed that the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from LOW to HIGH, and the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from HIGH to LOW again, the connection line SDA is released. That is, the master IC 300a outputs a response signal at the timing when the number of changes from LOW to HIGH of the signal level of the connection line SCL becomes nine.

The reset signal generation circuit 839 is connected to a Vcc terminal connected to a connection line Vcc that supplies power to the I ² CI / O expander 815 and a RESET terminal that receives an external reset signal.

When the I ² CI / O expander 815 is powered on and the voltage rises to a predetermined value, the reset signal generation circuit 839 generates a reset signal and inputs the generated reset signal to the bus controller 834 to initialize the reset signal generation circuit 839. Turn into.

  Therefore, when the harness is removed, the connection line Vcc for supplying logic power is temporarily disconnected, and when the harness is reinserted, the power supply is restored, and the reset signal generation circuit 839 outputs a reset signal. Become. Note that a bundle of connection lines Vcc, connection lines SDA, connection lines SCL, and ground lines GND for supplying logic power is called a harness.

The bus monitoring WDT 840 is used to detect that another I ² CI / O expander 815 occupies the connection line SDA. The bus monitoring WDT 840 is connected to the reset signal generation circuit 839. When a predetermined time has elapsed after the connection line SDA is occupied, the bus monitoring WDT 840 operates its own reset signal generation circuit 839 to perform the I ² CI / O export. The panda 815 is initialized.

The self-occupied WDT 841 is used to detect the occupation of the connection line SDA by itself (I ² CI / O expander 815). When the self-occupied WDT 841 operates continuously for a predetermined time, the self-occupied WDT 841 generates a reset signal in the reset signal generation circuit 839 and initializes the I ² CI / O expander 815.

[Second Modification of Identification Board]
FIG. 51 shows a second modification of the identification substrate 513 of the part 510. In the second modification, the parallel-serial conversion unit 516 of the identification board 513 is not an ordinary parallel-serial conversion IC but an output I ² CI / O expander 815 (slave IC). In the second modification, the part 510 includes an effect device and can execute an effect. The presentation device is a decoration device such as an LED (light emitting unit), but may be a movable accessory.

Based on the effect control data received from the master IC 300a of the effect control device 300, the output I ² CI / O expander 815 outputs the output state of the effect device (here, LED, light emitting unit) provided in the part 510 ( Here, the light emission state) is controlled via ports 0 to 15 on the output side. The I ² CI / O expander 815 uses the unique address (8 bits) of the I ² CI / O expander 815 as part identification information and inputs it to the master IC 300a of the effect control device 300.

The output I ² CI / O expander 815 is similar to the input I ² CI / O expander 815 (FIG. 50), but includes an output setting register 835, an output controller 836, and an output side of the I ² CI / O expander 815. A driver 837 connected to each of the ports 0 to 15 (terminals 0 to 15) and transistors 838A to 838P connected to the ports 0 to 15 are added. Therefore, the description of the same configuration as that of the input I ² CI / O expander 815 (FIG. 50) will be omitted as appropriate.

  The filter 831 is connected to the connection line SDA, removes noise from data (production control data, response signal, and the like here) input from the connection line SDA, and outputs the data from which noise has been removed to the bus controller 834.

  The driver 832 applies a voltage at which the transistor 830 can operate to the transistor 830 when outputting data (part identification information, a response signal, and the like here) from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a.

  When the driver 832 outputs data (part identification information, a response signal, etc.) from the connection line SDA, the transistor 830 can operate at the gate of the transistor 830 in order to pass a current between the drain and the source through the transistor 830. Apply the value voltage. Then, the driver 832 outputs data from the connection line SDA by repeatedly changing the voltage of the connection line SDA from HIGH to LOW.

The bus controller 834 determines whether or not the address of the data input from the connection line SDA matches the unique address set in the I ² CI / O expander 815. Data (part identification information, response signal, etc.) is output from the SDA to the master IC 300a. The part identification information output to the master IC 300a is a unique address (8 bits) of the I ² CI / O expander 815 as described above, or separately set identification information (first modified) different from the unique address. It is set via a port or stored in a storage unit (memory) as in the example). It is not always necessary to output the part identification information from the bus controller 834 to the master IC 300a. When the presentation control device 300 receives the response signal from the bus controller 834, it recognizes the address of the transmitted data as part identification information. You may comprise.

  In addition, the bus controller 834 has changed the signal level of the connection line SCL from LOW to HIGH eight times, fetches the 8-bit effect control data from the connection line SDA, and then changes the signal level of the connection line SCL. When the signal changes from HIGH to LOW, a response signal is output from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a. Furthermore, when it is confirmed that the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from LOW to HIGH, and the signal level of the connection line SCL changes from HIGH to LOW again, the connection line SDA is released. That is, the bus controller 834 outputs a response signal at the timing when the number of changes from LOW to HIGH of the signal level of the connection line SCL becomes nine.

In the output setting register 835, the operation mode of the I ² CI / O expander 815 and the output state of the ports 0 to 15 are set. When the bus controller 834 fetches the initialization instruction data from the connection line SDA and the I ² CI / O expander 815 is initialized, the output setting register 835 causes a current to flow to all the ports 0 to 15. It is set to the initial state so that there is no.

  Based on the data set in the output setting register 835, the output controller 836 causes a current to flow to the effect devices (here, LEDs and light emitting units) connected to the ports 0 to 15 via the port driver 837 ( The output state of the effect device (here, the light emission state) is actually controlled by the output of lighting data). This output state is updated to the contents specified in the effect control data when the bus controller 834 fetches the effect control data from the connection line SDA.

  That is, the output setting register 835 is set based on the effect control data received from the master IC 300a, and when the stop condition is received, the output state of each port 0-15 is updated and reflected in the effect device.

  When a current flows through a port, the driver 837 applies a voltage at which the transistors 838A to 838P connected to the port through which the current flows can operate.

  The gates of the transistors 838A to 838P are connected to the driver 837, the drain is connected to a port terminal connected to a connection line to which a voltage for operating the effect device is applied, and the source is grounded.

  If the voltage applied to the gates of the transistors 838A to 838P is equal to or higher than a predetermined value for operating the transistor 838, the predetermined voltage applied to the gate from the driving power source is grounded via the drain of the transistor 838. When the current flows to the output terminal, it is possible to control the output state of the effect device (here, LED) connected to the port terminal.

[Third Modification of Identification Substrate]
FIG. 52 shows a third modification of the identification substrate 513 of the part 510. In the third modification, the parallel-serial conversion unit 516 of the identification board 513 does not exist, and the presentation control device 300 includes input as part identification information (for example, “01111100”) in which a predetermined voltage is 8-bit from a plurality of wirings 519. Directly input to the port 300b (ports 0 to 7). The part identification information input to the input port 300b is taken into the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 via the data bus 340. It should be noted that a predetermined terminal to which a predetermined voltage is input corresponds to a bit having a value “1”, and other terminals (the wiring 519 is not connected) correspond to a bit having a value “0”.

  Then, the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 notifies that there is a mismatch when the parts identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) do not match. Execute the process.

[Main processing (production control device)]
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a procedure of main processing (main program) according to the second embodiment. The main process is executed by the effect control device 300 (main control microcomputer 311) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on (recovered).

  The main process of the second embodiment is obtained by adding a part matching process (B5000) to the main process of FIG. 36, and the other processes are the same as those in FIG. Is omitted.

  In the part matching process, the part identification information read from the part 510 is compared with the model identification information corresponding to the model designation command (B1301), and the part identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification) are compared. If the information does not match, a warning is given by error notification. In the present embodiment, the parts matching process (B5000) is executed after the received command check process (B0014).

  The parts matching process (B5000) is first executed when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and then repeatedly executed by a loop process from step B0008 to B0021.

[Parts verification processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the details of the parts matching process (B5000) in the main process (FIG. 53) will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a part collating process performed by the effect control apparatus 300.

  The production control device 300 first updates -1 if the collation time timer (time measuring means) is not 0 (B5001). The collation time timer determines a collation timing or a collation time interval at which the part identification information is read and collated (compared) with the model identification information. Then, it is determined whether or not the collation time timer is 0 (B5002). When the collation time timer is not 0 (the result of B5002 is “N”), the collation timing is not reached, so the part collation process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the collation time timer is 0 (result of B5002 is “Y”), the production control device 300 reads the part identification information from the part 510 because it is the collation timing (B5003). Then, the parts identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) are compared (collated) (B5004). The model identification information is set based on the model designation command as information indicating the type (model) of the gaming machine in the model setting process (B1302) when the gaming machine 10 is turned on.

  The effect control device 300 stores the reference table of FIG. 55 in a memory (for example, the program ROM 321). In the reference table of FIG. 55, the model designation command and model identification information are associated with each other. In this way, the effect control device 300 holds model identification information (second identification information) corresponding to the model of the gaming machine.

  Next, the production control device 300 determines whether or not the part identification information matches the model identification information (B5005). When the part identification information and the model identification information do not match (the result of B5005 is “N”), it is notified by error notification that the part identification information and the model identification information do not match (B5006). That is, it is notified that the part 510 is attached to an incorrect model that does not conform to (correspond to) the part 510. The effect control device 300 may perform error notification (warning) by generating sound from the speakers 19 a and 19 b or displaying characters on the display device 41. Here, the production control device 300 may notify the correct model that conforms (corresponds) to the part 510 together with the error notification with reference to the reference table of FIG. The correct model is a model that has the same model identification information as the part identification information of the part 510.

  Subsequently, the production control device 300 sets an initial value of the collation time timer (B5007), and ends the parts collation process. Accordingly, the parts identification information and the model identification information are periodically compared (verified) every time the time corresponding to the initial value of the collation time timer elapses when the power is turned on for the first time. The initial value of the collation time timer is, for example, a time corresponding to several minutes, but is not limited thereto.

  On the other hand, when the part identification information matches the model identification information (result of B5005 is “Y”), the production control device 300 is attached to the correct model that conforms (corresponds) to the part 510. Without notifying the error, the initial value of the collation time timer is set (B5007), and the parts collation process is terminated.

  For example, when the part 510B for the model B is attached to the model A of the gaming machine 10 (FIG. 46B), the model identification information (for example, “01111100”) and the part identification information are obtained by the above part collation processing. (For example, “01111101”) does not match, and error notification is executed. You may alert | report the correct model (model B) which suits the part 510B with error notification. On the other hand, for example, when the part 510A for the model A is attached to the model A of the gaming machine 10 (FIG. 46A), the model identification information (for example, “01111100”) and the part identification information (for example, “01111100”). ) Match and error notification is not executed.

  As a modification, the production control device 300 does not store the reference table of FIG. 55 in the memory (for example, the program ROM 321), and holds only the model identification information (second identification information) corresponding to one type of model. You can do it. Also in this case, the production control device 300 compares the part identification information read from the part 510 with the held model identification information, and the parts identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information). ) Is inconsistent, it is reported as an error that it is inconsistent.

[Operation and Effect of Second Embodiment]
According to the second embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a game (for example, a variable display game that displays the identification information in a variable manner based on the establishment of the start condition), and the game Production control means (production control device 300) capable of performing the production to be performed. The gaming machine 10 includes a detachable part (part 510) to which first electrically readable identification information (part identification information) is assigned. The effect control means holds the second identification information (model identification information) corresponding to the model of the gaming machine 10, reads the first identification information of the component, compares it with the second identification information, and compares the first identification information (part identification). Information) and the second identification information (model identification information) are inconsistent, the fact that they are inconsistent is notified.

  Therefore, even when an incorrect part (part 510) is attached, it can be appropriately notified. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine 10 having a component (part 510) attachment error in the game hall (game shop) from operating.

  According to the second embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, the production control means reads the first identification information of the part (part 510) and compares it with the second identification information at least when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. When the first identification information and the second identification information do not match, a notification is made that there is a mismatch. Therefore, even when an incorrect part (part 510) is attached, it can be notified when the power is turned on. For this reason, it is possible to prevent early and reliably the operation of the gaming machine 10 in which there is a mistake in attaching the part (part 510) in the game hall (game shop).

  According to the second embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the effect control unit receives information on the model of the gaming machine 10 from the gaming control unit and corresponds to the model of the gaming machine 10. Second identification information (model identification information) is selected from the table (reference table), and the first identification information of the part (part 510) is compared with the selected second identification information. Therefore, when an incorrect part (part 510) is attached to various models of the gaming machine 10, this can be notified. In addition, it is possible to notify the correct model on which wrong parts should be attached.

  According to the second embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, in the component (part 510), the first identification information (part identification information) can be set by one or a plurality of wires pulled up to a predetermined voltage. First identification information can be set.

  According to the second embodiment, in the gaming machine 10, in the part (part 510), since the first identification information can be set by the dip switch, the first identification information can be easily set.

[Third Embodiment]
A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 71. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first embodiment. The third embodiment relates to a fixed display period of probability setting values. The fixed display period is a period for displaying the fixed value of the probability setting value.

[Game control device according to the third embodiment]
First, with reference to FIG. 56, the external information output timing at the time of setting change according to the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 56 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a game control system of the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment. The game control device 100 of the third embodiment is similar to the game control device 100 of the first embodiment, but the probability setting value display device 143 attached to the game control device 100 is incorporated in the state display device 152. It has become a shape. That is, the status display device 152 also functions as the probability setting value display device 143 of the first embodiment. In addition, a RAM initialization switch 112 (RAM clear switch) is attached to the game control apparatus 100 of the third embodiment separately from the set value change switch 102 (set value change button).

[Transition status at power-on]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining a transition state when the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment is turned on (power is restored). Depending on the on / off state of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 when the power is turned on, the state shifts to four states (modes) as shown in FIG.

  First, when the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on when the power is turned on, after the RAM is cleared, a setting variable state (setting changing state, setting changing) in which the probability setting value can be changed. Mode) (A1036-A1041 in FIG. 5A). In this RAM clear, the clear process in step A1036 is executed, and the clear area # 2 is designated as the RAM area to be cleared by the RAM clear head address 2 set in A1021 in FIG. 5C. In the third embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, in steps A1024 and A1028 of FIG. 5A, it is determined whether or not both the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are on. Also, unlike the first embodiment, in step A1025 in FIG. 5A, it is determined whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned on instead of the set value change switch 102.

  Next, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on when the power is turned on but the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned off, the state shifts to a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed. The transition to the setting confirmation state can be executed in steps A2504-A2508 of the probability setting value confirmation process (FIG. 11) during the timer interruption process after the normal power recovery (A1031-A1035) is performed.

  When the setting key switch 93 is off but the RAM initialization switch 112 is on when the power is turned on, the RAM initialization process (RAM clear process) in steps A1042 to 1045 is executed, and FIG. As shown in FIG. 4, the RAM clear head address 2 designates the clear area # 2 as the RAM area to be cleared, and the RAM is cleared. In the RAM clear, the clear area # 3 may be designated by the RAM clear head address 3 as the RAM area to be cleared.

  When the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off when the power is turned on, the power is simply restored.

[Probability setting value change processing]
Next, details of the probability setting value changing process (A1308) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a procedure of probability setting value change processing according to the third embodiment.

  The probability setting value changing process of the third embodiment is obtained by changing the processing positions of steps A2412, A2414, and A2415 and deleting the processes of steps A2411 and A2413 with respect to the probability setting value changing process of FIG. Since the other processes are the same as those in FIG. 10, the same step numbers are assigned and description thereof is omitted.

  When the setting key switch 93 is in the OFF state (the result of A2416 is “Y”), the game control device 100 loads the value in the work probability setting value area and saves it in the probability setting value area. (A2412). When the setting key switch 93 is turned off, the set value is confirmed, and values 0 to 5 corresponding to the confirmed probability set value are stored in the probability set value area.

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 sets a probability setting value changed flag indicating that the probability setting value has been changed (A2414), and issues a probability setting value change command indicating that the probability setting value has been changed. It transmits to the production control device 300 (production control board) (A2415). Thereafter, similarly to the first embodiment, the processes of steps A2417-A2421 are executed, the process returns to the main process (FIG. 5B), and the process proceeds to step A1049. Here, in step A2420, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display area, so that the state setting device 152 in which the probability setting value display device 143 is incorporated into the determined probability setting value. Can be displayed.

[Processing when setting values are received]
Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the details of the set value reception process (B1324) in the single command processing will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing a procedure of processing at the time of setting value reception according to the third embodiment.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the received command is a normal command (B5201). If the received command is not a normal command (the result of B5201 is “N”), the process at the time of receiving the set value is terminated.

  When the received command is a normal command (result of B5201 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 acquires information indicating the current date and time (current time) from the RTC 338 (or time timer) (B5202). ), It is determined whether or not the received command is a setting value information command at the end of setting change (B5203). The setting value information command at the end of the setting change is a setting value information command transmitted from the game control device 100 together with the probability setting change end command in step A2421 of the probability setting value changing process. If the received command is not the setting value information command at the end of the setting change (the result of B5203 is “N”), the processing at the time of receiving the setting value is ended.

  When the received command is a set value information command at the end of the setting change (result of B5203 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 stores the set value and the current date and time (current time) in association with each other. (B5204), and the process upon receiving the set value is terminated. The memory here is an FeRAM 323 capable of holding stored contents even when power is not supplied.

  If the received command is not a setting value information command at the end of setting change, that is, if it is a setting value information command at power failure recovery (A1035) or a setting value information command at RAM initialization (A1045) ( The result of B5203 is “N”), and the setting value (probability setting value) may be stored in the RAM 322 without being associated with the current date and time.

[Segment LED editing processing]
Next, the details of the segment LED editing process (A1314) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a procedure of segment LED editing processing according to the third embodiment. In the segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 hold indicator 54, the special figure 2 hold indicator 55, the universal figure hold indicator 56, the first game state display unit 57, and the second game state display provided in the collective display device 50. Settings relating to driving of the segment LEDs constituting the unit 58, the third gaming state display unit 59, and the round display unit 60 are performed. Although not shown in FIG. 60, in the segment LED editing process, the special-figure 1 display 51, the special-figure 2 display 52, and the fluctuation display unit 53 for the normal fluctuation display game are controlled to emit light other than the fluctuation display game. In this case, the emission control (light-off control, lighting control, blinking control) of the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the fluctuation display unit 53 is executed in the same manner as the light emission control of the hold display 54-56. You can do it. In the variation display game, the control for causing the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the variation display unit 53 to emit light (flash) is executed in the symbol variation control process (FIG. 29).

  The game control device 100 first updates the blinking control timer by +1 (A9201), and determines whether it is the output on timing (A9202). When the specific bit of the blinking control timer is 1, it is determined that the output is on. In the present embodiment, since the specific bit is bit 5, a blinking period of 128 ms can be created (see FIG. 2B).

  When it is the output on timing (the result of A9202 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 sets the common figure hold number display table 1 (A9203), and when it is not the output on timing (the result of A9202 is “N”). Then, the general figure hold number display table 2 is set (A9204), the display data corresponding to the general figure hold number is acquired and saved in the segment area of the general figure hold indicator 56 (lamps D15 and D16) (A9205). If the number of holds is 0 to 2, the display data is the same in both of the table hold number display tables 1 and 2, so the figure hold indicator 56 does not flash, but if the number of holds is 3 to 4, Since the display data in the figure hold number display table 1 and the display data in the general figure hold number display table 2 are different, the common figure hold display 56 blinks (see FIG. 2B).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is the output on timing (A9206). When it is the output on timing (the result of A 9206 is “Y”), the special figure 1 hold number display table 1 is set (A 9207), and when it is not the output on timing (the result of A 9206 is “N”), the special figure 1 hold is held The number display table 2 is set (A9208), display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is acquired and saved in the segment area of the special figure 1 hold display 54 (lamps D11 and D12) (A9209).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is the output on timing (A9210). When it is the output on timing (the result of A9210 is “Y”), the special figure 2 hold number display table 1 is set (A9211), and when it is not the output on timing (the result of A9210 is “N”), the special figure 2 is on hold. The number display table 2 is set (A9212), the display data corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is acquired and saved in the segment area of the special figure 2 hold indicator 55 (lamps D13 and D14) (A9213).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets a round display LED display table in which the display mode on the round display unit 60 (lamps D3-D7) is defined (A9214), and acquires display data corresponding to the round display LED output pointer. And it saves in the segment area | region of the round display part 60 (A9215).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the game state display table 1 in which the display mode on the second game state display unit 58 (lamp D9), the third game state display unit 59 (lamp D17), etc. is defined ( A9216). Further, display data corresponding to the game state display number is acquired and saved in the segment area of each game state display part (A9217).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the game state display table 2 in which the display mode on the first game state display unit 57 (lamp D8) is defined (A9218). Further, display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area of the first game state display unit 57 (A9219). Thereafter, the segment LED editing process is terminated.

[Timing chart of the fixed display period of the probability setting value when the setting is changed]
Next, the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting change (setting change mode, setting variable state) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting change according to the third embodiment.

  After the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned on at time x1, if the gaming machine 10 is turned on with the RAM initialization switch 112 turned on at time x2, the state of the gaming machine 10 ( The gaming machine state) is changed to the setting change mode (setting variable state), and the uncertain probability setting value (unconfirmed value) is displayed on the state display device 152 (probability setting value display (unconfirmed value)). In the probability setting value display (unconfirmed value) of the state display device 152, the unconfirmed probability setting value is displayed blinking. Further, in response to the setting change mode being set at time x2, the display device 41 displays a display in a predetermined display mode that indicates that the setting is being changed. The collective display device 50 (first display device), the lamp display device 80 (fourth symbol), and the decoration device are kept off. The decoration device has a decoration light emitting unit (LED) in addition to the frame decoration device 18 such as the decoration devices 18a and 18b and the panel decoration device 46 such as the upper effect unit 40c. Further, the decoration device may be in a dimmed state instead of being turned off, or only the light emitting units other than the specific color may be turned off.

  When the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x3, the gaming machine state becomes a game-ready state in which a game can be played, and the determined probability setting value (determined value) is displayed on the state display device 152 (second display device). (Probability setting value display (determined value)). In the probability setting value display (determined value) of the state display device 152, the confirmed probability setting value is lit. When the gaming machine state is a game ready state, the setting value cannot be changed or confirmed. Also, in response to the game being enabled at time x3, the special symbol 1 display 51 and / or the special diagram 2 display 52 of the collective display device 50 display the identification information of the off symbol (this special feature). The display device 41 displays a customer waiting demo. The waiting display may be executed by flashing display units (lamps D3-D18) other than the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 of the collective display device 50. The lamp display device 80 and the decoration device are normally displayed. Note that when the probability setting value is determined at time x3, a notification that the probability setting value is determined by sound or voice may be performed together.

  Time x4 is the time when a predetermined time (a predetermined period, for example, 2 to 3 sec) has elapsed from time x3. At time x4, the status display device 152 (second display device) ends the probability setting value display and starts all blinking display, and repeatedly performs all-light-off display and all-light-on display of all segments at predetermined time intervals. . The full blink display of the status display device 152 is executed by using the blink control timer used in the segment LED editing process of FIG. 60, and the blink display on the display unit of the collective display device 50 (the above-mentioned customer waiting display) and You may synchronize with the same blinking period.

  Note that the time x4 is not limited to when a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds) has elapsed since the time x3, but also when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is closed or when a touch switch signal of the operation handle 24 is detected. Good. As described above, when the setting change state is switched to the game ready state in which the setting value cannot be changed, the setting value determined by the state display device 152 can be confirmed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds). Even if the setting confirmation mode is not entered again later, it is possible to see the determined setting value and improve the work efficiency of the game hall manager.

  Time x5 is a time when a predetermined time (a predetermined period, for example, 0.5 sec) has elapsed from time x4. At time x5, the state display device 152 ends the blinking display and starts the performance display (combination ratio display) to display the combination ratio. In addition, on the status display device 152, instead of displaying information related to the ratio of the actors, information related to the payout rate, the number of discharged balls, and the base value (the payout rate in the normal gaming state) may be displayed (the output ball). (Rate display, discharge ball number display, base value display). In addition, as described above, the bonus rate and the payout rate (including the base value) are derived based on the number of winning balls obtained by winning, and are performance information indicating the performance of the gaming machine. The status display device 152 can execute performance display for displaying performance information.

  The probability setting value display (undefined value) from time x2 is blinking display, and the probability setting value display (determined value) of state display device 152 from time x3 is lighting display. The display may be switched, the probability set value display (undefined value) may be lit, and the probability set value display (determined value) may be blinked.

[Display screen example of display device when setting is changed]
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device 41 (third display device) at the time of setting change (setting change mode, setting variable state) according to the third embodiment. In FIG. 62, the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c of the decoration device are also shown above the display screen together with the display screen of the display device 41.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (a), the effect control device 300 receives the command for changing the probability setting (A 1041), and displays the setting change in progress indicating that the setting is being changed on the display screen of the display device 41. 721 is displayed. Further, as described above, the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are turned off during the setting change. In addition, the production control device 300 may perform notification that the setting is being changed by sound or voice together with the setting changing display 721.

  In FIG. 62 (shi), a customer waiting demonstration screen 722 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 in response to the game being enabled after the setting is changed. When the game is ready, the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are normally displayed, and a part of the upper effect unit 40c is lit or blinked in accordance with the customer waiting demonstration as shown in black in FIG. . As described above, the lamp display device 80 includes the lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) that execute variable display (flashing) as the fourth symbol (fourth special symbol), and the start memory number of each special symbol variable display game. Since it is composed of the notification lamp display section 3-6 (LED), it is turned off in the normal display (turned off display), but a part of it may be turned on or blinking according to the customer waiting demonstration.

  FIG. 62 (s) shows the display when the customer waiting demonstration is ended and the special figure fluctuation display game (fluctuation display game) is started by the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) or the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3206). 4 is a display screen of the device 41. The customer waiting demonstration screen 722 shown in FIG. 62 is hidden, and the decorative first symbols A to C are variably displayed in the variable display area 610 (left area 610A, right area 610B, middle area 610C). . In addition, the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are in an effect mode in which a part of the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are lit or blinked in accordance with the special figure variation display game. In the reserved digest area 640, a special figure fluctuation pending display 643 (starting memory display, special figure digestion pending display) corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game being executed (during digestion) is displayed. The hold display section 630 displays the first start memory and the second start memory that are on hold. For example, when the special figure variation display game is started after the customer waiting demonstration, as shown in FIG. 62 (), the hold display unit 630 has no first start memory or second start memory being held. .

[Modification of timing chart of fixed display period of probability setting value when setting is changed]
Next, with reference to FIG. 63, a modified example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting change (setting change mode, setting variable state) will be described. FIG. 63 is a timing chart showing a modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting change according to the third embodiment. In the following description of FIG. 63, FIG. 64, FIG. 66, and FIG.

  As described above, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x3 and the gaming machine state is switched from the setting change mode to the game ready state, the state display device 152 starts to blink completely.

  Then, at time x4 'when a predetermined time (predetermined period, for example, 0.5 sec) has elapsed from time x3, the state display device 152 switches the display from full blinking to probability setting value display (determined value). After the display is switched to the probability setting value display, the state display device 152 starts the performance display (characteristic ratio display and output rate display) at time x5 ′ when a predetermined time (predetermined period, for example, 2 to 3 seconds) has elapsed. Then, the ratio of the actors is displayed. As described above, the setting key switch 93 is turned off, and the state display device 152 is displayed in a blinking state in response to the change from the setting change mode to the game enabled state. Can be clearly indicated to the person. Further, since the set value determined by the probability set value display is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds), the game hall manager can confirm the determined set value as it is, thereby improving work efficiency. Can do.

  Similarly to FIG. 61, after the probability setting value is displayed, the performance display may be started after all blinking is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec) at time x5 ′.

[Second modified example of timing chart of fixed display period of probability setting value when setting is changed]
Next, a second modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting change (setting change mode, setting variable state) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a timing chart showing a second modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting change according to the third embodiment.

  As described above, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x3 and the gaming machine state is switched from the setting change mode to the game ready state, the state display device 152 starts the probability setting value display.

  Then, at time x4 when a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds) has elapsed from time x3, the state display device 152 switches the display from the probability setting value display to the notification display. The notification display is a display for notifying that the setting has been confirmed, as will be described later with reference to FIG. After switching the display to the notification display, the state display device 152 starts the performance display (the accessory ratio display and the payout ratio display) at a time x5 when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec) has elapsed, and displays the accessory ratio. indicate.

  At time x3, before the probability setting value display (determined value) is displayed on the state display device 152, it is possible to perform full blinking or notification display for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec). In addition, at time x3, when the notification display is performed before the probability setting value display (determined value) is displayed on the state display device 152, from the time x4 to the time x5 after the probability setting value display (determined value). Instead of performing the notification display, it is also possible to perform full blinking.

[Display mode when changing the setting of the status display device]
FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode at the time of setting change of the state display device 152 according to the second modification of the third embodiment.

  First, FIG. 65A shows a display mode of the state display device 152 when the power is turned off until time x2 in FIG. 64, and the four 7-segments (dot portions of the state display device 152 are shown). When included, all 8 segments) are turned off.

  FIG. 65B is a display mode of the state display device 152 when the probability setting value display (unconfirmed value, confirmed value) is displayed from time x2 to time x4. The current probability setting value (for example, “6”) is displayed in the digit 3, and the 7 segments (digit 2, digit 1, digit 0) other than the digit 3 are turned off. Note that the current probability setting value (for example, “6”) displayed in the leftmost digit 3 of the status display device 152 is blinked in the probability setting value display (undefined value) from time x2 to time x3, The probability setting value display (determined value) from x3 to time x4 is lit.

  FIG. 65 (c) shows a display mode of the state display device 152 when the notification display is performed from time x4 to time x5. Upper and lower bars indicating that the probability setting value has been confirmed are displayed in the digits 0 to 3 of the status display device 152. In addition, the notification display displayed in the digits 0 to 3 of the status display device 152 is not limited to the display using the upper and lower bars, and may be displayed in a display mode different from the probability setting value and the performance display.

  FIG. 65D shows a display mode of the status display device 152 that displays performance after time x5. In the status display device 152, as shown in FIG. 65 (d), the ball payout rate (for example, “b1.35”) with respect to the most recent predetermined number (for example, 10,000 shots) of discharged balls is displayed as a performance display. . It should be noted that the status display device 152 may display the total payout rate (for example, “bL.35” shown in FIG. 102), the base value, and the accessory ratio from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present. The display may be switched and displayed at a predetermined interval (for example, 2 to 3 sec).

[Third Modification of Timing Chart of Fixed Display Period of Probability Setting Value at Setting Change]
Next, a third modified example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting change (setting change mode, setting variable state) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a timing chart showing a third modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting change according to the third embodiment.

  As described above, after the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x3, when the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) or the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3206) is performed at time x4 '', the collective display is performed. The special figure display (display of the identification information) starts the fluctuation display from the off symbol that has been stopped on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 of the device 50, and the special figure fluctuation display game (variation display). Game) is started. At the same time, on the display screen of the display device 41, the waiting-for-customer demonstration is ended, and the decorative special figure variation display game (variation display game) is started. In response to the start of the special figure variation display game of the collective display device 50 (first display device) and the display device 41 (third display device), the lamp display device 80 uses the fourth figure special display variation game (variation display). Game) and the number of hold display are started, and the decoration device performs an effect corresponding display corresponding to the effect of the special figure variation display game.

  Then, at a time x5 ″ when a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec) has elapsed from the time x4 ″, the state display device 152 finishes all blinking and starts a performance display (a character ratio display or a play rate display). To do. Thus, by waiting for the elapse of the predetermined time and starting the all-flashing and performance display in response to the start of the special figure variation display game, information about the game can be displayed at an early stage. .

  The status display device 152 performs the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) or the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3206), that is, wins a game ball to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 or the start winning opening 36. The flashing is not limited to the mode of starting all flashing when there is a game, and all flashing may be started when a game ball wins at the general winning opening 35 or when the game ball passes through the normal start gate 34. . Further, as in the example in FIG. 61 described above, full blinking may be started when the front frame 12 (main body frame) is closed or when a touch switch signal of the operation handle 24 is detected.

[Fourth Modification of Timing Chart of Fixed Display Period of Probability Setting Value at Setting Change]
Next, a fourth modified example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting change (setting change mode, setting variable state) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67A is a timing chart showing a fourth modification example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value when the setting is changed according to the third embodiment.

  When the gaming machine 10 is powered on at time x2, the gaming machine state is set to the setting change mode, and the collective display device 50, the lamp display device 80, and the decoration device of the fourth modified example start blinking. At that time, the blinking cycle of the collective display device 50 is controlled by the segment LED editing process of FIG. 60, and the blinking cycles of the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device are also set to be the same as the blinking cycle of the collective display device 50. Thus, the flashing timing of each device is synchronized. The game control device 100 may send a command to the effect control device 300 to synchronize the blinking timing between the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device controlled by the effect control device 300 and the collective display device 50. When the state display device 152 blinks and the probability setting value is displayed, the blinking of the state display device 152 is controlled using the blinking control timer used in the segment LED editing process, and the batch display device 50 The blinking timing and the blinking timing of the status display device 152 may be synchronized.

  Note that the all-flash display of the collective display device 50 may be performed by all the display units (light emitting units, LED lamps D1-D18) as shown in FIG. 34F, or the display unit 51 for the special figure variation display game. , 52 (LED lamps D1, D2) alone. Moreover, you may make it perform the blink display of the collective display apparatus 50 by LED lamps (for example, LED lamp D3-D18) other than the display parts 51 and 52 (D1, D2) for special figure fluctuation display games.

  When the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x3, the gaming machine state changes from the setting change mode to the game ready state, and the collective display device 50, the lamp display device 80, and the decoration device end all blinking. At time x3, the collective display device 50 stops displaying the identification information of the symbols (this special figure display), and the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device are normally displayed. In addition, the status display device 152 displays the confirmed probability setting value (determined value) (probability setting value display). On the display screen of the display device 41, the setting change display is ended and the customer waiting demonstration is started.

  Subsequently, when a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 sec) elapses from time x3 and time x5 ′ ″ is reached, the state display device 152 ends the probability setting value display (determined value), and displays performance (function ratio display). And the display of the payout rate). As described above, in the state display device 152 according to the fourth modified example, after the probability setting value display (determined value) is finished, all the blinking is omitted and the performance display (the accessory ratio display and the output rate display) is immediately performed. As a result, the game hall manager can quickly check the play rate after changing the setting. At time x5 '' ', the special display variation display game (variation display game) is started on the collective display device 50 and the display device 41, and the special display variation display game (4th symbol) is displayed on the lamp display device 80. (Variable display game) and the number of holds are displayed, and the decoration device performs display corresponding to the effect of the special figure variable display game (effect corresponding display).

[Timing chart of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting confirmation]
Next, the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation state) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting determination according to the third embodiment.

  After the setting key switch 93 (setting key) is turned on at time x11, if the gaming machine 10 is turned on with the RAM initialization switch 112 turned off at time x12, the state of the gaming machine 10 ( The gaming machine state) enters the setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation state), and the state display device 152 displays the confirmed probability setting value (determined value) (probability setting value display). Then, a stop symbol is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 as shown in FIG. 69 described later (stop symbol display). Note that when the gaming machine state is in the setting confirmation mode, the collective display device 50, the lamp display device 80, and the decoration device are, for example, all the lighting states in which all the segments and LEDs are all lit (some lighting states). It may be) In addition, the collective display device 50 may display a stop symbol of the identification information of the previous special figure variation display game in the setting confirmation mode. Further, when shifting to the setting confirmation mode, the stop symbol displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 becomes the stop symbol of the identification information of the previous special figure variation display game.

  When the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x13, the gaming machine state changes from the setting confirmation mode to the game ready state, and the status display 152 displays a performance display (a character ratio display or a play rate display). The Further, in response to the gaming machine state being changed to the game-ready state at time x13, the collective display device 50 displays the symbol (identification information) displayed immediately before (when the power is turned off) as this special figure ( This special figure display (immediate display pattern)). Then, the customer waiting demonstration is started on the display screen of the display device 41, and the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device are normally displayed. As described above, when the setting confirmation state is switched to the game ready state, the performance information can be immediately displayed as the performance display on the state display device 152 (second display device). Can be improved.

  Note that the performance display is immediately displayed on the status display device 152 at time x13. However, as shown in the timing chart at the time of setting change shown in FIG. 5 sec) All blinking may be performed. In this way, between the setting confirmation mode and the game-ready state, by displaying the display (all blinking display) of the aspect different from the probability setting value and the performance display on the state display device 152, the game hall manager can It becomes easier to grasp the fact that the game has been switched to the playable state.

[Display screen example of display device when setting is changed]
FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device 41 (third display device) at the time of setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation state) according to the third embodiment. In FIG. 69, along with the display screen of the display device 41, the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c of the decoration device are also shown above the display screen. In the following description of FIGS. 69 and 71, the description overlapping with FIG. 62 will be omitted as appropriate.

  As shown in FIG. 69 (se), the effect control device 300 receives the command during the probability setting confirmation (A2508, B1327), and turns on the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c of the decoration device. As described above, the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device have a light emission mode different from that during the setting change (FIG. 62) during the setting confirmation. The production control device 300 may perform notification (through sound or the like) indicating that the setting is being confirmed along with all lighting of the lamp display device 80 and the upper production unit 40c. On the other hand, the display screen of the display device 41 displays the stop pattern (stop result) of the identification information of the previous special figure variation display game, and the display mode is such that it is not known that the setting is being confirmed.

  In FIG. 69 (so), a customer waiting demonstration screen 722 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 in response to the game being enabled after the setting is confirmed. When the game is enabled, the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are normally displayed.

  FIG. 69 (a) shows the case where the customer waiting demonstration is completed and the special figure fluctuation display game (fluctuation display game) is started by the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3202) or the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3206). 4 is a display screen of the display device 41. Similarly to FIG. 62 (su), the customer waiting demonstration screen 722 is hidden, the decorative first symbols A to C are displayed in a variable display area 620, and the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are changed in a special figure. It becomes the production | generation aspect which lights or blinks according to a display game.

[Modification of the timing chart of the fixed display period of the probability setting value when confirming the settings]
Next, a modified example of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation state) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a timing chart showing a modification of the timing of the fixed display period of the probability setting value at the time of setting confirmation according to the third embodiment. In the following description of FIG. 70, the description overlapping with FIG. 68 will be omitted as appropriate.

  As described above, when the gaming machine 10 is turned on with the RAM initialization switch 112 turned off at time x12, the gaming machine state is switched to the setting confirmation mode. In the setting check mode of this modification, a list of setting confirmation displays 723 that show the setting history of the probability setting values so far is displayed as a list on the display screen of the display device 41, as will be described later with reference to FIG. The display mode is such that it is understood that the setting is being confirmed (display during setting confirmation (setting history display)). In addition, the determined setting value is displayed on the status display device 152 (probability setting value display (determined value)), and the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device start blinking completely. The collective display device 50 is kept off. Note that the setting confirmation display is not limited to the setting history display, and any display mode that indicates that the setting confirmation is in progress may be used. For example, the fact that the setting confirmation is being performed may be displayed using characters or the like. Moreover, you may alert | report that it is confirming setting with a sound and an audio | voice with the display during setting confirmation.

  Thereafter, when the setting key switch 93 is turned off at time x13, the gaming machine state changes from the setting confirmation mode to the game ready state, and the display screen of the display device 41 ends the setting confirmation display (setting history display). Start a customer waiting demo. In response to the gaming machine state being changed to the game-ready state at time x13, the status display 152 displays a performance display (such as an accessory ratio display or a payout rate display), and the collective display device 50 immediately before ( The symbol (identification information) displayed at the time of power-off is displayed as this special symbol (this special symbol display (previously displayed symbol)). Further, the lamp display device 80 and the decoration device are normally displayed.

[Display screen example of display device when setting is changed]
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a modification of the display screen of the display device 41 at the time of setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation state) according to the third embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 71 (se '), the effect control device 300 displays the setting confirmation display 723 on the display screen of the display device 41 by receiving the command for confirming the probability setting (A2508, B1327). The setting confirmation display 723 is a display that can list the setting history of the probability setting values so far. For example, as shown in FIG. 61 (set '), the setting history number, date, changed setting contents, etc. are displayed as a list. The As described with reference to FIG. 59, every time the effect control device 300 receives a setting value information command at the end of setting change (the result of B5203 is “Y”), the setting value and the setting change date and time when the setting value is fixed. (Date and time of end of setting change) are associated with each other and stored in the FeRAM 323 (B5204). Therefore, the effect control device 300 reads the setting value and the setting change date / time from the FeRAM 323 to display a list of setting history of the probability setting value in the setting confirmation display 723. The lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c of the decoration device are all blinked during the setting confirmation mode.

  In FIG. 71 (so '), in response to the game being ready after the setting is confirmed, the customer waiting demonstration screen 722 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41, and the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are normally displayed. Display.

  71 (ta ') shows the display screen of the display device 41 when the customer waiting demonstration is completed and the special figure variable display game (variable display game) is started in the same manner as FIG. 62 (s) and FIG. 69 (t). It is. As for the display screen of the display device 41, the customer waiting demonstration screen 722 is not displayed, the decorative first symbols A to C are displayed in a variable display area 620, and the lamp display device 80 and the upper effect unit 40c are displayed in the special display variable display game. It becomes the production aspect which lights or blinks according to.

[Operation and Effect of Third Embodiment]
In the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the display result of a variable display game (special graphic variable display game) that displays the identification information (identification symbol, special special symbol) in a variable manner is a special result (a big hit result mode, a big hit stop symbol, Control means (game control device 100) is provided that can generate a special game state that gives a player a game value when a special result mode is reached. The gaming machine 10 is provided in a gaming area 32, and a winning area where a game ball can be won (a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36, a normal variable winning device 37, a special winning port of a special variable winning device 39), and a game When a ball wins a prize area, a payout control means (payout control apparatus 200) capable of paying out the number of prize balls determined for each prize area, and a first display apparatus (collective display) capable of displaying a display relating to a game Device 50), setting change means (setting change device 42, RAM initialization switch 112) that can change setting values (setting values, probability setting values) relating to game conditions, setting values, and winning balls obtained by winning The second display device (status display device) capable of displaying performance information derived based on the number (the ratio of the actors, the yield rate for the most recent predetermined number of ejected balls, the overall yield rate, the base value) 152). In response to the setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state) in which the setting value can be changed by the setting changing means, the control means changes the display of the first display device to a predetermined display mode (for example, a light off display) In response to the setting change state being changed to the game-ready state in which the setting value cannot be changed by the setting changing means, the set value determined on the second display device is set to a predetermined period (predetermined time, For example, it is possible to display over 2 to 3 seconds.

  According to such a gaming machine 10, when the setting value is switched from the setting change state to the game possible state in which the setting value cannot be changed, the setting value determined on the second display device can be confirmed for a predetermined period (predetermined time). Work efficiency of the site manager can be improved.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the control means (game control device 100) corresponds to the second state corresponding to the change from the setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state) to the game ready state. The set value determined on the display device (status display device 152) is a signal related to the game (for example, a detection signal when a game ball won in the normal variation winning device 37, the start winning port 36 or the general winning port 35 is detected, It is displayed until a signal notifying that a game ball has passed through the starting gate 34, a signal of the front frame opening detection switch 64, and a touch switch signal of the operation handle 24) are detected. According to such a gaming machine 10, performance information is displayed when a signal related to a game is detected, so that the game hall manager can confirm the performance information immediately after the setting is changed.

  In the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the display result of a variable display game (special graphic variable display game) that displays the identification information (identification symbol, special special symbol) in a variable manner is a special result (a big hit result mode, a big hit stop symbol, Control means (game control device 100) is provided that can generate a special game state that gives a player a game value when a special result mode is reached. The gaming machine 10 is provided in a gaming area 32, and a winning area where a game ball can be won (a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36, a normal variable winning device 37, a special winning port of a special variable winning device 39), and a game When a ball wins a prize area, a payout control means (payout control apparatus 200) capable of paying out the number of prize balls determined for each prize area, and a first display apparatus (collective display) capable of displaying a display relating to a game Device 50), setting confirmation means (setting key switch 92, RAM initialization switch 112) capable of confirming setting values (setting values, probability setting values) relating to game conditions, setting values, and winning balls obtained by winning The second display device (status display device) capable of displaying performance information derived based on the number (the ratio of the actors, the yield rate for the most recent predetermined number of ejected balls, the overall yield rate, the base value) 152). In response to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the setting value can be confirmed by the setting confirmation means, the control means changes the display of the first display device to a predetermined display mode (for example, full lighting display, previous time) In response to the fact that the setting confirmation state is changed to a gameable state in which the setting value cannot be confirmed by the setting confirmation means, the performance information is displayed on the second display device. Can be displayed.

  According to such a gaming machine 10, performance information can be immediately displayed on the second display device when the setting confirmation state is switched to the game ready state in which the setting value cannot be confirmed. Work efficiency can be improved.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment has a setting change unit (setting change) capable of changing a setting value (setting value, probability setting value) when being set to a setting change state (setting change mode, setting variable state). The apparatus 42 further includes a RAM initialization switch 112). The control means (game control device 100) displays when the display of the first display device (collective display device 50) is changed to the setting change state in response to the setting confirmation state (probability setting value display). Or a display different from the display related to the game (for example, all lighting display). According to such a gaming machine 10, since the display mode of the first display device is different in the setting confirmation state and the setting change state, the game hall manager can easily change the setting confirmation state and the setting change state. It is possible to distinguish between the two, and work efficiency can be improved.

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment includes a third display device (display device 41) capable of displaying an effect related to the variable display game (special figure variable display game), and an effect display on the third display device. Production control means (production control device 300). The effect control means displays the setting change history on the third display device in response to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode). According to such a gaming machine 10, even when the first display device (collective display device 50) is not in a display mode that indicates that it is in the setting confirmation state, the game hall manager can set from the third display device. It can be seen that it is in the confirmation state, and the setting history can be confirmed.

  In response to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode), the control means (game control device 100) changes the display mode of the first display device (collective display device 50) to the immediately preceding variation display game (special figure variation). The display result of the display game) (stop symbol, identification information) is displayed. According to such a gaming machine 10, since the display mode of the first display device is different in the setting confirmation state and the setting change state, the game hall manager can easily change the setting confirmation state and the setting change state. It is possible to distinguish between the two, and work efficiency can be improved. In addition, since it is not necessary to cause the first display device to perform a dedicated display mode in the setting confirmation state, it is possible to reduce the processing load and data amount accordingly.

  The control means (game control device 100) responds to the second display device (state display device 152) with the performance information (role ratio, latest information) in response to the change from the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) to the game enabled state. The ball output rate, the overall game output rate, and the base value for a predetermined number of discharged balls are immediately displayed. According to such a gaming machine 10, the game hall manager can immediately check the performance information by changing the setting check state to the game ready state, so that the work efficiency can be improved.

  The control means (game control device 100) has changed the display of the second display device (state display device 152) to the setting confirmation state in response to the change from the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) to the game enabled state. The display is different from the display of time (probability setting value display) or performance information (role ratio, number of balls for the last predetermined number of balls to be thrown, overall number of balls to be played, base value). After making the display of the display device different, the performance information is displayed on the second display device. According to the gaming machine 10 as described above, the display in a mode different from these displays is displayed on the second display device immediately after the game is enabled, so that the game hall manager switches to the game enabled state. It will be easier to grasp this more reliably.

[Fourth Embodiment]
The fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to third embodiments. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those in the first to third embodiments, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate.

  FIG. 72 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of a game control system according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 73 is a diagram illustrating addresses of input ports in the game control apparatus 100 according to the fourth embodiment and signals input to the respective input ports.

  The game control system in the fourth embodiment is basically the same as that in the third embodiment (FIG. 56), but there are some differences as follows.

  In the third embodiment, the setting key switch 93, the setting value change switch 102, and the RAM initialization switch 112 are all connected to the same input port (input port 123) (FIG. 56).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 72, in the fourth embodiment, the RAM initialization switch 112 is connected to the input port 123, and the setting value change switch 102 and the setting key switch 93 are connected to the input port 124. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112, the setting value change switch 102, and the setting key switch 93 are different from the third embodiment in that they are connected to different input ports.

  As described above, when the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on when the power is turned on, the state shifts to the setting variable state (see FIG. 57).

  At that time, in the third embodiment, the gaming microcomputer 111 constituting the gaming control device 100 designates the address of the input port 123, turns on the RAM initialization switch 112 from the input port 123, and sets the setting key switch 93. An on signal is acquired.

  On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, the gaming microcomputer 111 acquires the ON signal of the RAM initialization switch 112 from the input port 123 by specifying the address (81H, FIG. 73) of the input port 123, and the address of the input port 124. (82H, FIG. 73) is designated and the ON signal of the setting key switch 93 is acquired from the input port 124.

  That is, in the fourth embodiment, the input ports (122, 123, 124) from which the above-described ON signal is acquired may be different from each other. For example, the gaming microcomputer 111 does not designate the address (82H, FIG. 73) of the input port 124 in order to acquire the ON signal of the RAM initialization switch 112, but to acquire the ON signal of the setting key switch 93. The address (81H, FIG. 73) of the input port 123 is not designated.

  As shown in FIG. 73, the input port 122 (address: 80H (hexadecimal notation)), the input port 123 (address: 81H (hexadecimal notation)), and the input port 124 (address: H82 (hexadecimal notation)) are They have different addresses.

  Each input port is assigned such that various signals (ON signal, OFF signal) are input. In the same input port, various signals can be identified by the positions of bits (b0 to b6). Note that the number of signals that can be connected to one input port can be increased or decreased by increasing or decreasing the number of bits.

  Also, in the following, regarding the presence / absence of signal abnormality and switch operation, negative logic (for example, there is an abnormality or operation when the signal is off) and positive logic (abnormality or operation when the signal is on) Yes), but may be unified to either negative logic or positive logic.

  The input port 122 (80H) includes, for example, a frame radio wave illegal signal (b0), a payout busy signal (b1), a payout abnormality status signal (b2), a shot ball break switch signal (b3), an overflow switch signal (b4), The touch switch signal (b5) and the out-sphere detection switch signal (b6) are input. Various signals including those described later have been described in the first embodiment.

  If the frame radio wave illegal signal (b0) is on (High: 1), it indicates that a frame radio wave error has occurred, and if it is off (Low: 0), it indicates that it is normal (no abnormality). Yes.

  If the payout busy signal (b1) is on (High: 1), the payout command transmission is prohibited, and if it is off (Low: 0), the payout command can be transmitted.

  If the payout abnormality status signal (b2) is on (High: 1), it indicates that there is an abnormality in payout, and if it is off (Low: 0), it indicates that it is normal (no abnormality).

  When the shot ball break switch signal (b3) is on (High: 1), it indicates that the shot ball is broken, and when it is off (Low: 0), it indicates normal (no abnormality). .

  When the overflow flow switch signal (b4) is on (High: 1), it indicates an overflow state, and when it is off (Low: 0), it indicates normal (no abnormality).

  If the touch switch signal (b5) is on (High: 1), it indicates that the operation handle 24 (Fig. 3) is touched, and if it is off (Low: 0), it indicates that the touch is not touched. Yes.

  If the out sphere detection switch signal (b6) is on (High: 1), it indicates that an out sphere is detected, and if it is off (Low: 0), it indicates that no out sphere is detected. Yes. In addition, you may apply the structure which detects a launch ball instead of the structure which detects an out sphere.

  The input port 123 (81H) includes, for example, a panel radio wave sensor signal (b0), an abnormality detection signal (b1), a magnetic sensor signal (b2), a glass frame opening detection switch signal (b3), and a body frame opening detection switch signal ( b4), a RAM initialization switch signal (b5), and a power failure monitoring signal (b6) are input.

  If the panel radio wave sensor signal (b0) is on (High: 1), it indicates normal (no abnormality), and if it is off (Low: 0), it indicates that a panel radio wave error has occurred.

  If the abnormality detection signal (b1) is on (High: 1), it indicates that an abnormality has occurred according to the abnormality detection signal (first embodiment), and if it is off (Low: 0), it is normal (no abnormality). It is shown that.

  When the magnetic sensor signal (b2) is on (High: 1), it indicates normal (no abnormality), and when it is off (Low: 0), the magnetic sensor switch 61 indicates that a magnetic error has occurred. (FIG. 72) shows that it has been detected.

  If the glass frame open detection switch signal (b3) is ON (High: 1), it indicates that the glass frame open detection switch 63 (FIG. 72) has detected that the glass frame 15 (FIG. 1) is closed. If it is off (Low: 0), it indicates that an open state is detected.

  If the main body frame open detection switch signal (b4) is ON (High: 1), the front frame open detection switch 64 (FIG. 72) detects that the main body frame (front frame 12, FIG. 1) is closed. If it is off (Low: 0), it indicates that an open state is detected.

  If the RAM initialization switch signal (b5) is on (High: 1), it indicates that the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (not pressed), and if it is off (Low: 0), it is on ( It indicates that the status is “pressed” (setting changeable transition status).

  When the power failure monitoring signal (b6) is on (High: 1), it indicates normal (no abnormality), and when it is off (Low: 0), it indicates that a power failure has occurred.

  The input port 124 (82H) includes, for example, a gate switch signal (b0), a winning opening switch signal (b1), a big winning opening switch signal (b2), a starting opening 1 switch signal (b3), and a starting opening 2 switch signal ( b4), a set value change switch signal (b5) and a set key switch signal (b6) are input.

  If the gate switch signal (b0) is ON (High: 1), it indicates that the gate switch 34a (FIG. 72) has detected a game ball passing through the normal start gate 34 (FIG. 2), and OFF (Low: 0) indicates that no detection has been made.

  If the winning opening switch signal (b1) is ON (High: 1), it indicates that the winning opening switch 35a (FIG. 72) has detected a game ball that has won the general winning opening 35 (FIG. 2). : 0) indicates no detection.

  If the big winning opening switch signal (b2) is ON (High: 1), the big winning opening switch 39a (count switch 39a) (FIG. 72) indicates that the game ball won in the big winning opening (special variable winning device 39). It indicates that it has been detected, and if it is off (Low: 0), it indicates that it has not been detected.

  If the start port 1 switch signal (b3) is ON (High: 1), it indicates that the start port 1 switch 36a has detected that a game ball has won the start winning port 36, and is OFF (Low: 0). If it exists, it indicates that it has not been detected.

  If the start port 2 switch signal (b4) is on (High: 1), it indicates that the start port 2 switch 37a has detected that a game ball has won the normal variation winning device 37, and is off (Low: 0). Indicates that no detection has been made.

  If the set value change switch signal (b5) is on (High: 1), it indicates that the set value change switch 102 is off (not pressed), and if it is off (Low: 0), it is on ( It is in a pressed state).

  When the setting key switch signal (b6) is on (High: 1), it indicates that the setting key switch 93 is in an off state (setting change prohibited state), and when it is off (Low: 0), it is on (setting). This indicates that the change is allowed.

  Here, when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, when the setting key switch signal (b6) input to the input port 124 is ON (Low: 0) (setting change allowable state), the input is made to the input port 123. When the RAM initialization switch signal (b5) to be set is turned on (Low: 0), a setting changeable transition state is entered, and the setting value can be changed by operating the setting value change switch 102.

  Among the above signals, signals related to the setting change include a setting value change switch signal input to the input port 124, a setting key switch signal input to the input port 124, and a RAM initialization switch signal input to the input port 123. However, each signal can be arbitrarily input to any of the input port 122, the input port 123, and the input port 124.

  However, if the switch is connected so that the set value change switch signal, the set key switch signal, and the RAM initialization switch signal are input to the same input port, the same setting is made when a malicious player or the like changes the setting. There is a risk that fraud can be easily performed by simply crafting the input port.

  Therefore, at least one of the setting value change switch signal (setting value change switch 102), the setting key switch signal (setting key switch 93), and the RAM initialization switch signal (RAM initialization switch 112) is in the other input port. It is preferable to design so that it inputs into this.

  Alternatively, the setting key switch signal (setting key switch 93) and the RAM initialization switch signal (RAM initialization switch 112) are preferably designed to be input to different input ports.

  It is also preferable to design the setting key switch signal (setting key switch 93) and the setting value change switch signal (setting value change switch 102) to be input to the same input port. Thereby, the RAM initialization switch 112 is connected to the same input port 123 as the front frame opening detection switch 64, for example. Therefore, if the game control device 100 of the fourth embodiment is installed without the wiring from the setting key switch 93 and the setting value change switch 102 to the input port 124, the gaming machine as a gaming machine having no setting change function is implemented. Since the machine can be operated, the versatility of the game control device 100 can be enhanced.

[Operations and effects of the fourth embodiment]
As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment includes at least two switches (any two of the setting key switch 93, the RAM initialization switch 112, and the setting value change switch 102), and supports settings related to gaming. Setting change means (setting key switch 93, RAM initialization switch 112, setting value change switch 102) capable of changing the set value to be set, and control means (game microcomputer 111) capable of controlling the game result based on the set value And comprising. Signals from the two switches are input to the control means (the gaming microcomputer 111) via different input ports (for example, the input port 123 and the input port 124).

  In addition, the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment allows setting change of setting value setting means (gaming microcomputer 111) and setting value setting means (gaming microcomputer 111) in which setting values are set in accordance with settings relating to the game. Setting permission / inhibition switching means (setting key switch 93) that can be switched between a state and a setting change prohibition state, and a setting value setting means (game microcomputer 111) that can be set and changed by being operated under the setting change permission state. And a setting changeable transfer means (RAM initialization switch 112) for shifting to (1). The setting permission / denial switching means (setting key switch 93) and the setting changeable transition means (RAM initialization switch 112) are respectively set value setting means (game) via different input ports (for example, input port 123 and input port 124). Microcomputer 111).

  With the above configuration, the switch relating to the setting change (setting permission / denial switching means (setting key switch 93) and setting change enable transition means (RAM initialization switch 112)) are connected to different input ports. It is possible to prevent setting changes due to.

  Further, the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment allows setting change of setting value setting means (gaming microcomputer 111) and setting value setting means (gaming microcomputer 111) in which setting values are set in accordance with settings relating to the game. Setting permission switching means (setting key switch 93) that can be switched between a state and a setting change prohibited state, and setting value setting means (gaming microcomputer 111) shifts to a setting changeable state by operating under the setting change permission state. A setting changeable transition means (RAM initialization switch 112) to be set and a setting operation means (setting value change switch 102) capable of operating the setting value setting means (gaming microcomputer 111) to change the setting value. Prepare. Setting permission switching means (setting key switch 93), setting change enable transition means (RAM initialization switch 112), and setting operation means (setting value change switch 102) are set via input ports (input ports 122-124). It is connected to value setting means (game microcomputer 111). At least one of the setting permission switching unit (setting key switch 93), the setting change enable transition unit (RAM initialization switch 112), and the setting operation unit (setting value change switch 102) is different from the remaining one. It is connected to input ports (for example, input port 123 and input port 124).

  With the above configuration, at least one of the switches related to the setting change (setting permission / rejection switching means (setting key switch 93), setting change enable transition means (RAM initialization switch 112), setting operation means (setting value change switch 102)). Since it is connected to another input port, it is possible to prevent setting changes caused by fraudulent players such as malicious players.

  In the fourth embodiment, the setting permission / denial switching means (setting key switch 93) and the setting operation means (setting value change switch 102) are connected to the same input port (input port 124).

  With the above configuration, the setting changeable transition means (RAM initialization switch 112) is connected to the same input port 123 as the front frame opening detection switch 64, for example. Therefore, if the game control means (game control device 100) is implemented without wiring from the setting permission / rejection switching means and the setting operation means to the input port 124, the gaming machine is regarded as a gaming machine having no setting change function. Since it can be operated, the versatility of the game control means (game control device 100) can be enhanced.

[Fifth Embodiment]
The fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to fourth embodiments. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those in the first to fourth embodiments, and repeated descriptions are omitted as appropriate. The fifth embodiment relates to a setting suggesting effect that suggests a setting value corresponding to a setting related to a game.

  Conventionally, there is a gaming machine that performs a setting suggestion effect that is a suggestion of a setting value under a specific condition. On the other hand, when a hot performance appears, there is a problem that the player stops launching a game ball even in a situation where a hold is stored. Therefore, the fifth embodiment aims to improve the interest of the game by performing an effect in which the suggestion of the set value and the hold are associated with each other.

  FIG. 74 is a front view of the game board 30 according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 75 shows the relationship between the number of holds and the occurrence probability of the setting suggestion effect (FIG. 75A) according to the fifth embodiment, and the relationship between the number of holds, the set value, and the lighting probability of red lighting (FIG. 75B). ).

  As shown in FIG. 74, an LED 36b (production means, lighting means) is arranged in the start winning opening 36 arranged in the lower part of the game board 30. The game board 30 in FIG. 74 is the same as the game board 30 in FIG. 2A except for the LED 36b. The LED 36b is configured, for example, as a part of the panel decoration device 46 (FIG. 4), and, as will be described later, by lighting information (setting suggestion effect information) transmitted from the effect control device 300 (main control microcomputer 311). A setting suggestion effect for suggesting a set value is performed.

  The LED 36b is, for example, a light emitting device capable of individually driving a light emitting member (LED) that emits red light, a light emitting member (LED) that emits white light, and a light emitting member (LED) that emits blue light. (LED) emits light.

  Note that the LED 36b can be attached to the general winning opening 35 and the normal variable winning apparatus 37, for example, instead of the start winning opening 36, and the large winning opening LED 39d can be substituted.

  As shown in FIG. 75A, the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 shows the relationship between the number of holds (the first start memory number or the second start memory number) and the occurrence probability of the setting suggestion effect. For example, the table is stored in the RAM 322 (FIG. 4). The table also includes the probability of occurrence in the case of an overflow that is greater than the maximum starting memory number (4).

  Also, the main control microcomputer 311 selects the occurrence probability from the table shown in FIG. 75A based on the hold number command (decoration special figure hold number command) transmitted from the game control device 100, and the selected occurrence A calculation function is also provided for determining whether or not to perform a setting suggestion effect by drawing with probability.

  When the main control microcomputer 311 determines that the setting suggestion effect is to be performed by winning the lottery, the setting suggestion effect information (lighting information) is transmitted to the LED 36b (via the panel decoration LED control circuit 332 (FIG. 4)). It transmits to the board decoration apparatus 46).

  In FIG. 75 (A), the setting suggestion effect is set such that the probability of occurrence of setting suggestion increases as the number of holds increases. For example, when the number of holds is zero, the occurrence probability of the setting suggestion effect is 1/500, when the number of reservations is 1, the probability of occurrence of the setting suggestion effect is 1/300, and the setting is when the number of holds is 2 The occurrence probability of the suggestion effect is set to 1/100, the occurrence probability of the setting suggestion effect when the number of holds is 3 is set to 1/30, and the occurrence probability of the setting suggestion effect when the number of holds is 4 is 1/10. And the occurrence probability of the setting suggestion effect when the number of holds is overflow is set to 1/5. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, even when a hot performance appears during a game, by storing the number of holds, it is possible to provide pleasure for discriminating a set value in addition to pleasure for prefetching. It can enhance interest. In particular, when the occurrence probability of the setting suggestion effect is increased as the number of reservations increases, the motivation for storing the number of reservations can be further increased, and the interest of the game can be further increased.

  The game control device 100 (FIG. 72) can transmit not only the hold number command but also set value information representing the set value to the effect control device 300. The main control microcomputer 311 (FIG. 4) of the effect control device 300 turns on the LED 36b a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) based on the lighting information, and for example, how many times red (or other colors) is lit. The setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value is performed. The setting suggestion effect reflects the setting value and the number of holds. That is, the lighting probability of red lighting in the LED 36b varies depending on the set value and the number of holds.

  As shown in FIG. 75B, the main control microcomputer 311 stores, for example, a RAM 322 (FIG. 4) in a table showing the relationship between the number of red lighting on-holds and the set value. Here, in FIG. 75 (B), the lighting probability is set on the assumption that the larger the set value, the higher the probability of hitting and the probability of hitting as shown in FIG. 24 (A).

  The main control microcomputer 311 generates lighting information (setting suggestion effect information) that the LED 36b is lit 20 times. In each lighting, a signal for lighting one of red lighting, white lighting, and blue lighting is predetermined lighting. Include with probability. Among them, the lighting probability of red lighting is extracted from the table of FIG. 75B using the setting value information and the number of hold information transmitted from the game control device 100. For example, if the lighting probability of red lighting is set to 20%, the lighting probability of white lighting and the lighting probability of blue lighting can be set to 40%, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (B), when the number of holdings is zero, the lighting probability of red lighting is 20 percent at the setting value 1-3, and the lighting probability of red lighting is 40 percent at the setting value 4-6. As a result, of the 20 lightings, the red lighting is on average 4 times for the setting value 1-3, the average lighting 8 times for the setting value 4-6, and any one of the setting values 1-3 depending on the difference in the average lighting frequency. Or any one of the set values 4-6.

  When the number of holds is 1, the setting probability 1-2 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 10%, the setting value 3 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 20%, and the setting value 4-6 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 40%. Percentage. As a result, during the lighting 20 times, the red light is lit twice on average for the set value 1-2, lit four times on the average for the set value 3, and lit eight times on the average for the set value 4-6. Depending on the difference, it is possible to indicate whether the value is any one of the setting value 1-2, the setting value 3, or the setting value 4-6.

  When the number of holdings is 2, the setting value 1 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 5%, the setting value 2 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 15%, and the setting value 3 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 25%. In the value 4-6, the lighting probability of red lighting is 40%. As a result, during 20 lightings, the red lighting is on average once at the set value 1, on average 3 times at the set value 2, on average 5 times at the set value 3, and on average 8 at the set value 4-6. It is possible to indicate whether it is the set value 1, the set value 2, the set value 3, or the set value 4-6 by the difference in the average number of times of lighting. .

  When the number of holdings is 3, setting value 1 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 5%, setting value 2 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 15%, setting value 3 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 25%, and setting At a value of 4, the lighting probability of red lighting is 35%, and at a setting value of 5-6, the lighting probability of red lighting is 40%. As a result, during 20 lightings, the red lighting is on average once for setting value 1, on average 3 times for setting value 2, on average 5 times for setting value 3, and on average 7 times for setting value 4. In the set value 5-6, the light is lit 8 times on average, and the set value 1 is set to 2, the set value 2, the set value 3, the set value 4 or the set value depending on the difference in the average lighting count. 5-6 can be suggested.

  When the number of holds is 4, the setting value 1 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 5%, the setting value 2 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 15%, and the setting value 3 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 25%. A value 4 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 35%, a setting value 5 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 40%, and a setting value 6 sets the lighting probability of red lighting to 45%. As a result, during 20 lightings, the red lighting is on average once for setting value 1, on average 3 times for setting value 2, on average 5 times for setting value 3, and on average 7 times for setting value 4. Then, the set value 5 is lit 8 times on average, the set value 6 is lit 9 times on average, and it is possible to indicate which of the set values 1-6 is due to the difference in the average number of times of lighting.

  Note that, as described above, the difference between the lighting probabilities of the red lighting of the setting value 4, the setting value 5 and the setting value 6 (5%) is the interval of the difference of the lighting probability of the red lighting of the setting value 1-4 (10 It is possible to make the setting value 6 having the highest jackpot probability and the highest jackpot probability not easily suggested.

  In the above description, the LED 36b lights up three colors of red, white, and blue. However, only the red light may be turned on, and the number of times of lighting may be changed according to the set value regardless of the number of holdings. For example, the set value and the number of times of lighting may be related by some function such that the number of times of lighting = set value + 2 and the number of times of lighting = set value × 2. More simply, the number of lighting times may be set to a set value. However, in the above aspect, the set value is explicitly or indirectly specified, and there is a possibility that the player may concentrate on the gaming machine 10 having the set value having a high jackpot probability. (Occurrence probability of lighting information) is preferably set lower than the occurrence probability shown in FIG.

  In the fifth embodiment, the effect control device 300 can execute a setting suggestion effect (transmission of lighting information) at a predetermined timing related to a game. For example, as shown in FIG. 74, when a game ball wins the start winning opening 36, the production control device 300 can transmit lighting information and light the LED 36b with the occurrence probability of FIG. 75 (A). is there. More specifically, when the production control device 300 receives the hold number command (decoration special figure hold number command) transmitted from the game control device 100, the lighting information (setting suggestion) based on the occurrence probability of FIG. Production information) is transmitted to the LED 36b. As a result, a setting suggestion effect can occur with a predetermined probability of occurrence along with a winning of a game ball at the start opening 36, so that the game can be naturally enjoyed by attracting the player's attention. Can be improved. In particular, when the hold is in an overflow state, the occurrence probability (1/5) of the setting suggestion effect becomes extremely high, and the above average number of lighting times can be easily understood, so that the interest of the game can be further improved.

  As another timing, when the power supply device 400 (FIG. 4) is turned on, when the special figure fluctuation display game is executed at a predetermined number of revolutions after the power is turned on, the special figure fluctuation display game is predetermined after the first (or last) jackpot. Is performed a number of times, after a certain number of missed positions after reach, during a small hit, during a jackpot, during a jackpot ending, during a jackpot ending, during a regular performance by the RTC 338 (FIG. 4), during normal times During the character production, there is a customer waiting, and the lighting information may be transmitted with the probability of FIG. 75A at any one of these timings. Moreover, you may combine the timing of these events suitably.

  In the fifth embodiment, in addition to the LED 36b, the occurrence frequency of a small hit, the occurrence frequency of a delay effect, the stop frequency of a specific symbol in a special symbol variation display game, a specific appearance in a special symbol variation display game (specific off-line stop) The setting value setting suggestion effect may be performed according to the frequency of occurrence of the symbol), or some setting suggestion effect may be performed on the display device 41 in accordance with the above timing.

  In addition, you may perform the setting suggestion effect which is an effect which suggests the setting value (B1323) according to the setting regarding a game with the following method. Hereinafter, another example of the setting suggestion effect will be described.

  As another example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed on the display device 41 during the big hit state (special game state), thereby improving the interest of the game. The production control device 300 is displayed on the display device 41 in each color every time a game ball wins a special winning opening of the special variable winning device 39, that is, every time a special winning count command (B1321 count command) is received. A colored coin image (an image imitating a coin) is displayed. For example, the color of the coin image is red when the set values are 1 and 6, yellow when the set values are 2 and 5, and blue when the set values are 3 and 4. Here, each color of the coin image corresponds to each combination of the low setting value (1, 2, 3) and the high setting value (4, 5, 6). The color of the coin image may be red when the set values are 1, 2, and 3, and yellow when the set values are 4, 5, and 6. As a part of the ending effect set in the ending effect setting process (B2111), the total number of coin images displayed in the big hit state is notified on the display device 41.

  Note that the color of the coin image may be determined by lottery. If the set values are 1 and 6, red may be selected with a higher selection probability than other colors. The red may be selected when the set values are 2 and 5, and the blue when the set values are 3 and 4. For example, when 120 game balls are won in the big winning opening in the big win state, 60 red coin images, 30 yellow coins and 30 blue coins are displayed, the player sets It can be inferred that the value is 1 or 6.

  As yet another example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed on the display device 41 during a setting notification period (for example, 10 minutes) provided every predetermined time (for example, 1 hour), thereby improving the interest of the game. . The effect control device 300 executes the setting suggestion effect using the off-stop symbol (B2012) of the decorative special figure variation display game in the setting notification period. The production control device 300 can determine whether or not it is the set notification period from the RTC 338 or the time timer.

  For example, if the set value is 5, the production control device 300 sets the outage stop symbol of the first decoration special figure variation display game in the setting notification period to “1, 2, 3” and the second decoration special. The outlier stop symbol of the figure variation display game is set to “1, 3, 3”, and the outlier stop symbol of the third decoration special figure variation display game is set to “2, 5, 6”. In this way, the production control device 300 gradually causes the values near the set value to be included in the numbers of the stoppage symbols as time passes, and the numbers corresponding to the set values deviate at the end of the setting notification period. It should be included in the stop symbol. It should be noted that it may be approximated to the set value while increasing / decreasing the numbers of the stoppage symbols.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 executes the setting suggestion effect using only the special stoppage symbol (B2012) of the decoration special figure change display game for a specific predetermined number of times (for example, the first time) in the setting notification period. You may make it do.

[Operation and Effect of Fifth Embodiment]
As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment can execute the game control means (game control device 100) capable of controlling the result of the game based on the setting value corresponding to the setting related to the game, and the effect. A variable display game that includes presentation means (LED 36b, display device 41) and presentation control means (production control device 300) capable of controlling the presentation means (LED 36b, display device 41) and displays identification information as a game in a variable manner. It is feasible. The gaming machine 10 includes start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing start storage that is the right to execute a variable display game. The game control means (game control device 100) transmits set value information indicating the set value to the effect control means (effect control device 300), and the effect control means (effect control device 300) is based on the set value information. A setting suggesting effect that suggests a setting value can be executed by the effecting means. The setting suggesting effect is executed with a predetermined probability (occurrence probability), and the probability (occurrence probability) is set to the number of start memories (the number of holds). Set based on.

  With the above configuration, even if a hot production appears during a game, by accumulating the number of reservations, in addition to the enjoyment of prefetching, it is possible to provide enjoyment of determining the set value, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. .

  In the fifth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) sets the probability (occurrence probability) higher as the number of start memories (the number of holds) is larger.

  Thereby, the motivation which accumulate | stores the number of reservations can be raised further, and the interest of a game can be raised further.

  In the fifth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) changes the setting suggestion effect based on the number of start memories (the number of holds) (and the set value).

  As a result, various setting suggestion effects such as a setting suggestion effect that makes it easy to determine the set value and a setting suggestion effect that makes it difficult to determine the set value become possible, and the fun of the game can be enhanced.

  In the fifth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute the setting suggestion effect at a predetermined timing related to the game.

  Thereby, since the opportunity to suggest a setting value increases, the interest of a game can be improved.

  In the fifth embodiment, the effect means (LED 36b) includes a lighting means (LED 36b) that can suggest a set value by a light emission mode (for example, 20 times lighting) as a setting suggestion effect, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) The lighting means (LED 36b) can be controlled based on the lighting information representing the light emission mode, and the lighting information can be generated based on the probability (occurrence probability) and transmitted to the lighting means (LED 36b).

  Thereby, a setting value can be suggested with a simple configuration.

  In the fifth embodiment, the lighting means (LED 36b) is capable of lighting a plurality of colors of light different from each other, and lighting information includes a plurality of times each time the lighting means is turned on while being turned on a plurality of times (for example, turned on 20 times). This is information for selecting one of the colors of light, and suggests a setting value based on the number of times the light of a specific color (red) is turned on.

  With the above configuration, the setting value can be suggested more clearly with a simple configuration.

  In the fifth embodiment, the lighting means (LED 36b) is attached to a start opening (start winning opening 36) that can generate a start memory (holding) when a game ball wins, and an effect control means (effect control device 300). Can generate lighting information based on the probability (occurrence probability) and transmit it to the lighting means (LED 36b) when winning the game ball at the start opening (start winning opening 36).

  With the above configuration, a setting suggestion effect can occur with a predetermined probability of occurrence along with a game ball winning at the start opening, so that it naturally enters the eyes of the player and draws the player's attention to enhance the interest of the game Can be improved.

[Sixth Embodiment]
The sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 78. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to fifth embodiments. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those in the first to fifth embodiments, and duplicate descriptions are omitted as appropriate. The sixth embodiment relates to an error code that collectively displays the presence or absence of a plurality of errors.

  FIG. 76 shows the relationship between error priorities and error code bits according to the sixth embodiment (FIG. 76 (A)), and error code (binary) and error code (hexadecimal) notation (FIG. 76 ( It is a figure which shows B)). FIG. 77 is a display example of error codes and error contents according to the sixth embodiment, and when there are two errors (left: binary notation, right: hexadecimal notation) (FIG. 77 (A)), an error Shows a case where one error is eliminated (FIG. 77B) and a case where all errors are eliminated (FIG. 77C).

  The sixth embodiment is characterized in that, when an error occurs in the gaming machine 10, an error code (error code 341, 342) including the error is displayed on the display device 41 (FIG. 77).

  As shown in FIGS. 76 (A) and 76 (B), the error code is a collective display of presence / absence information in which presence / absence of a plurality of error contents generated in the gaming machine 10 is coded. , And can be displayed in hexadecimal notation. In hexadecimal notation, binary notation b0 to b3 is a lower bit and binary notation b4 to b7 is an upper bit.

  Here, the error content displayed in FIG. 76 (A) is a part of the error content generated in the gaming machine 10 as an example, and there are actually more error content, but the explanation is as follows. Other error details are omitted for simplicity. Therefore, the number of bits in binary notation and hexadecimal notation changes according to the number of error contents.

  The error content displayed in FIG. 76A is associated with priority information. The priority information is a list of priorities of error contents to be solved by the game hall manager or staff. Therefore, the relationship between each error content and priority is in principle unchanged.

  On the other hand, the relationship between the priority order (error contents) and the bits (b0-b6) is arbitrary. Therefore, in FIG. 76A, the bit order and the priority (error contents) are matched, but the priority (error contents) can be set at random for the bits.

  Information of the table shown in FIG. 76A is stored in the RAM 322 or the FeRAM 323 of the effect control device 300 (FIG. 4). The information in the table also includes character information (character information 343) indicating the error content.

  The production control device 300 generates error codes 341 and 342 (FIG. 76B) based on the error command transmitted from the game control device 100.

  The game control device 100 performs error detection of the gaming machine 10. The game control device 100 detects a magnet fraud monitoring process that detects a magnetic error that is an abnormality detection of the magnetic sensor switch 61 (FIG. 6, A1315), and a board radio wave fraud monitoring process that detects a board radio wave error that is an abnormality detection of the radio wave sensor 62. (FIG. 6, A1316), to fraud & prize management processing (FIG. 8, A2004, A2006) for detecting a prize-winning error that is an illegal prize to the prize-winning mouth, to the normal variable prize-winning device 37 (second start prize-winning mouth) An illegal & winning management process (FIG. 8, A2008) for detecting a public power error, which is an illegal prize, is transmitted, and an error command (including an illegal command) corresponding to each error is transmitted. In addition, by referring to the gaming state monitoring table 1 (first embodiment), a frame radio wave error that is an abnormality in the frame radio wave illegal signal, and a glass that is a detection of the open state of the glass frame 15 by the glass frame open detection switch 63. Frame open error, front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) detects front frame 12 (main frame) open state detection, main frame open error, and switch detection error generation error detection signal respectively. Then, an error command indicating the presence or absence of each error content is transmitted (FIG. 9, A2204, A2207). By executing the error / unauthorized setting process (FIG. 39, B1316), the effect control device 300 receives the error command.

  As shown in FIG. 77 (A), the effect control device 300 can display error codes 341 and 342 on the display device 41. At this time, the error code 341 can be expressed in binary as shown on the left side, and the error code 342 can be expressed in hexadecimal as shown on the right side. Thereby, by grasping the correspondence between the error codes 341 and 342 and the error contents in advance, the error contents can be immediately grasped by displaying the error codes 341 and 342. Further, by using binary notation, it is possible to immediately grasp the presence / absence of each error and the number of errors.

  Note that the error code 341 (binary notation: 00010010) and the error code 342 (hexadecimal notation: 12) in FIG. 77 (A) have a “panel radio wave error” and a “frame radio wave error” occurring simultaneously. Respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 77 (A), the effect control device 300 can display character information 343 representing the error contents adjacent to the error codes 341 and 342. The character information 343 represents, for example, the error content with the highest priority among the error contents corresponding to the code (presence information) that is present in the error code 341, that is, is “1” in binary notation. ing. According to FIG. 77 (A), since the error content with the highest priority is “panel radio wave error”, the character information 343 of “panel radio wave error” is displayed on the display device 41. By displaying the character information 343 in this way, it is possible to immediately grasp the error contents to be preferentially solved.

  The error codes 341 and 342 and the character information 343 are always displayed if any error occurs after the power is turned on, and the same applies during the game. Even during the variable display game, error codes 341, 342, and character information 343 are displayed in an overlapping manner in a variable display area 610 (first variable display area) in which a large symbol of the decorative special symbol is displayed. However, it is not displayed superimposed on the variable display area 615 (second variable display area) where the small symbols of the decorative special symbols are displayed.

  By the way, the process for preparing the error command (A1315, A1316, A2004, A2006, A2008, A2204, A2207) and the error / illegal setting process (B1316) are executed with its contents constantly updated. That is, if the error content is updated, the error codes 341 and 342 and the character information 343 are also updated.

  Therefore, for example, when the “panel radio wave error” is resolved, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), the error code 341 (binary notation: 00010010) is updated to the error code 341 (binary notation: 00010000), The error code 342 (hexadecimal notation: 12) is updated to the error code 342 (hexadecimal notation: 10), and the character information 343 is updated from “panel radio wave error” to “frame radio wave error”.

  When the “frame radio wave error” is eliminated, all errors are eliminated, and the error codes 341 and 342 and the character information 343 are not generated. At this time, the presence / absence information of binary notation constituting the error code 341 is all “0”. As a result, as shown in FIG. 77C, the display of the error codes 341 and 342 and the character information 343 is erased on the display device 41. Thereby, it is possible to easily grasp that all errors have been eliminated.

  FIG. 78 is an example of switching the display of the error content according to the sixth embodiment, in which the panel radio wave error is displayed as an initial state (FIG. 78A), and the operation unit is operated once and the frame radio wave error is displayed. Is displayed (FIG. 78B), and an operation error is further displayed by operating the operation unit once (FIG. 78C). In the present embodiment, the operation unit (operation means) is the effect button 25, but may be a cross key (not shown) or the like.

  In the sixth embodiment, when the error code 341 and the character information 343 are displayed on the display device 41, the error content with the highest priority is initially displayed as the character information 343. In FIG. 78A, the error code 341 indicates that, for example, “panel radio wave error”, “frame radio wave error”, and “switch abnormal error” have occurred (see FIG. 76). Initially, “panel radio wave error” having the highest priority is displayed as character information 343.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 can display an underline 344 (predetermined image) adjacent to the presence / absence information “1” of the error code 341 corresponding to the displayed character information 343. In FIG. 78A, an underline 344 (predetermined image) indicating the presence / absence information “1” of the second (bit: b1) from the right of the error code 341 corresponding to the character information 343 of “panel radio wave error” is displayed. Is done. The underline 344 is displayed adjacent to the presence / absence information “1”. Thereby, the correspondence between the character information 343 and the presence information “1” in the error code 341 is clarified. In addition to the underline 344, a predetermined image that surrounds the presence / absence information “1” with a square or a circle may be applied.

  By the way, the production control device 300 (the main control microcomputer 311) is connected via a switch input circuit 336 to the production button 25 (production button switch 25a) serving as an operation unit operated by the player in a variable display game or the like. (FIG. 4). Then, every time the effect control device 300 receives a signal transmitted by operating the effect button 25, the character information 343 corresponding to a plurality of presence / absence information that is present in the error code 341 can be switched and displayed. It has become. Thereby, it is possible to grasp all error contents that have occurred from the character information 343.

  Therefore, when the effect button 25 is pressed once, “frame radio wave error” is displayed as the character information 343 as shown in FIG. 78 (B), and the error code 341 corresponding to the character information 343 is fifth from the right ( An underline 344 is displayed under the presence / absence information “1” of the bit: b4).

  Further, when the effect button 25 is pressed once, as shown in FIG. 78C, “switch abnormality error” is displayed as the character information 343, and the error code 341 corresponding to the character information 343 is first (from the left) An underline 344 is displayed under the presence / absence information “1” of the bit: b7). When the effect button 25 is further pressed once, the display returns to the display of FIG.

  Even when the error display 341 and the character information 343 are displayed even during the variable display game, the operation related to the effect of the variable display game by the effect button 25 is restricted, and the character information 343 is switched by the effect button 25. The operation is preferentially performed.

[Operation and Effect of Sixth Embodiment]
As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the sixth embodiment has a game control means (game control device 100) that transmits a command related to a game, and an effect that can display an effect corresponding to the command on the display means (display device 41). In the gaming machine 10 including the control means (the effect control device 300), the game control means (the game control device 100) may cause the error when any of a plurality of errors that may occur in the gaming machine 10 occurs. Is transmitted to the production control means (production control device 300), and the production control means (production control device 300) displays error codes (341, 342) that collectively display the presence or absence of a plurality of errors as error commands. Is generated and displayed on the display means (display device 41).

  With the above configuration, the error code 341 and 342 and the error content are grasped in advance, so that the error codes 341 and 342 are displayed, so that the error content can be grasped immediately.

  In the sixth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) generates the error code (341) from a plurality of presence / absence information (binary notation) that individually indicates the presence / absence of an error.

  Thus, by using binary notation, it is possible to immediately grasp the presence / absence of each error and the number of errors.

  In the sixth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) arranges presence / absence information in the error code based on the priority of errors.

  Thereby, it is possible to grasp an error to be dealt with preferentially in the error code.

  In the sixth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) includes character information 343 indicating the content of the error, and the presence / absence information “1” that is present in the error code 341 has the highest priority. Character information 343 relating to the error is displayed on the display means (display device 41).

  Thereby, even if the correspondence between the presence / absence information of the error code 341 and the error contents is not grasped, the error contents with the highest priority can be notified by the character information 343, so that the error contents can be easily grasped. Can do.

  In the sixth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) includes character information 343 indicating the content of the error and priority information (FIG. 76A) indicating the error priority, and an error code. Character information 343 related to the error with the highest priority is displayed on the display means (display device 41) based on the priority information among the errors that are present in 341 and 342.

  As a result, the error information with the highest priority can be notified by the character information 343 without knowing the contents of the error codes 341 and 342, so that the error contents can be easily grasped.

  In 6th Embodiment, the operation means (effect button 25) which can generate | occur | produce a signal according to a player's operation is provided, and an effect control means (effect control apparatus 300) receives a signal from an operation means (effect button 25). Each time, the character information 343 related to the error in the error codes 341 and 342 is switched and transmitted to the display means (display device 41).

  Thereby, it is possible to grasp all error contents that have occurred from the character information 343.

  In 6th Embodiment, the operation means (effect button 25) which can generate | occur | produce a signal according to a player's operation is provided, and an effect control means (effect control apparatus 300) receives a signal from an operation means (effect button 25). Each time the character information 343 related to the presence / absence information “1” included in the error code 341 is switched and transmitted to the display means (display device 41), the character information 343 is displayed on the display means (display device 41). A predetermined image (underline 344) indicating presence / absence information “1” related to the character information 343 is displayed.

  Thereby, the correspondence between the character information 343 and the presence information “1” in the error code 341 is clarified.

  In the sixth embodiment, the production control means (production control device 300) does not generate the error codes 341 and 342 when there are no errors in the error codes 341 and 342.

  As a result, the error codes 341 and 342 and the character information 343 displayed on the display means (display device 41) are deleted, so that it is possible to easily grasp that all errors have been eliminated.

[Seventh Embodiment]
The seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 85. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to sixth embodiments. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those in the first to sixth embodiments, and overlapping descriptions are omitted as appropriate. The seventh embodiment relates to the attachment of the part 510 as in the second embodiment.

  FIG. 79 is a view showing an example in which the detachable part 510 according to the seventh embodiment is attached to the gaming machine 10. The seventh embodiment is a modification of the second embodiment. The collation procedure between the parts identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) of the seventh embodiment is the same as that of the second embodiment.

  In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 46B, there is a model B part 510B having part identification information (first identification information) that does not match the model identification information (second identification information) of model A. When attached to the model A of the gaming machine 10, the effect control device 300 issues an error notification via the speakers 19 a and 19 b and the display device 41.

  On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, when the part 510B for the model B is attached to the model A of the gaming machine 10, the effect control device 300 drives the panel decoration device 46 (or the frame decoration device 18) (here. In this configuration, light emission) is allowed, and driving of the frame decoration device 18 (or the panel decoration device 46) (FIG. 4) (in this case, light emission) is prohibited. That is, as shown in FIG. 79, the frame decoration device 18 (decoration device 18b) decorates the game board 30 by lighting (light emission) of LEDs or the like, but the part 510B for the model B is used for the gaming machine 10. When attached to the model A, lighting (light emission) of the LED of the frame decoration device 18 is prohibited.

  Specifically, when the parts identification information (first identification information) and the model identification information (second identification information) do not match, the effect control device 300 has a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 (or a board decoration LED control circuit). 334) The drive (light emission) of the frame decoration device 18 (or the panel decoration device 46) (FIG. 4) is prohibited by stopping the drive of (FIG. 4).

  Thereby, an illumination member such as an LED included in the frame decoration device 18 (or an illumination member such as an LED included in the panel decoration device 46) does not emit light indicating that the unit is wrong. Accordingly, it becomes easier for the game hall manager or staff to understand the unit installation error, so the cause can be removed smoothly. In addition, since it is not used in the wrong state, the cause of failure can be reduced and the life can be extended.

  As shown in FIG. 79, also in the seventh embodiment, the unit error can be notified by voice information (sound “unit error”) using the speakers 19a and 19b. Here, the output of the sound information can be stopped by operating the effect button 25 (FIG. 4). Further, the display device 41 can display the notification information 345 for notifying “unit error” by characters. The notification information 345 is displayed with priority over an image relating to initialization (for example, an “initializing” character 431 in FIG. 90 of the eighth embodiment described later) or an image relating to power failure recovery (A1035). The

  FIG. 80 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the notification information 345 according to the seventh embodiment is displayed on the display device 41 that is displaying the stoppage symbol of the special figure variation display game. As shown in FIG. 80, the notification information 345 for notifying the “unit error” is displayed on the display device 41 as long as a part 510B whose part identification information is different from the model identification information is attached, and is playing (fluctuating). The same applies to the display game).

  In the special symbol variation display game, the notification information 345 is superimposed on the variation display region 610 (first variation display region) where the large symbol variation display is performed, but the variation display region where the small symbol variation display is performed. It is not displayed overlaid on 615 (second variation display area). Thereby, even if the notification information 345 (“unit error”) is displayed, the player can check the progress and result of the special figure variable display game in the variable display area 615.

  FIG. 81 is a diagram illustrating an example of changing the display mode of the notification information according to the seventh embodiment in accordance with the operation of the movable body. The notification information 345 of the seventh embodiment is displayed on the display device 41 even during the initial operation when the movable bodies 44c and 44d (movable accessories) are turned on. Details of the initial operation of the movable bodies 44c and 44d will be described in an eighth embodiment to be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (A), the movable bodies 44c and 44d are arranged at positions where the movable bodies 44c and 44d slightly overlap the front surface of the display device 41 in the initial state (standby state). As shown in 81 (B), the movable bodies 44 c and 44 d move to the front center of the display device 41 during the initial operation. Therefore, the notification information 345 is displayed on the display device 41 at a position that does not overlap the movable bodies 44c and 44d, so that the notification content (“unit error”) can be reliably notified.

  In the left side of FIG. 81 (A), the notification information 345 is displayed largely in the center of the display device 41. In FIG. 81 (B), the notification information 345 is, for example, the upper left (other place of the display device 41). May be smaller) than the display mode of FIG. In this way, by changing the display mode of the notification information 345 corresponding to the positions of the movable bodies 44c and 44d, it is possible to strongly call the game hall manager or the staff.

  Further, as shown on the right side of FIG. 81A, the notification information 345 may be displayed from the beginning on the display device 41 at a position that does not overlap even when the movable bodies 44c and 44d are operated. At least the notification information 345 can be alerted to the game hall manager or staff by arranging the notification information 345 in an area different from the area covered by the movable bodies 44c and 44d in the display device 41.

  FIG. 82 is a diagram showing an example of the case of prohibiting the drive (light emission) of the frame decoration device 18 in the part matching process according to the seventh embodiment. The parts matching process of the seventh embodiment is almost the same as that of the second embodiment (FIG. 54), but as shown in FIG. 82, the frame decoration device 18 (after the error notification (B5006) (or before) may be used. A process (B5006a) for prohibiting driving of the panel decoration device 46 may be added. The prohibition of driving of the frame decoration device 18 is performed by the main control microcomputer 311 (FIG. 4) stopping the output of signals to the frame decoration device 18 or stopping the driving of the frame decoration LED control circuit 333.

  FIG. 83 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of the identification substrate 513 of the part 510 according to the seventh embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 83, the identification board 513 (I ² CI / O expander 815) of the part 510 of the seventh embodiment is the same as the identification board 513 of the second embodiment, but the bus controller 834 includes A ROM 834a in which part identification information (first identification information) of the identification substrate 513 is stored is provided.

Therefore, the bus controller 834 determines whether the address of the data input from the connection line SDA matches the unique address (address determined by A3, A2, A1, A0) set in the I ² CI / O expander 815. If they match, the part identification information (first identification information) stored in the ROM 834a is output from the connection line SDA to the master IC 300a.

  FIG. 84 is a view showing a reference table (FIG. 84 (A)) for associating the model designation command and model identification information according to the seventh embodiment, and a reference table (FIG. 84 (B)) showing the classification of incompatible models. .

  As shown in FIG. 84 (A), the memory (RAM 322, FeRAM 323 (FIG. 4), etc.) of the effect control means 300 stores a table of models compatible with the gaming machine 10 and model identification information corresponding thereto. . In FIG. 84A, models AD are registered as models that can be identified by the gaming machine 10. For example, assuming that the model of the gaming machine 10 is model A (which may be any one of models A-D), it is a frame that the part identification information of the attached part 510 does not match the model identification information of model A. Driving (light emission) of the decoration device 18 (or the board decoration device 46) is prohibited, and error notification or the like is performed.

  Here, if the part identification information matches any of the model identification information of the models A to D, it is determined that the part 510 is a standard product suitable for the gaming machine 10, and if it does not match any of the parts, 510 can be determined as a nonstandard product that is not suitable for the gaming machine 10.

  As described above, in the seventh embodiment, when the part 510B for the model B is attached to the model A of the gaming machine 10, the effect control device 300 is the frame decoration device 18 (or the board decoration device 46) (FIG. The driving of 4) can be prohibited.

  By the way, in the conventional gaming machine, as a device for providing the gaming machine at low cost, a part (part 510) is changed as a part (model element) of the frame decoration device 18, but If the part (part 510) is not correct when it is changed in the field, it may cause a failure. Further, there is a possibility that the frame decoration device 18 is used in the wrong state.

  However, in the seventh embodiment, even if an incorrect unit (part 510B) is attached, it is not always necessary to prohibit the driving of the frame decoration device 18 (or the board decoration device 46), and the progress of the game is affected. By allowing the part 510 to be driven within a range where there is no failure, it is possible to reduce the cause of the failure.

  As shown in FIG. 84 (B), in the memory (RAM 322, FeRAM 323 (FIG. 4), etc.) of the production control device 300, when the part 510 is not compatible with the gaming machine 10, it is classified into three types of errors. The reference table is stored. The case where the part 510 does not match the gaming machine 10 is a case where the part identification information of the part 510 does not match the model identification information (specific model identification information) of the gaming machine 10 to which the part 510 is attached.

  The part 510 decorates the game board 30 (FIG. 2), but includes an LED and a movable member that can be controlled by the effect control device 300. As shown in FIG. 84 (B), the parts 510 can be classified into those having only LEDs and those having LEDs and movable members according to corresponding part identification information.

  For example, when the last two digits of the part identification number are “00” or “01”, it can be determined that the part 510 has only LEDs. When the last two digits of the part identification information are “10” or “11”, it can be determined that the part 510 includes an LED and a movable member.

  As shown in FIG. 84 (A), the parts identification information has a form in which the lower two digits can identify the corresponding model AD, but the upper two digits identify the model AD. It is good also as a form which can be performed. In this case, it can be determined whether the part 510 includes only the LED or includes the LED and the movable member with the first two digits of the part identification information. Thus, by comparing a part of the part identification information, the type of the part 510 can be classified.

  As described above, the production control device 300 (main control microcomputer 311) receives the part identification information (first identification information) transmitted from the part 510 and the specific model identification information (second identification information) included in the production control device 300. And the part 510 can be classified into a non-conforming product that does not match a conforming product that matches the specific model identification information.

  In the case of a conforming product, the part 510 can be driven without any limitation.

  On the other hand, in the case of a non-conforming product, it is a standard product according to the reference table of FIG. 84 (B) and includes only LEDs, a standard product that includes LEDs and movable members, and a non-standard product. It can be classified into a third classification.

  Regarding the first classification, as long as the part 510 is a standard product, since the rating of the LED of the part 510 corresponds to the gaming machine 10, the lighting of the LED can be permitted.

  Regarding the second classification, since the LED and the movable member of the part 510 correspond to the gaming machine 10 as long as the part 510 is a standard product, it can be driven. However, when the operation mode of the movable member corresponding to the gaming machine 10 is different due to a difference in model such as a reciprocating operation or a revolving operation, the part 510 may be damaged. Therefore, in the second classification, it is necessary to prohibit the driving (moving, rotating, etc.) of the movable member of the part 510 while permitting the driving (light emission) of the LED.

  Regarding the third classification, if the part 510 is a nonstandard product, the ratings of the LED and the movable member may be different from those of the gaming machine 10, and if these are driven, the board on the gaming machine 10 side may be damaged. Therefore, it is necessary to prohibit the driving of the LED of the part 510 and the movable member regardless of the presence or absence thereof.

  If the part 510 is configured as a part of the panel decoration device 46, the main control microcomputer 311 may limit only the signal related to the part 510 among the signals transmitted to the panel decoration device 46. For example, When the part 510 belongs to the second classification, the transmission of the signal related to the LED of the part 510 is permitted and the transmission of the signal related to the movable member is prohibited. For example, when the part 510 belongs to the third classification, the part 510 What is necessary is just to prohibit the transmission of the signal concerning 510 LED and a movable member.

For example, when the I ² CI / O expander 815 shown in FIG. 83 drives the panel decoration device 46, for example, PORT1 is a port for driving the LED of the part 510, and PORT2 is a movable member (motor) of the part 510. Output of signals belonging to the addresses of PORT1 and PORT2 may be prohibited.

  When the part 510 is configured as independent from the panel decoration device 46, the main control microcomputer 311 allows transmission of a signal related to the LED of the part 510 when the part 510 belongs to the second category. In addition, transmission of signals related to the movable member is prohibited, and when the part 510 belongs to the third classification, transmission of signals related to the LED of the part 510 and the movable member may be prohibited.

  FIG. 85 is a diagram illustrating an example of a case where the driving mode is changed by classifying the parts 510 in the part matching process according to the seventh embodiment. The parts collation process of the seventh embodiment is the same as the parts collation process (FIG. 54) of the second embodiment, but an error occurs when the part identification information and the model identification information do not match (result of B5005 is “N”). Notification (B5006) is performed, and error classification processing of part identification information is performed (B5006b). Similarly to FIG. 82, a configuration in which the process of step B5006a is executed between steps B5006 and B5006b in order to inhibit the frame decoration device 18 from being driven is also possible.

  In the error classification process (B5006b), when it is determined that the part identification information belongs to the first classification, the driving of the LED of the part 510 is permitted (B5006c).

  If it is determined in the error classification process (B5006b) that the part identification information belongs to the second classification, the driving of the movable member of the part 510 is prohibited (B5006d) while the driving of the LED of the part 510 is permitted.

  In the error classification process (B5006b), when it is determined that the part identification information belongs to the third classification, the driving of the LED of the part 510 and the movable member is prohibited (B5006e).

  In this way, even if the attached part 510 is used in the wrong state, the progress of the game is not affected and the failure factor can be reduced, so that the life can be extended.

[Operations and effects of the seventh embodiment]
As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the seventh embodiment includes a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a game and an effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing an effect related to the game. And decoration devices (board decoration device 46 and frame decoration device 18) that are driven by the effect control means (effect control device 300) to perform the light emission effect. The gaming machine 10 includes a detachable part (part 510) to which first electrically readable identification information (part identification information) is assigned. The production control means (production control device 300) holds the second identification information (model identification information) corresponding to the model of the gaming machine 10, and reads the first identification information (part identification information) of the part (part 510). If the first identification information (part identification information) and the second identification information (model identification information) do not match with the second identification information (model identification information), a part of the decoration device (the frame decoration device 18, Or the driving of the panel decoration device 46) is prohibited.

  As a result, since the wrong part (part 510) is attached and the driving of a part of the decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18) is prohibited, it is determined that the attached part (part 510) is wrong. The site manager or the staff can easily and quickly make a judgment, and the cause can be removed smoothly by replacing the part (part 510).

  In the seventh embodiment, the decoration devices (the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46) decorate the frame decoration device 18 that performs a light emission effect for decorating the frame of the gaming machine 10 and the gaming board 30 of the gaming machine. And the effect control means (effect control device 300) includes a case where the first identification information (part identification information) and the second identification information (model identification information) do not match. The panel decoration device 46 is allowed to be driven and the frame decoration device 18 is prohibited from being driven.

  As a result, the game hall manager or the staff can easily understand that the attached part (part 510) is wrong depending on whether or not the frame decoration device 18 is driven. Therefore, by replacing the part (part 510), smooth The cause can be removed.

  In the seventh embodiment, the part (part 510) is configured as a part of the panel decoration device 46. The production control means (production control device 300) is a standard product that is compatible with the gaming machine 10 and includes a light emitting member (LED) that can be driven by the production control means (production control device 300). 1st class, a standard product, a second class comprising a light emitting member (LED) and a movable member that can be driven by the production control means (production control device 300), and a non-standard product (non-standard product) Can be classified into the third classification. The production control means (production control device 300) allows the driving of the component (part 510) in the case of the first classification, and the light emitting member (LED) of the component (part 510) in the case of the second classification. The driving is permitted to prohibit the driving of the movable member, and in the case of the third classification, the driving of the component (part 510) is prohibited.

  Thereby, even if the attached component (part 510) is used in the wrong state, the progress of the game is not affected and the cause of failure can be reduced, leading to a longer life.

  Further, the gaming machine 10 of the seventh embodiment includes a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a game, an effect control means (effect control means 300) capable of executing an effect related to the game, and light emission. And a decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) for performing effects. The gaming machine 10 includes a detachable part (part 510) that is configured as a part of the decoration device and assigned first electrically readable identification information (part identification information). The production control means (production control device 300) holds the second identification information (model identification information) corresponding to the model of the gaming machine 10, and reads the first identification information (part identification information) of the part (part 510). Compared with the second identification information (model identification information), if the first identification information (part identification information) and the second identification information (model identification information) do not match, the part (part 510) is transferred to the gaming machine 10. A first class including a light emitting member (LED) that is a conforming standard product and can be driven by the effect control means (effect control device 300), and a standard product that is a light emitting member (LED) and an effect control means (effect It is possible to classify into a second class including a movable member that can be driven by the control device 300) and a third class that is not a standard product (becomes a non-standard product). The production control means (production control device 300) allows the driving of the component (part 510) in the case of the first classification, and the light emitting member (LED) of the component (part 510) in the case of the second classification. The driving is permitted to prohibit the driving of the movable member, and in the case of the third classification, the driving of the component (part 510) is prohibited.

  Thereby, even if the attached component (part 510) is used in the wrong state, the progress of the game is not affected and the cause of failure can be reduced, leading to a longer life.

  In the seventh embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes a display device 41 that displays an image related to a game, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) includes first identification information (part identification information) and second identification information. When the (model identification information) does not match, the notification information 345 (“unit error”) indicating the mismatch is displayed on the display device 41.

  Thereby, by displaying the notification information 345 on the display device 41, it is possible to reliably notify the game hall manager or the staff of the error.

  In the seventh embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) displays a variable display game for displaying the identification information in a variable manner on the display device 41, and displays a large symbol as a display area in the display device 41 of the variable display game. A first variable display area (variable display area 610) for performing variable display, and a second variable display for displaying small patterns (615A, 615B, 615C) that are smaller than the first variable display area and smaller than the large symbols. The display includes a variable display area (variable display area 615), and the notification information 345 is displayed not on the second variable display area but on the first variable display area.

  Thereby, even if the notification information 345 (“unit error”) is displayed, the player can check the progress and result of the variable display game in the variable display area 615.

  In the seventh embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes a board effect device 44 including an operable movable body (44c, 44d). The production control means (production control device 300) can drive the movable body (44c, 44d) of the board production device 44, and the first identification information (part identification information) and the second identification information (model identification information) do not match. In this case, the notification information 345 is displayed on the display device 41 in an area that does not overlap the area covered by the movable body (44c, 44d) by driving the board effect device 44.

  Thereby, since the notification information 345 is not hidden by the movable body (44c, 44d), the notification information 345 can be always viewed.

  In the seventh embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) changes the display mode of the notification information 345 corresponding to the position of the movable body (44c, 44d).

  Thereby, the display mode of the notification information 345 can be optimized to a state with the highest visibility according to the change in the position of the movable body (44c, 44d).

  In the seventh embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes sound output means (speakers (19a, 19b)) that outputs sound effects according to the gaming state. When the first identification information (part identification information) and the second identification information (model identification information) do not match, the effect control means (the effect control device 300) has voice information (“unit error” indicating the mismatch). Is output to sound output means (speakers 19a, 19b).

  As a result, an error has also occurred in the game hall manager or staff at a position where the game board 30 (the frame decoration device 18 or the board decoration device 46) and the display device 41 on which the notification information 345 is displayed cannot be visually recognized. Can be made known.

[Eighth Embodiment]
An eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 96. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to seventh embodiments. The seventh embodiment relates to an initial operation control process.

[Game board according to the eighth embodiment]
First, the game board 30 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a front view of the gaming board 30 provided in the gaming machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment. The game board 30 according to the eighth embodiment is obtained by adding a light guide plate 251 and internal bonuses 44c and 44d (inner movable members) to the game board 30 (FIG. 2A) of the first embodiment.

  The light guide plate 251 is attached to the center case 40, and reflects a part of the light irradiated and guided from the light emitting member (for example, LED) attached to the end portion to the front, thereby allowing a predetermined visible from the front. A pattern or the like (for example, a spark-shaped pattern as shown in FIG. 86) is raised on the surface in a known manner (see JP-A-2006-83463 and JP-A-2017-148150). The light guide plate 251 is disposed in front of the display device 41 (player side).

  The internal actors 44c and 44d (internal movable members) are provided in the board effect device 44, and are actors that enhance the effect by cooperating with the effect display on the display device 41.

  In order to make the character “Geki” conspicuous with a motor or the like (not shown) that can position the character “Geki” of the inside character 44 c in front of the display device 41 (player side). And a light emitting member (for example, LED) capable of emitting light around the character.

  In addition, the internal accessory 44d includes a motor (not shown) capable of positioning the character “heat” of the internal accessory 44d in front of the display screen of the display device 41 (player side), and “heat”. A light emitting member (for example, LED) capable of emitting light around the character in order to make the character stand out.

  For this reason, the characters “Intense heat” that can be visually recognized by the player are arranged in front of the display device 41 by moving the internal combination items 44c and 44d together (FIGS. 86, 90, and 93). reference). As shown in FIG. 86, in the game board 30 according to the eighth embodiment, when the internal combination objects 44c and 44d are moved when the pattern is raised on the surface of the light guide plate 251, the pattern and internal combination combination are moved. 44c and 44d overlap each other in front of the display screen of the display device 41.

[Light guide plate control processing]
FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing a procedure of light guide plate control processing according to the eighth embodiment. The light guide plate control process may be executed by the effect control device 300 as a part of the decoration control process (B0020) in the main process (FIG. 36), for example.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the power is on (B7001). In addition, it is good also as determining whether it is at the time of a power failure restoration.

  When it is determined that the power is not turned on (result of B7001 is “N”), the production control device 300 performs normal control processing according to the production content set in the variation production setting processing (FIG. 44) or the like. Start (B7003) and end the light guide plate control process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the power is turned on (result of B7001 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not a command for changing the probability setting is received (B7002).

  In the process of step B7002, the command whose probability setting is changed is determined when the MODE portion represents the setting change system by the command whose probability setting is changed in the single command processing (FIG. 39) (the result of B1325 is “Y”). It is determined that it is received. That is, the front frame 12 (main body frame, main body portion) is opened (the result of A1023 or A1027 in FIG. 5A is “Y”), and the setting key switch 93 of the setting changing device 42 is turned on (A1024 or A1028). Is “Y”), the command for which the probability setting is being changed is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 (A1041 in FIG. 5B). While the probability setting is changed, the setting value change switch 102 of the setting changing device 42 is pressed, so that the setting value related to the game condition is changed. In addition, information on the set value relating to the changed game condition is displayed on the probability set value display device 143.

  Then, when it is determined that the command for changing the probability setting has not been received (result of B7002 is “N”), that is, when the normal power is turned on, the effect control device 300 has the internal accessory 44c, It is determined whether 44d is in an initial operation (B7005).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the command for changing the probability setting is received (result of B7002 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether the command for changing the probability setting is received. Judgment is made (B7004).

  In the process of step B7004, the probability setting change end command is a single-shot command process (FIG. 39) when the MODE portion represents the setting change system by the probability setting change end command (result of B1325 is “Y”). It is determined that it is received. That is, the probability setting value has been changed (the result of A2406 in FIG. 10 is “Y”), the setting key switch 93 is turned off (the result of A2416 is “Y”), and the command to end the probability setting change is a game. It is transmitted from the control device 100 to the effect control device 300 (A2421).

  Then, when it is determined that the probability setting change end command has not been received (result of B7004 is “N”), that is, when the probability setting is being changed, the effect control device 300 ends the light guide plate control process. To do.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the command for changing the probability setting change is received (the result of B7004 is “Y”), that is, when the probability setting change is finished (after the setting is finished), It is determined whether or not the internal actors 44c and 44d are in an initial operation (B7005).

  In the process of step B7005, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the internal actors 44c and 44d are in an initial operation (B7005). Details of the initial operation of the internal actors 44c and 44d will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When it is determined that the internal actors 44c and 44d are in the initial operation (the result of B7005 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 ends the light guide plate control process. Thus, the light emission (initial operation) of the light guide plate 251 is not executed during the initial operation of the internal actors 44c and 44d. It should be noted that during the initial operation of the internal actors 44c and 44d, the effect control device 300 is not limited to the light emission by the initial operation of the light guide plate 251 and may not perform the light emission by the light emission effect.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the internal actors 44c and 44d are not in an initial operation (result of B7005 is “N”), the effect control device 300 performs an initial operation control process for the light guide plate 251 (B7006). .

  In the initial operation control process (B7006) of the light guide plate 251, the effect control device 300 causes all of the light emitting members attached to the ends of the light guide plate 251 to emit light as an initial operation, for example, as shown in FIG. Control to reflect light from the member forward from the light guide plate 251 is performed (initial operation control).

  FIG. 89 is a front view of the game board 30 when the light guide plate 251 according to the eighth embodiment is initially operated. A game hall manager or the like (including hall staff) can confirm that the light guide plate 251 and the light emitting member are normally operated by visually recognizing the pattern floating on the surface of the light guide plate 251. When the initial operation control process (B7006) of the light guide plate 251 ends, the effect control device 300 ends the light guide plate control process. If the initial operation control condition of the external accessory 95a described later in FIG. 88 is satisfied (the result of B7109 is “N”), as shown in FIG. 89, the external accessory 95a is controlled together with the initial operation control of the light guide plate 251. The initial operation control may be performed. The external accessory 95a is a part of the frame effect device, and is, for example, an accessory operable to protrude from above the glass frame 15 (open portion). In addition, the display screen of the display device 41 is turned off so that the pattern of the light guide plate 251 can be easily seen. However, the display screen may be displayed in a state in which the brightness is lowered than usual, and a dark color such as black is used as a basis. A character such as “Initialization” (for example, the character 431 in FIG. 90) may be displayed at a position where the pattern of the light guide plate 251 does not overlap with the screen (position where the game hall manager or the like can visually recognize from the front). .

[Moving object control processing]
FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the movable body control process according to the eighth embodiment.

  The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the power is on (B7101). In addition, it is good also as determining whether it is at the time of a power failure restoration.

  When it is determined that the power is not turned on (result of B7101 is “N”), the production control device 300 performs normal control processing according to the production content set in the variation production setting processing (FIG. 44) or the like. Start (B7103) and end the movable body control process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the power is turned on (result of B7101 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not a command for changing the probability setting is received (B7102).

  When it is determined that the command for changing the probability setting has been received (result of B7102 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether a command for changing the probability setting has been received (B7104). . On the other hand, when it is determined that the command for changing the probability setting has not been received (the result of B7102 is “N”), that is, when the normal power is turned on, the effect control device 300 has the light guide plate 251 It is determined whether or not an initial operation is being performed (B7105).

  In the process of step B7104, the effect control device 300 determines that the command to end probability setting change has been received (the result of B7104 is “Y”), that is, when the probability setting change has ended (setting end). After), it is determined whether or not the light guide plate 251 is in an initial operation (B7105). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability setting change end command has not been received (the result of B7104 is “N”), that is, when the probability setting is being changed, the production control device 300 has the internal accessory 44c, Only 44d starts the initial operation control process (B7107).

  In the initial operation control process (B7107) of the internal actors 44c and 44d, for example, the motor that moves the internal actor 44c of the board effect device 44 and the motor that moves the internal actor 44d are driven, respectively, and the letters “extreme heat” Is controlled to move to the initial position after moving the internal actors 44c and 44d to the front of the display screen of the display device 41 (initial operation control). For example, the initial operation control of the internal accessory 44c and the initial operation control of the internal accessory 44d are sequentially performed so that the initial operation control of the internal accessory 44d is performed after the initial operation control of the internal accessory 44c is completed. It may be executed. Similarly, when another internal combination different from the internal combination 44c, 44d is further attached, the initial operation control of each internal combination is executed in order.

  In the process of step B7105, if the effect control apparatus 300 determines that the light guide plate 251 is in the initial operation (the result of B7105 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step B7109, and the main body frame is It is determined whether or not a body frame opening error due to being opened has occurred (B7109). On the other hand, when the effect control device 300 determines that the light guide plate 251 is not in the initial operation (the result of B7105 is “N”), the process proceeds to step B7106, and the main body frame opening error occurs. It is determined whether or not (B7106). For example, when a state on command indicating a body frame opening error (front frame opening error) is received as an error / invalid command (B1315), it can be determined that a body frame opening error is occurring.

  In the process of step B7106, when it is determined that the main body frame opening error has occurred (result of B7106 is “Y”), the production control device 300 starts the initial operation control process only for the internal actors 44c and 44d ( B7107). On the other hand, when it is determined that the main body frame opening error has not occurred (result of B7106 is “N”), the production control device 300 determines whether the internal accessory 44c, 44d and the external accessory 95a are as shown in FIG. Initial operation control processing is started (B7108).

  FIG. 90 is a front view of the game board 30 when the internal combination items 44c and 44d and the external combination item 95a according to the eighth embodiment are initially operated. In the process of step B7108, for example, as shown in FIG. 90, the effect control device 300 performs the initial operation control process for the external accessory 95a together with the initial operation control process for the internal accessory 44c, 44d. Further, as shown in FIG. 90, when the internal actors 44c and 44d move in front of the display screen of the display device 41, a position where they do not overlap from the front, etc. (position where the game hall manager etc. can be seen from the front) In addition, a character 431 “initializing” is displayed. When the initial operation control process (B7108) of the internal combination 44c, 44d and the external combination 95a is completed, the effect control device 300 ends the movable body control process.

  In the process of step B7109, when the effect control apparatus 300 determines that the main body frame opening error has occurred (the result of B7109 is “Y”), the movable body control process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the main body frame opening error has not occurred (result of B7109 is “N”), the effect control device 300 starts the initial operation control process only for the external accessory 95a (B7110). While the light guide plate 251 is in the initial operation (the result of B7105 is “Y”), the initial operation control processing of the external accessory 95a is started, so that the game hall manager or the like, as shown in FIG. The operation of the object 95a and the pattern of the light guide plate 251 can be confirmed at the same time. Thereafter, the effect control device 300 ends the movable body control process. In addition, during the initial operation of the light guide plate 251 (when the result of B7105 is “Y”), the initial operation is executed only for the external accessory 95a (B7110), but the initial of the internal actors 44c and 44d. The action is not performed. Note that during the initial operation of the light guide plate 251, the effect control device 300 is not limited to the initial operation of the internal actors 44c and 44d, and may not be moved by the effect. The light emitting member may not emit light.

[Timing chart of initial operation control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, the timing of the initial operation control process of the effect control device 300 according to the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 91 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the initial operation control process according to the eighth embodiment.

  When power is turned on in a normal state at time T71, an initial operation control process for the light guide plate 251 is started (B7006), and the light emitting member (LED) at the end of the light guide plate 251 emits light as shown in FIG. Start.

  Further, when the initial operation control process of the light guide plate 251 is started (result of B7105 is “Y”), the initial operation control process of the external accessory 95a is started by the movable body control process (B7110), and the external accessory 95a moves (operates) to a position protruding from above the game board 30. On the other hand, the internal actors 44c and 44d are stopped without being initially controlled, and the display screen of the display device 41 is turned off (off state).

  At time T72, the initial operation control process of the light guide plate 251 is completed (the result of B7105 is “N”), the light emission of the light emitting member of the light guide plate 251 is completed, and the initial operation control of the internal actors 44c and 44d is performed. This is started (B7108), and as shown in FIG. 90, the internal actors 44c and 44d move (operate) in front of the display screen of the display device 41. Note that the initial operation control process of the external accessory 95a is continuously performed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a character 431 “initializing” is displayed at a position (for example, lower right of the screen) that does not overlap with the internal actors 44c and 44d (initialization display).

  At time T73, the movement (operation) of the external accessory 95a and the internal actors 44c and 44d ends, and the light emission of the light emitting members of the internal actors 44c and 44d is started at the respective positions. When the light emission ends at time T74. In order to return to the original position, the movement of the external combination 95a and the internal combination 44c, 44d starts. As described above, during the movement (operation) of the internal actors 44c and 44d (movable accessory) itself, the light emission (initial operation) of the light emitting members of the internal bonuses 44c and 44d is not executed in front of the display device 41. . Note that the movement of the external combination 95a and the movement of the internal combination 44c and 44d may not be started or ended at the same time.

  When the movement of the internal combination items 44c and 44d is completed at time T75, the initialization display displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 disappears and changes to a normal display screen (normal display). Thereafter, at time T76, the movement of the external accessory 95a ends, and the initial operation control process of the effect control device 300 ends. Note that the display screen of the display device 41 may be switched to normal display in accordance with the movement of the external accessory 95a at time T76.

  Although the initial operation control process for the internal actors 44c and 44d is performed after the initial operation control process for the light guide plate 251 is completed, the reverse order may be used. That is, the initial operation control process of the light guide plate 251 may be performed after the initial operation control process of the internal combination 44c, 44d is completed.

[Game board when a variable display game is played during normal times]
Next, with reference to FIG. 92 and FIG. 93, the case where the variable display game is played at the normal time of the effect control apparatus 300 according to the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 92 is a front view of the game board 30 when the variable display game according to the eighth embodiment is being executed.

  When a variable display game is played during normal times (when the initial motion control process, probability setting change, or probability setting confirmation is not being performed), as shown in FIG. 92, the display of the game board 30 according to the eighth embodiment is performed. On the display screen of the device 41, decorative first symbols A to C (identification information, identification symbols, special decoration symbols) are variably displayed in a plurality of variable display regions 610 (left region 610A, right region 610B, middle region 610C). The For example, the decoration first symbols A to C are displayed in a reach state as “7 ↓ 7” as shown in FIG. Further, the internal actors 44c and 44d are stopped at a position (initial position) before moving (operating), and a part of the lower part of the internal actor 44c overlaps with an upper end portion of the display screen of the display device 41, A part of the upper part of the internal accessory 44d overlaps the lower end of the display screen.

  FIG. 93 is a front view of the game board 30 when a reach effect that is an effect corresponding to the reach state is performed when the variable display game according to the eighth embodiment is executed.

  When the reach effect is performed, for example, as shown in FIG. 93, a light-emitting effect in which the lighting members around the frame decoration devices 18 a and 18 b and the upper speaker 19 a emit light is performed, and the internal actors 44 c and 44 b are displayed on the display device 41. The player moves (operates and moves) in front of the display screen, and the player can recognize that the characters “extreme heat” are displayed side by side. In addition, a light-emitting effect is emitted by the light emitting members of the internal actors 44c and 44b, and an effect corresponding to the reach effect is also displayed on the display screen of the display device 41.

  Then, when the reach effect is performed from the state of FIG. 92, as shown in FIG. 93, the decorative first symbols A to C in the variable display area 610 are displayed small in the lower right corner of the display screen. Instead of the decorative first symbols A to C in the variable display area 610, the decorative reduced symbol (small symbol) in the variable display area 615 may be displayed small in the lower right corner of the display screen.

[Game board when a variable display game is played during the initial motion control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 94, a case where a variable display game is performed during the initial motion control process of the effect control device 300 according to the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 is a front view of the game board 30 when a reach effect is performed in the variable display game when the initial motion control process according to the eighth embodiment is being executed.

  When the variable display game is played during the initial motion control process, as shown in FIG. 94, the display on the lower right of the display screen of the display device 41 of the game board 30 according to the eighth embodiment is displayed as usual. While the variation display “7 ↓ 7” of one symbol A to C is displayed small, the display screen effect corresponding to the reach effect of FIG. 93 is not displayed. For example, the display screen of the display device 41 is displayed on a black screen with no display other than the decorative first symbols A to C. The display screen of the display device 41 may display an initialization display together with the variation display “7 ↓ 7” of the decorative first symbols A to C. Also, when performing the initialization display, the entire screen is displayed. It may be displayed darkly.

  In addition, the internal actors 44c and 44d stopped at the initial position perform a light emission effect in which the light emitting member emits light on the spot without moving. Therefore, the player can visually recognize that a part of the lower end of the internal accessory 44c and a part of the upper part of the internal accessory 44d emit light.

  In addition, although the light emitting member emits light during the initial operation control process, the internal characters 44c and 44d move to the front of the display screen of the display device 41, unlike the light emission effect associated with the reach effect. Then, light emission by the initial operation control process is performed. Further, the time for light emission by the initial operation control process (from time T73 to time T74 shown in FIG. 91) may be a time when the game hall manager or the like can confirm the light emission operation (for example, 5 seconds), and is used for reach production. It is a relatively short time compared to the time (for example, 30 seconds) in which light is emitted in the accompanying light emission effect. Therefore, the player can recognize that it is not the light emission by the initial operation control process but the light emission effect accompanying the reach effect when visually recognizing the light emission effect of the light emitting members of the internal actors 44c and 44d.

[Modification of the game board when a variable display game is played during the initial motion control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, a modified example in the case where a variable display game is performed during the initial motion control process of the effect control device 300 according to the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 95 is a modification of the front view of the game board 30 when the reach effect is performed in the variable display game when the initial motion control process according to the eighth embodiment is being executed.

  When a variable display game is played during the initial motion control process, as shown in FIG. 95, the lower right of the display screen of the display device 41 of the game board 30 of the modified example according to the eighth embodiment is the same as in normal time. On the other hand, the variation display “7 ↓ 7” of the decorative first symbols A to C is displayed small, while the display screen effect corresponding to the reach effect of FIG. 93 is not displayed. For example, the display screen of the display device 41 is displayed on a black screen with no display other than the decorative first symbols A to C. The display screen of the display device 41 may display an initialization display together with the variation display “7 ↓ 7” of the decorative first symbols A to C. Also, when performing the initialization display, the entire screen is displayed. It may be displayed darkly.

  In addition, in accordance with the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 95, a light emission effect is produced in which the illumination members around the frame decoration devices 18a and 18b and the upper speaker 19a emit light. On the other hand, the internal actors 44c and 44d continue to stop at the initial position, and the light emitting member continues to be turned off. It should be noted that the time (for example, 5 seconds) during which light is emitted by the initial operation control processing of the illumination members around the frame decoration devices 18a and 18b and the upper speaker 19a is the reach effect as with the internal actors 44c and 44d described with reference to FIG. It is a relatively short time compared to the time (for example, 30 sec) in which light is emitted in the light emission effect associated with. Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the light emission effects of the lighting members around the frame decoration devices 18a and 18b and the upper speaker 19a, the player recognizes that the light effect is not the light emission by the initial operation process but the light effect due to the reach effect. Can do.

[Modification of the game board when a variable display game is played during the initial motion control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the 2nd modification when the variable display game is performed during the initial stage motion control process of the production | presentation control apparatus 300 which concerns on 8th Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 96 is a second modification of the front view of the game board 30 when the reach effect is performed in the variable display game when the initial motion control process according to the eighth embodiment is being executed.

  When the variable display game is played during the initial motion control process, as shown in FIG. 96, the normal time is displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the display device 41 of the game board 30 of the second modified example according to the eighth embodiment. Similarly, the variation display “7 ↓ 7” of the decorative first symbols A to C is displayed small, and an effect corresponding to the reach effect (original reach effect) of FIG. 93 is displayed on the entire display screen. Therefore, the player can recognize that the reach effect is being performed by visually recognizing the effect displayed on the display screen of the display device 41.

  On the other hand, the internal actors 44c and 44d continue to stop at the initial position, and the light emitting member continues to be turned off. Further, the lighting members around the frame decoration devices 18a and 18b and the upper speaker 19a are also kept off.

[Operation and Effect of Eighth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment provides an effect related to a variable display game (special graphic variable display game) for changing the identification information (identification symbol, decorative special symbol, decorative first symbol AC, special special symbol). Is provided on the display device 41 with an effect control means (effect control device 300). The gaming machine 10 includes a movable combination (internal combination 44c, 44d) capable of executing a predetermined operation in front of the display device 41, and a light emission effect means (guide) capable of executing a predetermined light emission effect in front of the display device 41. A light plate 251 and a light emitting member thereof, or light emitting members of the internal components 44c and 44d). The effect control means can execute the initial operation of the movable accessory and the light emission effect means by turning on the power to the gaming machine 10, and during the initial operation of the light emission effect means, the initial operation of the movable accessory And the predetermined operation is not executed.

  According to the gaming machine 10 as described above, as a plurality of members for performing an effect related to the game, a movable accessory (internal combination 44c, 44d) and a light emitting effect means (the light guide plate 251 and its light emitting member, or the internal combination) The light emitting members 44c and 44d) can be in a mode in which the initial operation can be easily confirmed, so that maintenance can be performed efficiently.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the light emitting effect means (the light guide plate 251 and its light emitting member, or the light emitting members of the internal accessories 44c and 44d) is predetermined based on the light irradiation from the end. The light guide plate 251 on which the pattern of the light is raised and an irradiating means (light emission of the light guide plate 251) disposed at the end of the light guide plate 251 so as to face the opposite surface of the light guide plate 251 and capable of irradiating the light guide plate 251 with light. Member). The production control means (production control device 300) performs the initial operation and the predetermined operation of the movable accessory (internal combination 44c, 44d) while the irradiation unit of the light emission production unit irradiates light by the initial operation. Do not execute. According to the gaming machine 10 as described above, the game hall manager and the like can check the initial operations of the light guide plate 251 and the movable accessory separately, so that maintenance can be performed efficiently.

  Moreover, in the gaming machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the light emission effect means is a light emission source (light emission member) installed in the movable accessory (internal combination 44c, 44d). According to such a gaming machine 10, since the operation of the movable accessory itself and the light emission operation of the light emitting effect means of the movable accessory can be separately confirmed as initial operations, maintenance can be performed efficiently as described above. Can do.

  The gaming machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment provides an effect related to a variable display game (special graphic variable display game) for changing the identification information (identification symbol, decorative special symbol, decorative first symbol AC, special special symbol). Is provided on the display device 41 with an effect control means (effect control device 300). The gaming machine 10 includes a movable combination (internal combination 44c, 44d) capable of executing a predetermined operation in front of the display device 41, and a light emission effect means (guide) capable of executing a predetermined light emission effect in front of the display device 41. A light plate 251 and a light emitting member thereof, or light emitting members of the internal components 44c and 44d). The effect control means can execute the initial operation of the movable accessory and the light emission effect means when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, and the light emission effect of the light emission effect means during the initial operation of the movable accessory. And the initial operation is not executed.

  According to the gaming machine 10 as described above, as a plurality of members for performing an effect related to the game, a movable accessory (internal combination 44c, 44d) and a light emitting effect means (the light guide plate 251 and its light emitting member, or the internal combination) The light emitting members 44c and 44d) can be in a mode in which the initial operation can be easily confirmed, so that maintenance can be performed efficiently.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, the light emission effecting unit is configured so that the light guide plate 251 in which a predetermined pattern emerges based on the light irradiation from the end and the light guide plate 251 is opposed to the facing surface of the light guide plate 251. Irradiation means (light emitting member of the light guide plate 251) disposed on the end of the light plate 251 and capable of irradiating the light guide plate 251 with light. The production control means (production control device 300) does not irradiate the irradiation means with light during the initial operation of the movable combination (internal combination 44c, 44d). According to the gaming machine 10 as described above, the game hall manager and the like can check the initial operations of the light guide plate 251 and the movable accessory separately, so that maintenance can be performed efficiently.

[Ninth Embodiment]
The ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to eighth embodiments. The ninth embodiment relates to the effect of a variable display game before and after a power failure recovery.

[Timing chart of display mode of the variable display game according to the ninth embodiment]
FIG. 97 is a timing chart showing an example of the timing of the display mode (effect mode) of the variable display game before and after the power failure recovery according to the ninth embodiment.

  At time T81, when there are two deviation hold and hit hold in the starting memory in this order, when the variable display game based on the loss hold is started, the special LED used to execute the variable display game (Special figure display (special figure 1 display 51 or special figure 2 display 52), light emitting section) starts to emit light (ON), and on the display screen of the display device 41, a decoration identification pattern (identification information, identification pattern, decoration) Fluctuation display by special symbols, decorative first symbols A to C, main symbols) is started. Note that the loss hold is a hold (starting memory) in which the display result (stop result) of the variable display game is in a stop state, and the hit hold is a hold when the display result of the variable display game is a big hit result (special result). It is.

  On the other hand, the gaming state is not a special gaming state (big hit state) but a normal gaming state, and the internal bonuses (44c, 44d) are stopped.

  Then, the power is turned off at time T82 due to a power failure, and after the power failure state continues until time T83, when the power is turned on (recovered) at time T83, the variable display game based on loss hold is resumed. The light emission of the LED starts again (ON). On the other hand, a power failure recovery screen (start-up screen) is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 instead of a decorative identification symbol. Thereafter, the initial operation control process of the internal actors 44c and 44d is started along with power recovery, so that the initial operation of the internal actors 44c and 44d is performed as the first operation.

  The game control device 100 (starting storage means) causes a power failure in a state in which the starting memory stored in the RAM includes a starting memory in which the display result of the special figure variation display game becomes a big hit result (special result). In this case, the backup power supply unit 420 can hold the start-up memory that is the special result.

  At time T84, when the variable display game based on loss hold is completed, the special-purpose LED is turned off (off). In addition, you may make special figure LED light-emit (on) in the state which will be in a peeling stop mode.

  Then, when the variable display game based on the hit hold is executed at time T85, the special-purpose LED starts to emit light (ON). In addition, on the display screen of the display device 41, when the power failure recovery screen is completed, the decorative identification symbol is displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the variable display game based on the winning hold, and the reach effect is started. Thereafter, the effects of the internal actors 44c and 44d corresponding to the reach effect are executed as the operation during the reach (second operation).

  At time T86, when the variable display game based on the hit hold is finished, the special figure LED is turned off (off), and the operation during the reach of the internal accessory 44c44d is finished. In addition, you may make special figure LED light-emit (on) in the state used as a big hit result aspect (special result aspect). Then, the decoration identification symbol on the display screen of the display device 41 stops changing display, and a big hit result mode (special result mode) such as “777” is displayed, for example, and a fanfare effect (not shown) from time T86 to time T87. After that, the big hit effect (the big hit middle screen, the big hit round effect) is started from time T87.

  When the big hit effect is started at time T87, the gaming state becomes a big hit (hit state, special game state), and the effects of the internal actors 44c and 44d corresponding to the big hit effect are operations during the big hit (third operation). Executed. As described above, in any of the first operation, the second operation, and the third operation, the internal combinations 44c and 44d that are the same movable combination operate.

  If the initial action (first action) of the internal actors 44c and 44d is not completed when the variable display game based on the winning hold is executed, the reach operation (second action) is performed. It is good also as skipping without performing and performing operation | movement during a big hit (3rd operation | movement) after a 1st operation | movement.

  Further, when the power is turned on (recovered) at time T83, the change display game based on the missed hold may not be restarted and may be started again from the beginning. In this way, by starting over from the beginning, even if the variation display game based on the missed hold has a short variation time (in the case of variation without reach), a time margin is generated, and the internal bonuses 44c and 44d are generated during the variation display game. Since the initial operation (first operation) is easily completed, the operation during reach (second operation) can be executed without skipping after the initial operation.

  It should be noted that the same movable accessory (internal combination 44c, 44d) is operated in both the initial operation (first operation) and the reach operation (second operation), and a big hit is made by the movable combination. The middle operation (third operation) may not be executed. Further, the operation during the big hit (third operation) may be executed by another movable accessory (a movable accessory other than the internal actors 44c and 44d (for example, the external accessory 95a)). Even in such a mode, since the initial action of the movable combination is executed during the variable display game based on the off-hold, the movement during the reach by the movable combination is immediately started during the reach presentation of the variable display game based on the hit hold. Can improve the interest of the game.

[Operations and effects of the ninth embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment is a variable display game (special map variable display game) in which the identification information (identification symbol, special ornament symbol, ornament identification symbol, ornament first symbol AC, this special symbol) is varied. When the display result is a special result (a big hit result mode), it is possible to generate a special game state (during a big hit, a big hit game state) that gives a player a game value. The gaming machine 10 has a start-up memory (holding) that is a right to execute a variable display game based on a movable accessory (internal accessory 44c, 44d) for performing a game effect and establishment of a start condition (for example, winning at a start winning opening). Start memory means (game control device 100) capable of storing the control, control of the movable accessory, and control for displaying the start memory display corresponding to the start memory (special figure changing hold display 643, hold display 633). Executable control means (production control device 300). The start memory means holds the start memory that becomes the special result when a power failure occurs in the state where the start memory that includes the special display result of the variable display game is included in the stored start memory. When the power failure (power off) occurs when the start memory stored in the start memory means includes the start memory in which the display result of the variable display game is a special result, the effect control means Later, in the variable display game executed after the first action, the movable accessory is operated in the second action (the action during reach) in the first action (initial action). In the special gaming state executed after the operation, the movable accessory is operated in the third operation (the operation during the big hit), and is the same in any of the first operation, the second operation, or the third operation. Operate the movable object.

  According to such a gaming machine 10, the second operation (reach) is performed by performing the first operation (initial operation) by the movable combination (internal combination 44c, 44d) after the power failure recovery (recovery). Since the production of the movable accessory by the middle operation) or the third operation (the big hit middle operation) can be started immediately, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the effect control means (the effect control device 300) is a variable display game (special figure change) in the start memory (hold) stored by the start memory means (game control device 100). When a power outage (power off) occurs in a state in which a start memory is included in which the display result of the display game is a special result (a big hit result mode), the movable accessory (internal accessory 44c, 44d) is operated in the first operation (initial operation), and in the variable display game executed after the first operation, the movable accessory is operated in the second operation (reach operation), and the first operation The same movable accessory is operated in both of the second operation and the second operation. According to such a gaming machine 10, the second operation (reach) is performed by performing the first operation (initial operation) by the movable combination (internal combination 44c, 44d) after the power failure recovery (recovery). Since it is possible to immediately start the production of the movable accessory by the middle operation), it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the same manner.

[Tenth embodiment]
The tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99. FIG. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to ninth embodiments. The tenth embodiment relates to display of identification information (decoration special symbol, ornament identification symbol) when a big hit occurs.

[Example of Display Screen of Display Device According to Tenth Embodiment]
FIG. 98 shows the display device 41 when the identification information (identification symbol, ornament special symbol, ornament identification symbol, ornament first symbol AC, special special symbol) is displayed in each display mode in the tenth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a display screen.

  First, FIG. 98 (a) shows that when the game state is the normal game state, that is, during the first period, the stop result (display result) of the variable display game (special display variable display game) is the jackpot result mode (special result). Mode), that is, the display screen of the display device 41 in the first display mode. First decorative patterns AC of the variable display area 610 (left area 610A (left variable display area 610A), right area 610B (right variable display area 610B), middle area 610C (center variable display area 610C)) The left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c) are stopped in a big hit result mode, for example, “777”, and the characters “! Big hit!” Are displayed at the top of the display screen.

  In the first display patterns A to C of the first display mode, the character (tiger taro) and the character name “tiger taro” are displayed together with the identification information (symbol “7”).

  Note that when the variable display game results in a stop result, the start-up memory (hold) corresponding to the variable display game is digested, and the special map is changing in the hold digest area 640 (specific display portion, variable hold display area) The hold display 643 (starting memory display, special figure digestion hold display) is not displayed. Moreover, although the hold display part 630 (starting memory display part) and the hold display 633 (holding, start memory) are not displayed, the hold display part 630 may be displayed. Further, the effect control device 300 uses the decorative first symbols A to C of the first display mode to cause the character (such as tiger taro) to perform a predetermined action at the time of temporary stop, thereby making a big hit symbol (for example, “777”). You may make it perform the production which stops.

  Next, FIG. 98 (b) shows the result of stopping the variable display game (special figure variable display game) when the game state is the specific game state (probability change state, probability change state, short time state), that is, during the second period. It is a display screen of the display device 41 when (display result) is a jackpot result mode (special result mode), that is, the second display mode. The decorative first symbols A to C (left symbol 611a, right symbol 611b, middle symbol 611c) of the variable display region 610 (left region 610A, right region 610B, middle region 610C) are stopped in a big hit result mode, for example, “777”. The word “! Jackpot!” Is displayed at the top of the display screen. When the gaming state is the specific gaming state, for example, a right-handed instruction notification 691 that is a notification for instructing to right-hand may be displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. Further, as in the first display mode, the special figure changing hold display 643 and the like are not displayed.

  Only the identification information (symbol) “7” is displayed in large size on the decorative first symbols A to C of the second display mode, and the character or character name is not displayed.

  FIG. 98C is a display screen of the display device 41 when the gaming state is the special gaming state (big hit state), that is, during the third period. On the display screen, a round effect is displayed as an operation related to the effect of the big hit. In the upper left corner of the display screen, for example, “8 ROUND” is displayed as a round number display 676 for displaying the current number of big hit rounds.

  In addition, as identification information (symbols) of the third display mode, a variable display game (special map variable display) when the big hit result mode is displayed in the variable display region 610D (stop symbol display region 610D) in the lower left corner of the display screen. Only one piece of identification information (stop symbol 611d) of the stop result (display result) of (game) is displayed (for example, “7”). Therefore, the player can confirm during the round which symbol is a big hit by visually recognizing the identification information (stop symbol 611d) of the third display mode. As a result, the player can easily recognize the type of the specific game state (probability variation state, probability variation state, short-time state) that transitions after the round from the symbol type (probability variation jackpot symbol or normal jackpot symbol) during the round. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved. The identification information (stop symbol 611d) of the third display mode may be displayed in a display mode substantially the same as the first display mode or the second display mode. Moreover, you may display the identification information (symbol) of the 3rd display mode on a display screen not only during a round but during an ending. Further, the identification information of the third display mode may be an effect of rotating the shaft with the same pattern (for example, “7”). Further, the identification information of the third display mode may be axially rotated according to the effect during the round with the same pattern (for example, “7”).

  In either case where the first display mode is a big hit state (special result) or where the second display mode is a big hit state, the effect control device 300 has a big hit game state (special game state). The identification information (stop symbol 611d) can be displayed in the third display mode during (round, fanfare effect, ending effect). Therefore, the player can check the stop symbol 611d every time when the special game state is entered, and can easily grasp in advance the advantageous state (specific game state, privilege) that occurs after the special game state ends. Become.

  Also, the identification information (symbol) may be configured to include one or more common elements in any of the first to third display modes, for example, the symbols of the symbol are all displayed in red. Good.

[Screen Transition Diagram of Display Screen of Display Device According to Tenth Embodiment]
FIG. 99 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order in the tenth embodiment, and the display result of the variable display game (special display variable display game) is a special result mode (big hit result mode). This is an example of the transition of the entire game screen from when the special game (big hit round) starts.

  FIG. 99 (b1) is the same diagram as FIG. 98 (a), and when the gaming state is the normal gaming state (during the first period), the stop result (display result) of the variable display game is the jackpot result mode ( It is a display screen of the display device 41 in the case of the special result mode), that is, the first display mode.

  As shown in FIG. 99 (b2), the effect control device 300 hides the decorative first symbols A to C in the first display mode. In addition, as part of the fanfare effect, the effect control device 300 displays the numbers (identification information, symbols) of the decorative first symbol B (right symbol 611b) of the variable display area 610B displayed when the big hit result mode is achieved ( For example, the identification information (stop symbol 611d) of the third display mode of the variable display area 610D is displayed at a certain position. In addition, although the characters “! Jackpot!” Are left at the top of the display screen, they may be hidden.

  Then, as shown by a broken line arrow in FIG. 99 (b3), the effect control device 300 smoothly moves the identification information (stop symbol 611d) of the third display mode of the variable display area 610D to the lower center of the display screen. Thus, the player can visually recognize the manner in which “7” of the stop symbol 611d moves.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99 (b4), the effect control device 300 smoothly moves the identification information (stop symbol 611d) of the third display mode of the variable display area 610D to the lower left corner of the display screen before the start of the round. By doing so, “7” is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen as in the stop symbol 611d of the third display mode described above with reference to FIG. 98 (c), and the round effect is started (“1 ROUND” is displayed). Is displayed).

  In this way, when the display result of the variable display game is the jackpot result mode, from the fanfare effect to the round effect, in the place where the decoration first symbol B (right symbol 611b) of the first display mode is displayed, The identification information (stop symbol 611d) of the third display mode is displayed, and the stop symbol 611d is smoothly moved as it is to the lower left corner of the display screen, thereby easily identifying the type of the specific gaming state after the round is over. In addition to being able to recognize it, it is also possible to produce a visual effect, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In FIG. 99, the identification information of the third display mode (stop symbol 611d) is displayed at the place where the decorative first symbol B (right symbol 611b) is displayed in the identification information (symbol) of the first display mode. Is displayed, and the stop symbol 611d is moved to the lower left corner of the display screen. However, the decorative first symbol A (left symbol 611a) or the decorative first symbol C (middle symbol 611c) of the first display mode is displayed. The stop symbol 611d may be displayed at the displayed location, and the stop symbol 611d may be moved to the lower left corner of the display screen.

[Operation and Effect of Tenth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment provides effects related to a variable display game (special graphic variable display game) that varies identification information (identification symbol, special ornament symbol, first ornament symbol A to C, special special symbol). Is provided on the display device 41 with an effect control means (effect control device 300). The effect control means displays the identification information in the first display mode (the big hit result mode in the normal gaming state (FIG. 98 (a))) during the first period (normal gaming state), and in the second period. In the middle (specific game state), the identification information is displayed in the second display mode (big hit result mode in the specific game state (FIG. 98 (b))), and the display result of the variable display game is the special result (big hit) State), the identification information is displayed in the third display mode (display mode in the special game state (FIG. 98 (c)) during the special game state (big hit game state) that gives the player a game value. )).

  According to such a gaming machine 10, since the display mode of the identification information changes according to the gaming state, it can be notified whether or not the gaming state is advantageous to the player, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can do. Further, by displaying the identification information during the special game state, it becomes easy to grasp in advance the advantageous state (specific game state, privilege) that occurs after the special game state ends.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, the production control means (production control device 300) has identification information (identification design, special decoration design, first design design A to C, special special design) as the first. During the period (ordinary gaming state), when the first display mode (big hit result mode in normal gaming state (FIG. 98 (a))) results in a special result (big hit state), and during the second period (specific In the case of a special result in the second display mode (a big hit result mode in the case of a specific game state (FIG. 98B)) in the special display state (a big win game state) The identification information is displayed in the third display mode (display mode in the special gaming state (FIG. 98 (c))) According to such a gaming machine 10, the special result is displayed in the first display mode. In any case where a special result is obtained in the second display mode. Since the identification information in the third display mode is displayed in the game status, the player easily grasp special game state after the end of the advantageous state (specific gaming state, privilege) generated in advance.

[Eleventh embodiment]
The eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 103. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to tenth embodiments. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those in the first to tenth embodiments, and repeated descriptions are omitted as appropriate.

  The eleventh embodiment relates to a configuration aspect (configuration aspect) of a decoration special symbol of the decoration special figure variation display game executed on the display device 41 and a variation aspect (variation display aspect) of the decoration special symbol.

[Composition mode and variation mode of decoration special design]
FIG. 100 is a diagram illustrating a configuration aspect and a variation aspect of a decorative special symbol (decorative identification information, decorative symbol) displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. On the display screen, the left symbol 611a (first identification information), the right symbol 611b (second identification information), and the middle symbol 611c (third identification information) can be variably displayed as the special decoration symbols. . The fluctuation display of the left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c is displayed in the left fluctuation display area 610A, the right fluctuation display area 610B, and the central fluctuation display area 610C, respectively. These variation displays are set as part of the variation effect by the effect control device 300 in steps B2010 and B2013 of the variation effect setting process. In addition, regarding the variation of the decorative special figure variation display game, the variation before the reach establishment may be referred to as the first half variation, and the variation after the reach establishment (during the reach) may be referred to as the second half variation.

  As shown in (a1) of FIG. 100, in the variable display before reaching reach, that is, before reaching reach, the left symbol 611a is a character image 612a (character component, character part) and a number (character) indicating a character. Is composed of a character image 613a (character component, character part). Similarly, in the variable display before reach establishment, the right symbol 611b is composed of a character image 612b (character component, character part) indicating a character and a character image 613b (character component, character part) indicating a number. Numbers are letters representing numbers, and include Chinese numerals and Roman numerals in addition to the Arabic numerals shown in the figure.

  In this embodiment, when the decorative special design includes characters and numbers as images, the characters correspond to the numbers one to one and differ for each number. May be used.

  On the other hand, in the variable display before the establishment of reach (A1), the middle symbol 611c displayed in the center is composed only of character images 613c (character constituent elements, character portions) indicating numbers. In this way, the middle symbol 611c is displayed smaller than the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b, and the central variation display region 610C is smaller (narrower) than the left variation display region 610A and the right variation display region 610B. ). For this reason, on the display screen, an area other than the variable display area 610 is expanded, and an effect area for performing an effect other than the variable display can be effectively secured, and the fun of the game is improved. Further, since the middle symbol 611c is composed of only the character image 613c indicating the numbers, the middle symbol 611c does not overlap the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b (or the left variation display region 610A and the right variation display region 610B). It becomes easy for the player to visually recognize each variation display of the left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In (A1), not only the middle symbol 611c but also one of the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b may be composed of only the character images 613a and 613b indicating numbers. In this case, an area other than the variable display area 610 is further expanded on the display screen.

  In order to impress a character on the player, if the three decorative special symbols of the left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c each include a character image indicating the character, three special ornament symbols are displayed. The display device 41 may occupy most of the display screen and be displayed, and there is a possibility that the effect cannot be effectively displayed outside the variable display area 610.

  Further, before the reach of (A1) is established, the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b are variably displayed by vertical scrolling. For example, in vertical scrolling, a series of nine symbols (decoration identification symbols) corresponding to numbers from 1 to 9 appear on the display screen in order and cross the display screen in the vertical direction (vertical direction). After moving, it disappears from the display screen. It should be noted that the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b may be variably displayed by horizontal scrolling in which a series of symbols moves in the horizontal direction.

  On the other hand, before the reach of (A1) is established, the middle symbol 611c (third identification information) is the left symbol 611a (first identification information) and the right symbol 611b (second identification information), and the direction of the variable display Are different, and are displayed in a variable manner with the rotational fluctuation visually recognized by the player so as to rotate around the axis. The rotation variation is not limited to a mode in which one symbol is rotated, but may be a mode in which a plurality of symbols are switched and displayed each time a series of symbols rotate. Note that instead of rotational fluctuations, a series of overlapping symbols can be displayed in the front-rear direction (forward / backward scroll) so that they move in the front-rear direction, or simply a series of symbols can be switched in sequence at the same position. Switching fluctuation to be displayed or fluctuation such that one symbol is shaken small may be performed.

  Note that the rotation variation (forward / backward variation, switching variation, and shaking variation) of the middle symbol 611c is a variation in which the symbol does not cross the display screen. Unlike the vertical scroll of the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b, the variation variation on the left is displayed. There is no need for a wide variable display area extending in one direction (scroll direction) like the area 610A or the right variable display area 610B. Accordingly, due to the rotational fluctuation of the middle symbol 611c, the central fluctuation display area 610C becomes smaller (narrower) than the left fluctuation display area 610A and the right fluctuation display area 610B. For this reason, it is possible to effectively secure an effect area for performing effects other than the variable display, and it becomes easy to visually recognize each variable display of the left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  In (A1), two hold displays 633 are displayed on the hold display unit 630 corresponding to the hold (here, the first start-up memory) in the lower part of the display screen. In addition, a square frame holding digestion area 640 is displayed at the lower center of the display screen. A pending change display 633a indicating a hold relating to the currently executing special figure change display game (starting memory that has been the right to execute this special figure change display game) is displayed in the hold digest area 640. However, due to the rotational fluctuation of the middle symbol 611c, the central fluctuation display area 610C becomes smaller and does not overlap the hold display portion 630 or the hold digestion area 640. Therefore, the middle symbol 611c also overlaps the hold display 633 or the changing hold display 633a. In addition, the visibility of the middle symbol 611c, the hold display 633, or the changing hold display 633a becomes good, and the entertainment of the game is improved. Further, the special figure 1 hold number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 hold (first start memory) number “2”, and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 shows the current special figure 2 hold (second display). The start memory) number “0” is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 100 (A), when reach is established (when reach is established), the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b are temporarily stopped and fluctuate. That is, the variation display mode is changed and changed. The configuration of the left symbol 611a is not changed, and the left symbol 611a is composed of a character image 612a indicating a character and a character image 613a indicating a number, as in (a). Similarly, the configuration pattern of the right symbol 611b does not change, and the right symbol 611b includes a character image 612b indicating a character and a character image 613b indicating a number, as in (A). However, the overall size of the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b is smaller than before the reach is established (before the temporary stop).

  On the other hand, when the reach of (A2) is established, the middle symbol 611c is variably displayed by vertical scrolling, and the variation mode is changed and changed from the variation display by the rotation variation before the reach is established. The direction of the variable display of the middle symbol 611c is the same as the direction of the variable display before the temporary stop of the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b (that is, the vertical or vertical direction of the display screen). (The direction of the variable display is aligned.) Therefore, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be enhanced by eliminating the player's uncomfortable feeling due to the rotation variation of the middle symbol 611c. In (A2), the middle symbol 611c and the middle symbol 611c ′ of the number 6 are shown in a series of a plurality of symbols (decoration identification symbols) that move on the display screen by vertical scrolling. Yes.

  Further, when the reach of (A2) is established, the configuration of the middle symbol 611c is changed and changed, and the character image 612c indicating the character and the character image indicating the number are changed from the configuration before the reach is established of only the character image 613c. It changes to the composition aspect comprised from 613c. Therefore, the configuration pattern of the middle symbol 611c is the same as the configuration pattern of the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b, and these three (three types) decorative special symbols are common and the player feels uncomfortable. In addition, the player can be surprised to increase the interest of the game. Furthermore, since the player pays attention to the middle symbol 611c (611c ′) that has been added to the character image 612c (612c ′) and changed to a new configuration mode, it becomes easier to understand the progress of the game, such as that the reach has been established. .

  Note that the overall size of the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b is reduced from before reaching reach (before temporary stop), so that the middle symbol 611c composed of the character image 612c and the character image 613c is variably displayed by vertical scrolling. Also, the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b (or the left variable display region 610A and the right variable display region 610B) do not overlap.

  Further, before and after reaching the reach, the small design which is a decorative special symbol displayed in a variable manner in the small change display area 615 does not change the configuration mode and the change mode and can give the player a sense of security. it can. The left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c are set as large symbols, and are displayed in a variable display area 615 that is smaller than the large symbol variable display area 610. And The small symbol may be the aforementioned fourth special symbol (fourth symbol).

[Modification of the decoration special design and variation]
FIG. 101 is a diagram illustrating a modified example of the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decorative special symbol displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. Configurations other than those described below are common to both FIG. 101 and FIG.

  In (a) of FIG. 101, the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decorative special symbol before reach establishment are changed from (a) of FIG.

  As shown in (a), in the variable display before the reach is established, the left symbol 611a is composed only of a character image 613a indicating a number. Also, the right symbol 611b is composed only of a character image 613b indicating a number. The left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b are variably displayed by the rotation fluctuation visually recognized by the player so as to rotate around the axis. Instead of the rotation fluctuation, the above-mentioned front-back fluctuation and switching fluctuation may be used.

  In (i), the left fluctuation display area 610A and the right fluctuation display area 610B become smaller (narrower) than the central fluctuation display area 610C due to the rotation fluctuation of the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b. For this reason, it is possible to effectively secure an effect area for performing effects other than the variable display, and it becomes easy to visually recognize each variable display of the left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  On the other hand, in (i), in the variable display before reach is established, the middle symbol 611c is composed of a character image 612c indicating a character and a character image 613c indicating a number. The middle symbol 611c is variably displayed by vertical scrolling.

  In (b) of FIG. 101, when the reach is established (when reach is established), the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b are temporarily stopped and fluctuate, so that the fluctuation mode is changed from the rotational fluctuation before the reach is established. Change. In addition, the configuration mode of the left symbol 611a is changed and changed, and the configuration mode of the character image 612a indicating the character and the character image 613a indicating the number is changed from the configuration mode before the reach of the character image 613a only. . Also, the configuration mode of the right symbol 611b is changed and changed, and the configuration mode before the reach establishment of only the character image 613b is changed to a configuration mode including a character image 612b indicating a character and a character image 613b indicating a number. . By changing the configuration of the left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c, it is possible to surprise the player and enhance the interest of the game.

  Further, in (A2), when the reach is established, the middle symbol 611c is variably displayed due to the rotation variation, and the variation mode is changed and changed from the variation display by the vertical scroll before the reach is established. Instead of the rotation fluctuation, the above-mentioned front-back fluctuation and switching fluctuation may be used. In addition, the direction of variation display of the middle symbol 611c corresponds to the direction of variation display before the temporary stop of the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b (that is, the circumferential direction around the axis). By changing the variation of the left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Similarly, in (A2), the center fluctuation display area 610C becomes smaller (narrower) than the left fluctuation display area 610A and the right fluctuation display area 610B due to the rotation fluctuation of the middle symbol 611c. For this reason, it is possible to effectively secure an effect area for performing effects other than the variable display, and it becomes easy to visually recognize each variable display of the left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[Reference table]
The table in FIG. 102A is a reference table that is referred to by the effect control device 300 in, for example, steps B2010 and B2013 of the variable effect setting process. Such a reference table is stored in a storage unit (memory such as RAM 322 or FeRAM 323) of the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 refers to the table in FIG. 102A and sets the configuration aspect and the variation aspect of the decorative special symbol as part of the variation effect. The table in FIG. 102A corresponds to the configuration aspect and the variation aspect of the decorative special symbol in FIG.

  The effect control device 300 can determine from the variation pattern type (B1904, B2001) whether or not there is a reach in the decorative special figure variation display game to be executed. When there is a reach, that is, when a reach occurs, the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decorative special symbols before and after reaching reach are set as shown in the table of FIG. 102A. As a result, as shown in FIG. 100, the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b change from the vertical scroll before the reach establishment to the temporary stop state when the reach is established, but the configuration including numbers and characters does not change. When the reach is established, the middle symbol 611c changes from the rotational fluctuation before the reach establishment to the vertical scroll, and the configuration mode changes from the one containing only numbers to the one containing numbers and characters.

  In the present embodiment, before the reach is established, the configuration pattern and the variation mode of the decoration special symbol are not changed from the start of the decoration special figure change display game to the reach establishment, but a configuration that changes is also possible. That is, it is only necessary that the configuration mode and reach mode before reach as shown in the table of FIG.

  When there is no reach, that is, when reach does not occur, as shown in the table of FIG. 102A, the configuration and variation modes of the special decoration symbols are set so as not to change from the start to the end of the special decoration variation display game. From the start to the end of the decorative special symbol variation display game, the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b are variably displayed by vertical scrolling, and the middle symbol 611c is variably displayed by rotational variation.

  In addition, the structure which the production | presentation control apparatus 300 determines the variation aspect of a decoration identification symbol by lottery is also possible. For example, when there is no reach, the middle symbol 611c may be vertically scrolled with a high winning probability and may be rotated with a low winning probability (unlike FIG. 102A, the middle symbol 611c may also be vertically scrolled). Conversely, when there is a reach, the middle symbol 611c may be vertically scrolled with a low winning probability and the rotational variation may be made with a high winning probability before the reach is established (unlike FIG. 102A, the middle symbol 611c may also be vertically scrolled). . If it does in this way, at the time of the start of a decoration special figure fluctuation display game, the expectation degree of reach and the expectation degree of jackpot can be notified by the rotation fluctuation (fluctuation mode) of the middle symbol 611c. That is, if there is a rotational fluctuation of the middle symbol 611c, the player can expect the occurrence of the reach and the occurrence of the big hit, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In addition, a configuration in which a configuration mode and a variation mode of the decorative special symbol are set according to a game state such as a normal game state or a time-short / probability change state (specific game state) is also possible. For example, in the short time / probability state where the variation time is short, it is difficult to understand even if the configuration mode and variation mode of the decoration special symbol change, so the configuration mode and variation mode of the decoration special symbol from the start to the end of the decoration special diagram variation display game You may set so that it may not change. In addition, since the decorative special figure 2 variable display game frequently occurs in the short time / probable change state and the fluctuation time is shortened, the decorative special figure 2 variable display game starts the decorative special figure variable display game regardless of the presence or absence of reach. You may set so that the structure aspect and variation aspect of a decoration special symbol may not change from the end to the end. In other words, only in the decorative special figure 1 variable display game, it may be set so that the configuration aspect and the variable aspect of the decorative special symbol are changed before and after the reach is established.

  Furthermore, according to the reach system (N reach, SP reach, etc.) known from the variation pattern type (B1904, B2001), the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decorative special symbol after reach establishment may be set. If it does in this way, the expectation degree of jackpot can be alert | reported by the structure aspect and variation aspect of a decoration special symbol.

  FIG. 102B is a modification of the reference table corresponding to FIG. With this reference table, as shown in FIG. 101, the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b change from the rotational fluctuation before the reach establishment to the temporary stop state when the reach is established, and the configuration mode includes only numerals. And changes to those containing characters. When the reach is established, the middle symbol 611c changes from vertical scrolling before reach establishment to rotational fluctuation, and the configuration changes from those including numbers and characters to those including only numbers. When there is no reach (when no reach occurs), as shown in the table of FIG. 102B, the configuration mode and the variation mode of the decoration special symbol are set so as not to change from the start to the end of the decoration special diagram variation display game.

  In FIG. 102A and FIG. 102B, the configuration pattern and the variation pattern of one of the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b before the reach is established may be the same as the middle symbol 611c. In this case, the area other than the variable display area 610 is further expanded on the display screen before reach establishment.

〔Screen transition〕
103A and 103B are screen transition diagrams showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series with respect to the eleventh embodiment.

  (C1) of FIG. 103A is a display screen at the time of starting the decoration special figure variation display game. As a result of the previous stoppage of the decorative special symbol change display game, the stop symbols of the left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c are displayed in the variable display area 610. In addition, a stoppage symbol of three small symbols is displayed in a small fluctuation display area 615. Then, the hold display 633 displayed corresponding to the hold (here, the first start-up memory) moves to the right (hold shift), and the hold display 633 at the right end of the hold display section 630 is displayed in the hold frame area 640 of the rectangular frame. Moves (hold shift). Furthermore, in the special figure 1 hold number display 650, the number of special figure 1 hold (first start memory) changes from “3” to “2”, and in the special figure 2 hold number display 660, the current special figure 2 hold is held. The number “0” of (second start memory) is displayed.

  (A2) in FIG. 103A is the same as (A1) in FIG. 100, but the variation of the left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c as the decorative special symbol (large symbol) is changed in the variation display area 610. The change is being executed, and the change of the small symbol as the decoration reduction symbol is being executed in the change display area 615. It should be noted that the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b are larger in size and fluctuated by vertical scrolling than the stop symbol which is the stop result of the decorative special symbol fluctuation display game in which the reach of (c) 1 occurs (configuration) The aspect does not change). Further, the middle symbol 611c changes from a stop symbol configuration mode (consisting of a character image 612c and a character image 613c), which is a stop result of the decorative special figure variation display game in which the reach of (c) 1 occurs, and indicates a number. It becomes a constitutional mode consisting only of the character image 613c and rotates.

  (C) As shown in (c), after the variable display continues, reach occurs as shown in (c) in FIG. 103A, and the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b temporarily stop (fluctuate). At the same time, the configuration mode and the variation mode of the middle symbol 611c change. Note that (c5) in FIG. 103A is the same as (a2) in FIG.

  Subsequently, after the reach fluctuation continues as shown in (c) 6, the middle symbol 611c is also temporarily stopped (fluctuated) in addition to the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b as shown in (c). The two symbols temporarily stop (shake fluctuation). Thereafter, as shown in (c), the three symbols are completely stopped, and the off-stop symbol is displayed.

  It should be noted that the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b are enlarged in size from the decorative symbol at the time of temporary stop (fluctuation fluctuation) of (U7) in the slipping stop symbol of (U8). Further, the middle symbol 611c changes from the configuration mode (consisting of the character image 612c and the character image 613c) at the time of temporary stop (swing fluctuation) of (c) 7 to the configuration mode including only the character image 613c indicating a number. To do.

  Thereafter, in (c), the decorative special figure variation display game is executed again. And since the reach does not occur after the decoration special figure variation display game continues as in (C10), in (C11), the configuration mode and variation mode of the left symbol 611a, the right symbol 611b, and the middle symbol 611c are The change stop symbol is displayed without changing.

  As described above, the configuration aspect and the variation aspect of the decorative special symbol have been described. However, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, every time the left symbol 611a and the right symbol 611b temporarily stop even before reach is established. In addition, the configuration mode and the variation mode of the middle symbol 611c may be changed. The pseudo-continuous production is a pseudo-variation (sub-variation) that quasi-temporarily stops (pseudo-stops) the decorative special symbol that is variably displayed between the start and end of a single special-figure display game. Is an effect that is continuously performed a predetermined number of times. In addition, at the time of temporary stop, the pseudo-continuous symbol suggesting the pseudo-continuous effect may be stopped and displayed as the middle symbol 611c.

  In addition, the decorative special symbol is configured not only in a character image or character image and character image, but also in a character image and a frame image surrounding the character image, or a character image and a character image. An aspect composed of a frame image (enclosing character image and character image) may be included. Further, a configuration in which another image such as a frame image is used instead of the character image is also possible.

[Operations and effects of the eleventh embodiment]
According to the eleventh embodiment, the gaming machine 10 receives first identification information (eg, left symbol 611a), second identification information (eg, right symbol 611b), and third identification information (eg, middle symbol 611c). An effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying a variable display game for variable display on the display device 41 is provided. The effect control means can display on the display device 41 the first identification information or the second identification information of a configuration aspect including a component (character image) indicating a character and a component (character image) indicating a number. . The effect control means includes the first identification information and the second identification information together with the third identification information of a configuration aspect that includes a component (character image) indicating a number but does not include a component (character image) indicating a character. Can be displayed on the display device 41.

  According to such a gaming machine 10, the third identification information (for example, the middle symbol 611c) includes a component (character image) indicating a number and does not include a component (character image) indicating a character. On the display screen of the display device 41, an area other than the variable display area 610 for displaying each identification information is expanded. Therefore, in this widened area, an effect area for performing effects other than the variable display can be effectively secured, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, since the third identification information (for example, the middle symbol 611c) is composed of only a character image indicating a number and is small, the first identification information (for example, the left symbol 611a) and the second identification information (for example, the right symbol 611b). And 3rd identification information (for example, middle symbol 611c) can be displayed without mutually overlapping, it becomes easy for a player to visually recognize the change display of each identification information, and the interest of a game improves. Therefore, in order to make the player recognize a character such as a character who is a motif of the effect of the gaming machine 10, the character image is displayed using the first identification information (for example, the left symbol 611a) or the second identification information (for example, the right symbol 611b). ), The display device 41 can reliably execute the variable display game.

  Also, according to the eleventh embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) changes and displays the configuration mode of the third identification information (for example, the middle symbol 611c) when reach is established for the variable display game. It can be displayed on the device 41. Therefore, it is possible to surprise the player and enhance the interest of the game. In addition, since the player pays attention to the third identification information changed to the new configuration mode, it becomes easy to understand the progress of the game such as the reach has been established.

  Further, according to the eleventh embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) uses the change mode of the third identification information (for example, the middle symbol 611c) as the change mode before reach is established for the change display game. Different from the first identification information (for example, the left symbol 611a) and the second identification information (for example, the right symbol 611b). The effect control means (the effect control device 300) temporarily stops the first identification information and the second identification information when the reach is established with respect to the variable display game, and changes the variation mode of the third identification information. The identification information of 1 and the 2nd identification information are made to respond | correspond with the fluctuation | variation aspect before temporarily stopping.

  Therefore, before reach is established, the direction of the variable display of the third identification information (for example, the middle symbol 611c) is the first identification information (for example, the left symbol 611a) and the second identification information (for example, the right symbol 611b). The player's uncomfortable feeling due to being different from the direction of the variable display is reduced when reach is established. Moreover, the direction of the variable display of the third identification information (for example, the middle symbol 611c) is changed, so that the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

[Twelfth embodiment]
The twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 108. Configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to eleventh embodiments. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those in the first to eleventh embodiments, and repeated descriptions are omitted as appropriate.

  The twelfth embodiment relates to a striking notification for notifying a player of a specific striking method such as left-handed or right-handed (or instructing, guiding, or notifying). As described above, the hitting method is a launching mode of the ball launching device, and corresponds to an area in which it is recommended to launch a game ball to flow down in the game area 32. In the hitting notification for notifying the hitting information, in particular, the hitting instruction display such as the right strike instruction display 657, 658 and the left strike instruction display 659 displayed on the display screen of the display device 41, or indirectly specified A mode display 645 that recommends the player how to hit is included.

  Of the hitting notifications, the right-handed notification recommends to the player that the game ball is fired in the right region (first game region) that is the region on the right side of the center case 40 in the game region 32. Among left-handed notifications, left-handed notifications (normally-notified notifications) recommend to the player that a game ball be fired in the left region (second game region), which is the left side of the center case 40 in the game region 32. .

  In the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state, it is recommended to launch a game ball in the left area of the game area 32, and left-handed information for recommending left-handed is notified to the player. In addition, in a special gaming state (big hit state, small hit state) that is more advantageous to the player than in the normal gaming state, and in a specific gaming state (short time state or probability variation state), a game ball is fired in the right area of the gaming area 32 It is recommended that the player be notified of right-handed information for recommending right-handed.

[Main processing (production control device)]
The main process according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing a procedure of main processing executed by the effect control device 300. The main process in FIG. 104 is obtained by adding step B0014a to the main process in FIG. The same processes as those in FIG. 36 are denoted by the same step numbers and the description thereof is omitted.

  In step B0014a, a hitting notification process for notifying the player of how to strike left or right is executed based on the gaming state determined from the command received in the received command check process of step B0014.

[Notification of how to hit]
FIG. 105 describes details of the hitting notification process (B0014a) in the main process (FIG. 104) described above. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hitting notification process executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the current gaming state is a special gaming state (such as a big hit state) or a time reduction / probability changing state (specific gaming state) (B3501). When the current gaming state is the normal gaming state (the result of B3501 is “N”), the hitting notification process is terminated.

  The effect control device 300 receives the information of the hit command received most recently, the information of the symbol command received most recently (special symbol type of B1801 and symbol type of B1802), the number of times the probability variation state continues (for example, 50 times From the next time), from the number of times of the short time state (for example, 70 times), the number of executions of the special figure variation display game after the big hit, the probability information (B1313), etc., the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, the special gaming state ( It is possible to determine whether it is a big hit state or the like), a probability variation state, or a short time state. In addition, it can be seen from the symbol type of B1802 whether it is a probable big hit that becomes a probable state after the big hit ends or a normal big hit that becomes a short time state after the big hit ends. Also, the current gaming state can be determined from the effect mode (B1318) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state.

  When the current game state is a special game state (such as a big hit state) or a time-short / probable change state (specific game state) (the result of B3501 is “Y”), Then, a setting is made to display the right-handed instruction display 657 (first display) in the normal mode on the display device 41 in the hitting instruction display (B3502). Next, it is determined whether the current timing is after the predetermined timing (B3503). If it is not after the predetermined timing (the result of B3503 is “N”), the hitting notification process is terminated.

Here, the predetermined timing is a timing at the start of the big hit ending, at the start of the short-time / probability change state, or in the middle of the short-time / probability change state. The start of the big hit ending is when the ending command is received (B2111). The time short / probability change state starts when the variable command (fluctuation command) is received for the first time after receiving the ending command (B1206). In the present embodiment, either the time-short state or the probability variation state always occurs after the end of the big hit state. The timing in the middle of the time reduction / probability change state is, for example, when a variable command (variation command) is received a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) after the start of the time reduction / probability change state.

  On the other hand, the presentation control device 300 presents a mode display (second display) corresponding to the current gaming state as a hitting notification when the current timing is after the predetermined timing (the result of B3503 is “Y”). Is set (B3504), and the hitting notification process is terminated. The mode display mode may correspond to an effect mode that reflects the probability variation state.

  A right-handed instruction display 657 (first display) as a right-handed notification that recommends the player to launch a game ball in the right area (first game area) of the game area 32 by such a hitting notification process. The mode display (second display) can be displayed on the display device 41. Note that if the current gaming state known from the mode display is a time reduction / probability change state (specific gaming state), the player can recognize that the player should make a right turn, and therefore the mode display is also a right-handed notification. Therefore, the right-handed notification can be reliably executed by both the right-handed instruction display 657 (first display) and the mode display (second display).

  By the processing of steps B3501 and B3502, the right-handed instruction display 657 is continuously displayed in the special game state and the time-short / probable change state (specific game state) that shifts after the special game state. Therefore, the right-handed instruction display 657 allows the right-handed notification to be continuously executed for a necessary period (the special gaming state and the time-short / probable state), and the player overlooks the right-handed notification. There is no.

  Further, by the processing of steps B3503 and B3504, the mode display (second display) is after a predetermined timing (at the end of the special gaming state, at the start of the specific gaming state, or in the middle of the specific gaming state). Will be displayed. By displaying the mode display, the player can grasp the probability change state and the general power support state and can also recognize that the game ball is fired in the right area, so that the interest of the game is enhanced. Further, if the predetermined timing is at the end of the special gaming state or at the start of the short time / probability changing state, the mode display can be displayed in an appropriate period. In addition, if the predetermined timing is in the middle of the short time / probability change state, the ending effect at the end of the special game state or the effect at the start of the specific game state is avoided, and the mode display is not obstructed by other effects. Can be displayed.

[Single command processing]
With reference to FIG. 106, the single command processing (B1212) according to the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the procedure of a single-shot command process executed by the effect control device 300 in the received command analysis process (FIG. 38). The single-shot command processing in FIG. 106 is obtained by adding steps B1333 and B1334 to the single-shot command processing in FIG. Note that the same processing as that in FIG. 39 is denoted by the same step number and description thereof is omitted.

  When the MODE unit does not represent a symbol stop command (result of B1329 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a hitting instruction command (B1333). The hitting instruction command is a right-handed instruction notification command (A2705) or a left-handed instruction notification command (A7703). When the MODE section does not represent the command for instructing how to hit (the result of B1333 is “N”), the single-shot command processing is terminated.

  When the MODE unit represents a hitting instruction command (the result of B1333 is “Y”), the effect control apparatus 300 executes a hitting instruction receiving process that is a process when the hitting instruction command is received (B1334). ), Single-shot command processing is terminated.

[Processing when receiving instructions]
FIG. 107 describes details of the hitting instruction reception process (B1334) in the single-shot command process (FIG. 106) described above. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hitting notification process executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the command of the MODE unit is a normal command (B3701). When the command of the MODE section is not a normal command (result of B3701 is “N”), the process at the time of receiving the instruction to finish is finished.

  When the command of the MODE section is a normal command (result of B3701 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the right-handed instruction notification command has been received among the how-to instructions commands, that is, It is determined whether or not the direction instruction command is a right-handed instruction notification command (B3702). When a right-handed instruction notification command is received (the result of B3702 is “Y”), a special-type right-handed instruction display 658 (first display) is set for display (B3703), and the process for receiving a right-handed instruction is ended.

  When a left-handed instruction notification command is received among the hitting instruction commands (the result of B3702 is “N”), a left-handed instruction display 659 (third display) in the how-to instruction display is set to be displayed as a how-to notice. (B3704), and the process at the time of receiving the hitting instruction is terminated.

〔Screen transition〕
108A to 108C are screen transition diagrams illustrating the display screen of the display device 41 in time series with respect to the twelfth embodiment.

  108D in FIG. 108A is a display screen in the variation display area 610 during execution of the decoration special figure variation display game. Here, the special figure fluctuation display game is a special figure fluctuation display game. The on-change hold display 633a indicating the hold related to the special figure change display game being executed is displayed in the hold-up digestion area 640. Further, one hold display 633 is displayed on the hold display section 630a corresponding to the hold (here, the first start memory) related to the special figure variation display game before execution. The holding display unit 630a displays a holding display 633 (starting memory display) corresponding to the first starting memory. Further, the special figure 1 hold number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 hold (first start memory) number “1”, and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 shows the current special figure 2 hold (second display). The start memory) number “0” is displayed.

  Thereafter, in (D2), the decoration special figure variation display game is ended, and the big hit stop symbol “3, 3, 3” corresponding to the big hit result is derived. Here, the changing hold display 633a is deleted.

  Next, in (D3), the big hit fanfare effect is executed, and “Congratulations on the big hit!” Is displayed at the center of the display screen, and the big hit stop symbol “3, 3, 3” is moved to the upper left corner. It is displayed small. The following explanation will be made assuming that the big hit stop symbol is a 6R probability variation big hit symbol. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the big hit state (special game state) starts from the time when the production control device 300 receives the big hit fanfare command and starts the big hit fanfare production.

  Further, in (D3), the right-handed instruction display 657 (first display) in the normal mode is displayed in the upper right corner of the display device 41 by the process of step B3502 of the hitting notification process (FIG. 105). In the right-handed instruction display 657 in the normal mode, a character image 657a “right-handed” (character display) indicating characters and a graphic image 657b “⇒” (graphic display) indicating arrows (or symbols) are displayed together. Is. In the big hit state (special game state), it is advantageous to launch a game ball in the right region of the game region 32 where the special variable winning device 39 exists. For this reason, it is recommended (instructed and guided) that the player fires a game ball in the right area (first game area) by the right-handed instruction display 657 in the hitting notification.

  The entire image of the right-handed instruction display 657 is a combination of the character image 657 a and the graphic image 657 b and is stored in the image ROM 325 of the effect control device 300. Alternatively, when displaying the right-handed instruction display 657, the character image 657a and the graphic image 657b stored in the image ROM 325 may be combined and displayed as the right-handed instruction display 657.

  Subsequently, in (d4) and (d5), the big hit round starts and the big hit round effect is executed from 1 round to 6 rounds. Here, the big hit is 6R probability variable big hit and the big hit round is up to six rounds, but the right-handed instruction display 657 is continuously displayed from the first round to the sixth round.

  Thereafter, in (D6), a big hit ending effect is executed. Also in this case, the right-handed instruction display 657 in the normal mode composed of the character image 657a “right-handed” indicating the character and the graphic image 657b “⇒” indicating the graphic of the arrow is continuously displayed.

  Next, in (d7) of FIG. 108B, the probability variation state of the time-short / accuracy variation state starts. Also here, the right-handed instruction display 657 in the normal mode is continuously displayed (B3502). In the probability variation state (high probability state), the ordinary power support is executed. Therefore, it is advantageous to allow the ordinary game start gate 34 to pass the game ball and execute the ordinary map variation display game. For this reason, it is advantageous to launch a game ball in the right area of the game area 32 where the usual start gate 34 exists. Accordingly, the player is recommended (instructed or guided) to hit the game ball in the right area (first game area) by the right-hand instruction display 657 of the hitting instruction display.

  In addition, in (d7), since it is a predetermined timing (here, at the start of the specific gaming state), the probability variation state (probability) that is the current gaming state is determined by the process of step B3504 of the hitting notification process (FIG. 105). A mode display 645 indicating “variation state” “probability change mode entry!” (Second display, character image) is displayed large in the center of the display screen together with the right-handed instruction display 657. The mode display 645 may simply be a character image “probability variation mode”.

  In (D7), one hold display 633 is displayed on the hold display portion 630b corresponding to the hold (here, the second start memory) related to the special figure variation display game before execution. The holding display unit 630b displays a holding display 633 (starting memory display) corresponding to the second starting memory. Further, the special figure 1 hold number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 hold (first start memory) number “0”, and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 shows the current special figure 2 hold (second display). Number of start memory) “1” is displayed.

  Thereafter, in (d8), the hold shift is executed, the decorative special figure fluctuation display game starts, and the changing hold display 633a indicating the hold related to the special figure fluctuation display game being executed is displayed in the hold digestion area 640. It is displayed. Here, the special figure fluctuation display game is a special figure 2 fluctuation display game. In addition, a mode display 645 “probability variation mode” (second display) indicating a probability change state is displayed in a small size at the upper left corner of the display screen together with the right-handed instruction display 657, and the probability change state (specific game state) is started. The form changes. The mode display 645 recommends (instructs) the player to make a right stroke by indicating that the state is in a certain change state. The right-handed instruction display 657 of the normal mode is displayed on the front side (upper layer) in preference to the special decoration pattern of the special decoration map change display game.

  Next, in (d9), the player is left-handed even though the right-handed instruction display 657 recommends right-handed. For this reason, when the game ball is won by flowing down the left region to the start winning opening 36 (second predetermined region), the right-handed instruction notification command (A2705) from the game control device 100 is sent to the effect control device 300. (B1334 in FIG. 106). Then, the right-handed instruction display 658 (first display) in the special mode is displayed at the center position of the display screen for a predetermined period by the process of step B3703 of the process for receiving the hitting instruction (FIG. 107). The right-handed instruction display 658 of the special mode is displayed on the front side (upper layer) in preference to the decoration special symbol of the decoration special diagram variation display game.

  The entire image of the right-handed instruction display 658 is a combination of a character image 658 a “right-handed” indicating a character and a graphic image 658 b “⇒” indicating a graphic (or symbol) of an arrow. Stored in the ROM 325. Alternatively, when the right-handed instruction display 658 is displayed, the character image 658 a and the graphic image 658 b stored in the image ROM 325 may be combined and displayed as the right-handed instruction display 658.

  In the present embodiment, the right-handed instruction display 658 of the special mode has a shape similar to the right-handed instruction display 657 of the normal mode and differs only in size, but is not limited to the right-handed instruction display 657, which is not limited thereto. Different shapes may be used. The special mode right-handed instruction display 658 may have the same shape and the same color as the right-handed instruction display 657 of the normal mode.

  If the player is making a left strike even though the right strike is recommended (instructed), the player strongly recommends (instructs) the right strike by the right-handed indication display 658 in a special mode. . Therefore, the right-handed instruction display 658 in the special mode is displayed so as to be more conspicuous than the right-handed instruction display 657 in the normal mode. In addition, both the normal-type right-handed instruction display 657 (first image) and the special-type right-handed instruction display 658 (second image) larger than the normal-type right-handed instruction display 657 are more powerful to the player. Can recommend (instruct) right-handed.

  In (D9), there is no change in the mode display 645 “probability variation mode” indicating the probability variation state. Also, there is no change in the display mode (display position and form) of the right-handed instruction display 657, and both the character image 657a “right-handed” indicating the character and the graphic image 657b “⇒” indicating the arrow shape are the same upper right. It is continuously displayed at the corner position. However, under predetermined conditions (in a predetermined case) in which a special mode right-handed instruction display 658 is displayed, the right-handed instruction display 657 of the normal mode does not disturb the display area of the display screen. In order to ensure, only the graphic image 657b “⇒” indicating the graphic of the arrow may be displayed on the display screen.

  Next, in (D10), the right-handed instruction display 658 of the special mode is deleted after being displayed for a predetermined period at the center position of the display screen. Further, here, a hold (second start memory) is generated by winning a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 (second start winning opening), and a hold display 633 corresponding to this hold is generated, but the hold display 633 is displayed. On the other hand, the hold change notice (pre-reading effect) is executed, and the hold display 633b changed from the normal mode (for example, white) to the suggestion mode (for example, green) suggesting that the expectation degree of the big hit is high is displayed. Note that the hold change notice is executed by the process of step B1716 of the look-ahead change command process (FIG. 41) when the expectation of the jackpot of the special figure change display game related to the hold is high.

  In (D10), in response to the change to the suggestion mode and the expectation level (reliability) of the hold being high, the effect control device 300 displays the display mode (shape and shape) of the mode display 645 “probability variation mode”. Although the size and color) are changed from the normal mode to the special mode, the display mode (display position and mode) of the right-handed instruction display 657 is maintained. Thus, since the mode display 645 changes according to the degree of expectation of jackpot, the interest of the game is enhanced.

  Instead of the expected level of suspension, the display mode of the mode display 645 “probability variation mode” may be changed in response to the high degree of expectation of the jackpot of the special figure variation display game currently being executed.

  Subsequently, in (D11), SP reach occurs and the SP reach effect (predetermined effect) is executed at the center position of the screen. The mode display 645 “probability variation mode” is not displayed in order to secure the effect display area for the SP reach effect. Thereby, since the SP reach production can be executed in a wide area of the display screen, the interest of the game is enhanced.

  After that, by executing the special figure fluctuation display game several times, in (d12), the special figure fluctuation display game has been executed for the number of times (for example, 50 times) the probability variation state continues from the start of the probability variation state. The probability variation state is terminated and “end of probability variation mode” is displayed. In this example, the gaming machine 10 is an ST machine.

  As described above, there is no change in the display mode (display position and mode) of the right-handed instruction display 657 (first display) through the special game state and the subsequent time reduction / probability change state (specific game state), and the display is always constant. It is continuously displayed in a manner. On the other hand, the mode display 645 (second display) that recommends right-handed to the player by indicating that it is in a probable state changes the display mode according to the situation, such as (D7) (D10). (D11) may be switched to a non-display state and displayed intermittently.

  It should be noted that the right-handed instruction display 657 does not always have to be in a constant display mode through the special game state and the subsequent time reduction / probability change state, and may gradually be displayed lightly or the display position may change over time. . Further, in order to prevent a situation in which the player stops the game and takes a break in the short-time / probable change state, when both the hold display 633 and the changing hold display 633a disappear, the mode display 645 (second display) You may be prompted to play a game, for example by blinking.

  Thereafter, in (d) of FIG. 108C, the normal gaming state starts instead of the probability variation state, and the recommended hitting method changes from right-handed to left-handed. At the start of the normal gaming state, the game control device 100 may transmit a left-handed instruction notification command. Upon receiving the left-handed instruction notification command (B1334 in FIG. 106), the effect control device 300 displays a left-handed instruction display 659 as a how-to instruction display by the process in step B3704 of the process for receiving the hitting instruction (FIG. 107). Displayed for a predetermined period at the center of the display screen. The left-handed instruction display 659 (third display, third image) is larger than the right-handed instruction display 657 (first image) in the normal mode, but the right-handed instruction display 658 (second image) in the special mode. And approximately the same size. Therefore, the left-handed instruction display 659 is displayed so as to be conspicuous. The left-handed instruction display 659 is displayed on the front side in preference to the decoration special symbol of the decoration special figure variation display game.

  The entire image of the left-handed instruction display 659 is a combination of a character image 659 a “left-handed” indicating a character and a graphic image 659 b indicating a graphic (or symbol) of an arrow, and is stored in the image ROM 325 of the effect control device 300. Has been. Alternatively, when the left-handed instruction display 659 is displayed, the character image 659a and the graphic image 659b stored in the image ROM 325 may be combined and displayed as the left-handed instruction display 659.

  In (D13), one hold display 633 is displayed on the hold display section 630a in correspondence with the hold related to the special figure variation display game before execution. The holding display unit 630a displays a holding display 633 (starting memory display) corresponding to the first starting memory. The on-change hold display 633a indicating the hold related to the special figure change display game being executed is displayed in the hold-up digestion area 640. Further, the special figure 1 hold number display 650 displays the current special figure 1 hold (first start memory) number “1”, and the special figure 2 hold number display 660 shows the current special figure 2 hold (second display). The start memory) number “0” is displayed.

  Thereafter, in (D14), the decorative special figure variation display game is being executed.

  In (D15), the player is making a right turn despite the normal gaming state in which left-handed is recommended. Then, when the game ball has passed through the right area and flows to the normal start gate 34 (first predetermined area), the left-handed instruction notification command (A7703) from the game control device 100 is sent to the effect control device 300. (B1334 in FIG. 106). Then, the left-handed instruction display 659 is displayed at the center position of the display screen for a predetermined period by the process of step B3704 of the process for receiving the hitting instruction (FIG. 107). Again, the left-handed instruction display 659 (third display, third image) is larger than the right-handed instruction display 657 (first image) in the normal mode, but the right-handed instruction display 658 (second screen) in the special mode. The image is approximately the same size as Accordingly, the right-handed instruction display 658 of the special mode is displayed so as to be conspicuous.

  Next, in (d16), the left-handed instruction display 659 (third display) displayed for a predetermined period is deleted.

  In the screen transition described above, at the start of the jackpot state of (D3), the game control device 100 transmits a right-handed instruction notification command to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device as in (D9). 300 may display a special mode right-handed instruction display 658.

[Operations and effects of the twelfth embodiment]
According to the twelfth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes effect control means (effect control device 300) that can display on the display device 41 a variable display game (decoration special figure variable display game) that displays the identification information in a variable manner. The gaming machine 10 can generate a normal game state, a special game state (for example, a big hit state) and a specific game state (short time / probability change state) that are more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can fire a game ball in the first game area (the right area of the game area 32) in which it is recommended to launch a game ball in the special game state and the specific game state, and in the normal game state. A recommended second game area (a left area of the game area 32). The effect control means can display the first display (right-handed instruction display) and the second display (mode display) on the display device 41 as a display for recommending to the player to launch a game ball in the first game area. It is. The effect control means continuously displays the first display (right-handed instruction display) in the special game state and the specific game state that shifts after the special game state. The effect control means displays the second display (mode display) from the end of the special game state, from the start of the specific game state, or from the middle of the specific game state.

  According to the gaming machine 10 as described above, the first display (right-handed instruction display) and the second display (mode display) can surely execute the right-handed notification, and at the end of the special gaming state or the specific game The second display (mode display) can be displayed at the start of the state or in an appropriate period after the middle of the specific gaming state. For this reason, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, according to the twelfth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) includes the first image (normal mode right-handed instruction display 657) and the second image (special) larger than the first image. The first display (right-handed instruction display) can be displayed on the display device 41 by the right-handed instruction display 658). Further, the effect control means displays a third display (left-handed instruction display) that recommends the player to launch a game ball in the second game area with a third image larger than the first image. Can be displayed.

  Therefore, both the first image (normal mode right-handed instruction display 657) and the second image larger than the first image (special mode right-handed instruction display 658) give the player the first game area ( It is strongly recommended (instructed) to the player to launch a game ball in the right area. Further, the third display (left-handed instruction display) can be displayed prominently on the display device 41.

  In addition, according to the twelfth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) flows down the first game area (right area) to the first predetermined area (normal start gate 34) in the normal game state. When the ball has passed, the third display (left-handed instruction display) can be displayed on the display device 41. In the special game state or the specific game state, the effect control means (the effect control device 300) flows down the second game area (left area) and the game ball passes through the second predetermined area (start winning prize opening 36). In this case, the first display (right-handed instruction display) can be displayed on the display device 41. Accordingly, when a game ball is launched toward a game area that is not recommended in the current game state among the first game area and the second game area, a first display (right-handed instruction display) or a third display is displayed as a warning. (Left-handed instruction display) can be displayed.

[Thirteenth embodiment]
The thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 to 117. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to twelfth embodiments. In the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for configurations that perform the same functions as those in the first to twelfth embodiments, and repeated descriptions are omitted as appropriate.

  The thirteenth embodiment relates to a persistent notification effect in which one piece of information is reported persistently. The persistence notification effect is executed on a display device such as the display device 41 (which may be a sub display device other than the display device 41) under the control of the effect control device 300. In the present embodiment, in particular, the hitting information of the twelfth embodiment will be described as an example of one information, and the hitting notification effect for notifying the hitting information will be described as an example of the persistent notification effect.

  In the embodiment, the hitting notification shown as an example is a hitting instruction display (part (D) in FIG. 108B, FIG. 108C) that is displayed when the player executes a hitting method different from the recommended hitting method. (See (d) 15)), or a hitting instruction display (for example, see (d) 13 of FIG. 108B) displayed when the game state changes and the recommended hitting method changes.

  In the following, a description will be given of a relentless notification effect in which right-handed information for recommending a right-hand strike is notified by a special-type right-hand strike indication 658 of the hitting direction display. As described below, the manner of relentless notification effect is characterized by a plurality of parameters.

[Form of image itself (first parameter)]
FIG. 109 is a diagram exemplifying the form of the image of the right-handed instruction display 658 as the first parameter (first factor) that defines and characterizes the presentation mode of the persistence notification effect by the right-handed instruction display 658. Here, the form includes a shape, a pattern, and a color. Depending on the form of the image itself as the first parameter, the entire right-handed instruction display 658 can be impressed by the player.

  109A, 109B, and 109C each show an example of the image form of the right-handed instruction display 658. FIG. (A), (B), and (C) are particularly different in shape, but may be different in color and pattern. The production control device 300 not only uses an image (one of (A), (B), and (C)) of the right-handed instruction display 658 in a certain form stored in the image ROM 325, but also uses (A ) (B) A plurality of right-handed instruction display 658 images having different forms as in (C) may be stored in the image ROM 325 and appropriately selected.

  As shown in FIG. 109, the image of the right-handed instruction display 658 is composed of a frame image 658c indicating the shape of the frame in addition to the character image 658a indicating the character “right-handed” and the graphic image 658b indicating the arrow. A frame image 658c conforming in shape to the graphic image 658b touches the outer periphery of the graphic image 658b and surrounds the graphic image 658b. For this reason, the graphic image 658b and the frame image 658c are displayed integrally. Note that the frame image 658c is not limited to this, and may have another shape surrounding the character image 658a and / or the graphic image 658b (see FIGS. 113B1 to 113B described later). The character image 658a, the graphic image 658b, and the frame image 658c may be referred to as a first image, a second image, and a third image, respectively.

  The color of the character image 658a, the graphic image 658b, and the frame image 658c may be multicolor (plural colors) or single color, but this embodiment shows a case of multicolor. In the case of multiple colors, each image is painted in a plurality of colors that differ depending on the location. Further, the character image 658a, the graphic image 658b, and the frame image 658c may have a predetermined pattern.

[Color change (second parameter)]
FIG. 110 is a diagram exemplifying a color change inside the right-handed instruction display 658 as a second parameter (second factor) that defines and characterizes the presentation mode of the persistence notification effect by the right-handed instruction display 658. Here, the color change is a temporal change in color. By the color change as the second parameter, an image of the entire right-handed instruction display 658 can be impressed on the player.

  The effect control device 300 can change the color inside the right-handed instruction display 658 on the display screen of the display device 41 with time, but the color inside the right-handed instruction display 658 as a movie (movie, animation). May be changed over time.

  (A1) to (A3) in FIG. 110A show temporal changes in the color of the character image 658a in the image of the right-handed instruction display 658, and (A1) → (A2) → (A3) as time passes. The color of each part of the character image 658a changes. The inside of the character image 658a is painted in multiple colors (a plurality of colors), a blue region 661A indicated by vertical stripes, a green region 661B indicated by diagonal stripes, a yellow region 661C indicated by lattice stripes, and a red region indicated by mesh stripes 661D exists. The color regions are arranged in the horizontal direction (left-right direction) of the display screen, but may be arranged in the vertical direction (up-down direction) or diagonally.

  In (A1) of FIG. 110A, a blue region 661A, a green region 661B, a yellow region 661C, and a red region 661D are arranged from the left, and in (A2), the blue region 661A spreads in the center and the green region extends outward in the left-right direction. An area 661B, a yellow area 661C, and a red area 661D are arranged, and in (A3), a red area 661D, a yellow area 661C, a green area 661B, and a blue area 661A are arranged from the left, contrary to (A1).

  110A, (B1) to (B3) show temporal changes in the color of the graphic image 658b in the image of the right-handed instruction display 658, and (B1) → (B2) → (B3) as time passes. The color of each part of the graphic image 658b changes. The inside of the graphic image 658b is painted in multiple colors (a plurality of colors), a blue region 661A indicated by vertical stripes, a green region 661B indicated by diagonal stripes, a yellow region 661C indicated by lattice stripes, and a red region indicated by mesh stripes 661D exists.

  In (B1) of FIG. 110A, a red region 663D, a yellow region 663C, a green region 663B, and a blue region 663A are arranged from the left. In (B2), the blue region 663A spreads in the center and the green region extends outward in the left-right direction. A region 663B, a yellow region 663C, and a red region 663D are arranged. In (B3), a blue region 663A, a green region 663B, a yellow region 663C, and a red region 663D are arranged from the left, contrary to (B1).

  In FIG. 110A, the color of each part of the character image 658a and the graphic image 658b changes with time in various modes. For example, in the left part (hand-biased part) of the character “hit” in the character image 658a, green → blue → yellow, and in the right part of the character “hit” (“cutter”), yellow → blue → green in time Change.

  More simply, as shown in (A1) to (A3) of FIG. 110B, the character image is moved to the right so that the blue region 661A, the green region 661B, the yellow region 661C, and the red region 661D flow. The right-handed information may be notified according to the direction in which the color 658a flows. Similarly, as shown in (B1) to (B3) of FIG. 110B, the graphic image is moved to the right so that the red region 661D, the yellow region 661C, the green region 661B, and the blue region 661A flow. The right-handed information may be notified by the direction in which the color 658b flows.

  For convenience of illustration, in FIG. 110, the blue region 663A, the green region 663B, the yellow region 663C, and the red region 663D are arranged with clear boundaries. However, as shown in FIG. It is also possible to gradually change in the horizontal direction (spatially) according to the hue circle. Note that (A1) to (A3) and (B1) to (B3) in FIG. 111 correspond to (A1) to (A3) and (B1) to (B3) in FIG. 110, respectively.

  FIG. 111 is an example in which the character image 658a and the graphic image 658b are arranged so that the color gradually changes in the left-right direction (spatially) according to the hue circle. In FIG. 111, the dark portion is a red color, and the light portion is a blue color. For example, in FIG. 111, orange appears between yellow and red, and yellow-green appears between green and yellow. In FIG. 111, the color inside the character image 658a changes with time as (A1) → (A2) → (A3). In FIG. 111, the internal color of the graphic image 658b changes with time as (B1) → (B2) → (B3).

  In addition, the time change of the colors from (A1) to (A3) and (B1) to (B3) in FIGS. 110 and 111 is merely an example, and is not limited to this. For example, when the character image 658a and the graphic image 658b are painted in a single color instead of multiple colors, the entire color (one color) of the character image 658a and the graphic image 658b changes gradually with time according to the hue circle. May be.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the color of the frame image 658c does not change with time, but may change with time as in the case of the character image 658a and the graphic image 658b. For example, the portion of the frame image 658c and the portion of the graphic image 658b that opposes (contacts) the frame image 658c may be temporally changed with different colors or the same color. In the present embodiment, the color of the frame image 658c is a single color (for example, white), but may be multicolor.

[Display position change (3rd parameter, movement)]
FIG. 112 shows a change in the display position of the right-handed instruction display 658 on the display screen of the display device 41 as a third parameter (third factor) that defines and characterizes the presentation mode of the persistence notification effect by the right-handed instruction display 658, that is, FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating movement of a right-handed instruction display 658. By changing (moving) the display position as the third parameter, the entire right-handed instruction display 658 can be impressed by the player.

  The effect control device 300 can move the right-handed instruction display 658 by changing the display position of the right-handed instruction display 658 on the display screen of the display device 41. The effect control device 300 may move the right-handed instruction display 658 as a moving image (movie, animation).

  In FIG. 112, the entire right-handed instruction display 658 composed of the character image 658a, the graphic image 658b, and the frame image 658c moves within the display screen of the display device 41, and the display position of the right-handed instruction display 658 is temporally changed. Change. The moving direction of the right-handed instruction display 658 is a rightward direction toward the right side in order to notify (instruct, recommend, guide) right-handed.

  The arrangement (relative position) of the character image 658a, the graphic image 658b, and the frame image 658c in the right-handed instruction display 658 is fixed even if the right-handed instruction display 658 moves. That is, the character image 658a, the graphic image 658b, and the frame image 658c move together. In the right-handed instruction display 658, the character image 658a is arranged on the right side of the integrated graphic image 658b and the frame image 658c. In order to improve the fun of the game, the arrangement (relative position) of the character image 658a, the graphic image 658b, and the frame image 658c in the right-handed instruction display 658 changes with time, and the right-handed instruction display 658 A configuration that changes with movement is also possible.

  First, in (e) of FIG. 112, first, the character image 658a “right-handed” appears on the display screen from the left end position and moves to the right. The right-handed information is impressed by the form (first parameter) of the character image 658a (first image), the color change (second parameter), and the display position change (third parameter) to impress the player. Informed.

  Next, in (2), the graphic image 658b (second image) and the frame image 658c (third image) combined together appear from the left end position and move to the right side. The right-handed information is impressed and notified to the player by the form, color change, and display position change of the graphic image 658b. The right-handed information is impressed and notified to the player by the form of the frame image 658c itself and the display position change. Note that the right-handed information may be impressed and notified to the player by the color change of the frame image 658c.

  If right-handed information is notified to the player by the form, color change, and display position change of the graphic image 658b (second image) or the frame image 658c (third image) itself, the character information In addition to the character image 658a, the right-handed information can be surely notified by one arrow of the graphic image 658b and the frame image 658c combined together.

  Next, in (3), the character image 658a “right-handed” moved rightward reaches the rightmost position on the display screen and disappears from the display screen. Thereafter, the graphic image 658b and the frame image 658c moved to the right also reach the right end position and disappear from the display screen.

  Also, in (O 1) to (O 3), the effect control device 300 uses the right-handed instruction display 665 for notifying the right-handed information independently of the right-handed instruction display 658 as the persistent notification effect. At the same time, it is displayed on the display device 41. The right-handed instruction display 665 (fourth image) notifies the player of right-handed information as one piece of information only by the form of the image itself (first parameter). In FIG. 114, the right-handed instruction display 665 is a graphic image (fourth image) showing an arrow, but may be a character image showing a character (for example, “right-handed”).

  Unlike the right-handed instruction display 658 (first right-handed instruction display), the right-handed instruction display 665 (second right-handed instruction display) has a fixed display position and does not change color. The right-handed information is notified inconspicuously independently of the persistent notification effect by the plurality of parameters of the right-handed instruction display 658. Also, the right-handed instruction display 665 is less noticeable because it is smaller than the right-handed instruction display 658. The right-handed instruction display 665 continues in the special game state and / or the time-short / probable change state (specific game state) after the special game state, in the same manner as the right-handed instruction display 657 of the normal mode in the twelfth embodiment. May be displayed. That is, the right-handed instruction display 665 can be displayed not only at the same time as the right-handed instruction display 658 but also in a situation different from the right-handed instruction display 658, and therefore longer than the right-handed instruction display 658. It can be displayed over the entire screen, and is accordingly less noticeable than the right-handed instruction display 658. The right-handed instruction display 665 may have the same size as the right-handed instruction display 658 and may be made inconspicuous by displaying lightly.

  In addition, in (e) to (e), an effect image 658d movable with respect to the graphic image 658b and the frame image 658c is added on the frame image 658c. The effect image 658d will be described later.

[Effect addition (4th parameter, emphasis)]
FIG. 113 shows the addition of the effect image 658d to the right-handed instruction display 658 (here, the frame image 658c) as the fourth parameter (fourth factor) that defines and characterizes the presentation mode of the persistence notification effect by the right-handed instruction display 658. It is a figure illustrated. By adding the effect as the fourth parameter (adding the effect image 658d), the right-handed instruction display 658 can be impressed on the player.

  The effect control device 300 can move by changing the display position of the effect image 658d. The effect control apparatus 300 may move the effect image 658d as a moving image (movie, animation).

  As in (A1) to (A3) of FIG. 113, the effect image 658d is relatively relative to the graphic image 658b and the frame image 658c as (A1) → (A2) → (A3) with the passage of time. By moving in the right direction, right-handed information is notified. In addition, the movement of the effect image 658d can emphasize the integral arrows of the graphic image 658b and the frame image 658c, and can highlight the right-handed information by the graphic image 658b and the frame image 658c. The effect image 658d may move on the frame image 658c, move to the right end of the frame image 658c, and then start moving in the right direction from the left end again.

  As another example of the effect image 658d, the effect image 658d moves rightward on a frame image 658c surrounding the character image 658a with a gap as shown in (B1) to (B3) of FIG. It may be. The shape of the effect image 658d is not constant and may change with time. As the effect image 658d moves to the right relative to the character image 658a and the frame image 658c as time passes (B1) → (B2) → (B3), the right-handed information is notified. To do.

[Existence of each parameter]
FIG. 114 is a diagram illustrating the presence / absence of each parameter (each factor) that defines and characterizes the effect mode of the notification effect by the right-handed instruction display. The notification effect can be impressed on the player by each parameter (each factor).

  As described above, the first notification effect (right-handed instruction display 658 including a plurality of images of the first image (character image 658a), the second image (graphic image 658b), and the third image (frame image 658c)) ( In other words, the persistence notification effect) is right-handed by the first parameter (form of the image itself), the second parameter (color change), the third parameter (display position change), and the fourth parameter (effect addition) of each image. It is possible to persistently inform the player of right-handed information for recommending the player. The first notification effect (that is, persistence notification effect) is characterized by a plurality of parameters of at least two or more. On the other hand, the second notification effect by the right-handed instruction display 665 including only the fourth image (graphic image) notifies the player of right-handed information only by the first parameter (the form of the image itself).

  In the example of FIG. 114, as described above, the effects of the first image (character image 658a) and the second image (graphic image 658b) are characterized by the first parameter, the second parameter, and the third parameter. The effect of the third image (frame image 658c) is characterized by the first parameter, the third parameter, and the fourth parameter.

  Note that the effects of the first image and the second image may be characterized by the fourth parameter (addition of effects), and the effects of the third image are also characterized by the second parameter (color change). Good.

  In another example of FIG. 115, the effect of the first image (character image 658a) is characterized by the first parameter, the second parameter, and the fourth parameter. The effect of the second image (graphic image 658b) is characterized by the first parameter and the third parameter. The effect of the third image (frame image 658c) is characterized by the first parameter, the second parameter, the third parameter, and the fourth parameter. The first notification effect (that is, persistence notification effect) is characterized by a plurality of parameters of at least two or more.

  In addition to the first parameter to the fourth parameter shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the parameter that characterizes the presentation mode of the persistence notification effect is the addition of the voice from the speaker as the fifth parameter ("Please make a right-hand turn") Etc.), as the sixth parameter, the light emission of the light emitting member (LED of the board effect device 44) arranged on the right side of the game board 30, etc., as the seventh parameter, the temporal change of the shade of each image, as the eighth parameter There may be a temporal change in the shape of each image (for example, a change in (A) → (B) → (C) in FIG. 109). In addition, the spatial change of the color of each image itself or the spatial change of shading itself can be regarded as a parameter.

[Modification of relentless announcement production]
FIG. 116 is a screen transition diagram showing a modification of the effect mode of the reluctance notification effect by the right-handed instruction display 658. In FIG. 116, the color of each part of the character image 658a and the graphic image 658b may be temporally changed in the same direction of the hue circle. For example, the color of each part of the character image 658a and the graphic image 658b changes with time in one direction of the hue circle (... red → blue → green → yellow → red → blue → green →...). May be.

  In FIG. 116, the display screen of the display device 41 is divided and set in the horizontal direction (left-right direction) into a blue region 41A, a green region 41B, a yellow region 41C, and a red region 41D. In the moving character image 658a and graphic image 658b, the portion overlapping the blue region 41A is a blue region 661A painted in blue, the portion overlapping the green region 41B is a green region 661B painted in green, and overlaps the yellow region 41C. The portion is made a yellow region 661C painted in yellow, and the portion overlapping the red region 41D is made a red region 661D painted in red. In this way, by moving the character image 658a and the graphic image 658b, the color of each part of the character image 658a and the graphic image 658b is changed to one direction of the hue circle (... Red → blue → green → yellow → red → blue → It changes with time as green → ...).

  Further, the effect image 658d may always be displayed at the position of the vertical center line on the display screen. Even in this case, the effect image 658d moves relative to the graphic image 658b and the frame image 658c by the movement of the frame image 658c, and emphasizes the right-handed information of the graphic image 658b and the frame image 658c. Can be displayed. However, since the effect image 658d itself moves to the left relative to the graphic image 658b and the frame image 658c, the right-handed information cannot be notified.

[Left-handed instruction display]
109 to 113, the presentation mode of the reluctance notification effect by the right-handed instruction display 658 has been described. However, as shown in the screen transition diagram of FIG. A relentless notification effect of hit information may be executed.

  117 (ki 1) to (ki 3), a left-handed instruction comprising a plurality of images of a first image (character image 659a), a second image (graphic image 659b), and a third image (frame image 659c). The first notification effect (that is, persistence notification effect) by the display 659 includes a first parameter (a form of the image itself), a second parameter (color change), a third parameter (display position change), and a fourth parameter of each image. By adding an effect, it is possible to persistently notify the player of left-handed information for recommending left-handed. On the other hand, the second notification effect by the left-handed instruction display 667 consisting only of the fourth image (graphic image) notifies the player of left-handed information only by the first parameter (the form of the image itself).

  Since the left-handed state (normal game state) is more disadvantageous for the player than the right-handed state (probability change state or the like), the left-handed instruction display 659 is different from the right-handed instruction display 658. Also good. For example, the left-handed instruction display 659 may be different in color from the right-handed instruction display 658. The left-handed instruction display 659 may be spatially and temporally changed with a plain color such as gray, or may be a single color so as not to be spatially and temporally changed (no second parameter). Further, in the left-handed instruction display 659, the addition of an effect may be omitted (no fourth parameter).

  As described above, the persistence notification effect has been described. However, the persistence notification effect of the present embodiment is also applicable when notifying information other than how to hit. As notifications of information other than how to hit, for example, notification of operation instructions of the production buttons 25, notification of temporary stop of special decorations (notification of reach), notification of occurrence of big hits (fanfare), notification of rounds during big hits and so on. The notification of the operation instruction of the effect button 25 is, for example, notification by a character image such as “Press the button” and a graphic image imitating the operation button. The notification of the temporary stop of the decorative special symbol is, for example, notification by a character image of “reach”. The notification of the occurrence of a big hit is, for example, a notification using a character image of “hit”. Round notification is notification by character images such as “1 round” and “3 rounds”.

[Operations and effects of the thirteenth embodiment]
According to the thirteenth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of displaying a change display game (decoration special figure change display game) for displaying the identification information in a variable manner on the display device 41. The effect control means includes at least a first image (for example, a character image 658a), a second image (for example, a graphic image 658b), and a third image (for example, a frame image 658c) characterized by the first parameter (for example, the form of the image itself). ) Is displayed on the display device 41, it is possible to execute a relentless notification effect in which one piece of information (for example, right-handed information) is persistently notified. At least one of the first image, the second image, and the third image is characterized by a second parameter (for example, color change) and a third parameter (for example, display position change) in addition to the first parameter. One information (for example, right-handed information) can be notified to the player by the first parameter, the second parameter, and the third parameter.

  According to the gaming machine 10 as described above, it is possible to display (notify) one piece of information on the display device 41 in an easy-to-understand manner and impress a player by a persistent notification effect using three images and three parameters. For example, even if one piece of information is preferentially displayed on the front side (upper layer), there is a possibility that a situation in which it becomes difficult to see when the background changes drastically may occur, but such a situation can be prevented. In addition, a player who is a beginner or a player who does not use a predetermined language (Japanese) as a native language can easily display one piece of information on the display device 41 by a persistent notification effect using three images and three parameters. It can be displayed (notified) and impressed. In addition, the three images and the three parameters make the relentless notification effect lively, and the fun of the game increases.

  According to the thirteenth embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) notifies the player of one piece of information using the first parameter, the second parameter, and the third parameter of the first image, and then One information can be notified to the player by the first parameter, the second parameter, and the third parameter of the image or the third image. Therefore, the persistent notification effect can be impressed many times by the three parameters.

  According to the thirteenth embodiment, the effect control means (the effect control device 300) uses the fourth image (for example, the image of the right-handed instruction display 665) that notifies one piece of information independently of the persistence notification effect as the persistence notification effect. At the same time, it can be displayed on the display device 41. The fourth image notifies the player of one piece of information by the first parameter (for example, the form of the image itself). Therefore, by displaying the fourth image in addition to the persistence notification effect, it is possible to display (notify) one piece of information on the display device 41 in an easy-to-understand manner and impress the player. In addition, the fourth image is always informed of one piece of information (for example, right-handed information), and there is a special situation in which the need for notification is increased (for example, a situation in which a right-handed game is recommended and left-handed) ), It is possible to perform flexible notification such that a persistent notification effect is executed and one information (for example, right-handed information) is emphasized and notified.

  According to the thirteenth embodiment, at least one of the first image, the second image, and the third image has a fourth parameter (for example, an effect) in addition to the first parameter, the second parameter, and the third parameter. Additive). The effect control means can notify the player of one piece of information by the first parameter, the second parameter, the third parameter, and the fourth parameter. Accordingly, the relentless notification effect that emphasizes and notifies one piece of information can be executed, and the relentless notification effect becomes more lively and the fun of the game is improved.

  According to the thirteenth embodiment, the first parameter is the form of each image itself, the second parameter is the color change of each image, the third parameter is the change in the display position of each image on the display device 41, and Four parameters are the addition of effects. Therefore, the appearance of the relentless notification production itself is lively, and the entertainment of the game is improved.

  The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes can be made within the scope of the technical idea, and it is obvious that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. It is. For example, a plurality of embodiments can be combined. Further, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of gaming machines (such as slot machines). The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

10 gaming machine 12 front frame (game frame)
25 Production buttons 30 Game board 32 Game area 36 First start prize opening (first start prize area)
36b LED
37 Ordinary variable winning device (second starting winning area)
39 Special variation winning device 40 Center case 41 Display device 42 Setting change device 44 Board effect device 44c, 44d Internal character (movable body)
46 Panel decoration device 50 Collective display device (LED)
51 First special figure change display (Special figure 1 indicator)
52 Second Special Figure Change Display (Special Figure 2 Display)
93 Setting key switch 95a External accessory (outside movable member)
102 Setting Value Change Switch 143 Probability Setting Value Display Device 150 Driver 152 Status Display Device 153 LED Driver 100 Game Control Device (Main Board)
200 payout control device 300 effect control device (sub-board)
341 Error code 342 Error code 343 Character information 344 Underline 345 Notification information 400 Power supply device 510 Parts 513 Identification board 516 Parallel serial conversion unit 519 Wiring (electric wire)
630 On-hold display area 640 On-hold digestion area 815 I2CI / O expander

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state that gives a player a game value when a display result of a variable display game that changes identification information becomes a special result,
Movable actors that perform game production,
Start memory means capable of storing start memory which is the right to execute the variable display game based on establishment of the start condition;
Production control means capable of executing control of the movable accessory and control of displaying a start memory display corresponding to the start memory,
The start memory means holds a start memory that becomes a special result when a power failure occurs in a state in which the start memory that the display result of the variable display game is a special result is included in the stored start memory. And
The production control means includes
When a power failure occurs in the state where the start memory stored in the start memory means includes a start memory in which the display result of the variable display game is a special result, the movable accessory is removed after the power failure is restored. Operating in the first operation,
In the variable display game executed after the first action, the movable accessory is operated in a second action,
In the special game state executed after the second operation, the movable accessory is operated in a third operation,
A gaming machine, wherein the same movable accessory is operated in any of the first operation, the second operation, and the third operation.